140+ Easy Vegetarian Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegetarian/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Tue, 20 Jan 2026 23:24:02 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 140+ Easy Vegetarian Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegetarian/ 32 32 Compound Butter for Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/#comments Fri, 14 Nov 2025 13:45:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78361 Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, we did not celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago. Over the years, watching more experienced cooks and learning from a few dry turkeys myself, I discovered one very important truth:

There is a tiny window between juicy perfection and dry disappointment.

So I started focusing on the techniques that truly keep turkey moist. One option is using a Turkey Injection to add seasoning and moisture inside the meat, but I also wanted an option that was easier and required no special tools.

That is where this compound butter, which I specifically created for turkey, comes in.

In the simplest terms, it is softened butter mixed with herbs, garlic, and spices that slowly melts under the skin as the turkey roasts, keeping the meat juicy and helping the skin turn beautifully golden and crisp.

To me, this make-ahead friendly recipe is a simple shortcut with big rewards. And in this post, I will walk you through everything you need to know, from the herbs and spices to use to the easiest way to spread it under the skin so you can confidently cook a tender, flavorful, perfectly browned turkey that everyone will love.

Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas

The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic, resulting in a perfectly seasoned turkey. You can find the exact measurements and the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

Ingredients for butter mixture for turkey.

Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. With that said, you can use salted butter and reduce the salt to ¾ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Fresh herbs will give you the best flavor. I like adding fresh rosemary, fresh thyme, and fresh sage, but you can also incorporate soft herbs like fresh parsley or chives.

While I recommend using fresh herbs, dried ones can also be used as an alternative. Use the chart below when substituting:

For 1 Stick (4 oz) of ButterDried Herb/Seasoning Equivalent
1 tbsp fresh rosemary1 tsp dried rosemary
1 tbsp fresh rhyme1 tsp dried thyme
1 tsp fresh sage1/3 tsp dried sage
2 cloves fresh garlic1/2 tsp garlic powder

How to Make Compound Butter for Turkey (Step-by-Step)

Once your ingredients are ready, this recipe can be prepared in under 5 minutes. Here’s how to make it step by step:

A collage of images showing how to make butter seasoning for turkey.

Step 1 – Mix butter, herbs, and garlic: In a small bowl, combine softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Mash the herbs into the butter with the back of a fork or a rubber spatula until well combined, for about 1 minute. If you’re using salted butter, just reduce the Kosher salt slightly.

A collage of images showing how to roll compound butter for thanksgiving turkey.

Step 2 – Use immediately or shape into a log: At this point, your turkey compound butter recipe is ready to use. You can use it right away or roll it up for later use. 

If you are planning to use it later, place the butter on a sheet of parchment paper or plastic wrap. Then shape it into a log, wrap it tightly, and refrigerate for at least 3 hours.

Pro tip: I like to twist the ends of the parchment like a candy wrapper. It helps the butter keep its shape and makes it super easy to slice later.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

One of the reasons I love using this compound butter for Thanksgiving turkey is that it can be made ahead of time, and it stores well. Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter as directed, then shape it into a log and wrap it tightly in parchment or plastic wrap. I like to do a double wrap (plastic wrap followed by an airtight container) to keep it fresh and prevent it from picking up any fridge odors. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Follow the same wrapping steps and store the butter in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.

Thawing: When you’re ready to use it, take it out of the freezer and let it sit at room temperature for about 1 hour, or until it softens enough to slice and spread.

Sliced Thanksgiving turkey compound butter with a knife on the side.

How to Apply Compound Butter Under Turkey Skin (Step-by-Step)

Now that our compound butter is ready, it’s time to put it to use. If it’s your first time spreading compound butter under the turkey skin, don’t worry, as it’s easier than it looks.

A person showing how to place butter and herbs under skin for turkey.

Step 1 – Dry the skin: Let your turkey rest at room temperature for about an hour before you start. This is critical because cold skin is rigid and prone to tearing, but a rested bird’s skin will loosen up and be much more forgiving.

Set your turkey on a clean cutting board and pat the skin dry with paper towels on all sides. This will help the butter stick better and ensure that it crisps up beautifully in the oven. 

Step 2 – Loosen the skin: Locate the neck opening and gently slide your fingers between the skin and meat to loosen it. 

If you feel resistance, stop immediately. Instead of forcing separation, gently wiggle your fingers so that it is loose enough to push the butter under the skin.

Step 3 – Apply the butter: Take about two tablespoons of your turkey butter herb rub and spread it under the skin, focusing on the breast and thighs. Spread it as evenly as possible by massaging the entire bird, including both the under and outer skin. 

Don’t worry about it being perfect, as the butter will melt while the turkey roasts.

Step 4 – Roast the turkey: Place the prepared turkey in a roasting pan with aromatics such as onions, carrots, and celery.

Compound Butter vs. Dry Rub: Which is Best for Your Turkey?

I’ll be honest, when it comes to seasoning the whole bird, this turkey compound butter recipe is my go-to. However, it is not the only way. If you are wondering whether to use this herbed butter or opt for my Homemade Turkey Rub, the choice comes down to your goal:

  • Choose Compound Butter for:
    • Maximum Moisture and Juiciness: The fat melts beneath the skin, self-basting the white meat throughout the long cooking time, which is key to a tender breast.
    • Golden-Brown Skin: The butter is brushed over the skin, which helps brown the turkey beautifully and develop a rich, buttery flavor.
    • Make-Ahead Simplicity: You can prepare this compound butter days in advance, saving time on Thanksgiving day.
  • Choose a Turkey Dry Rub for:
    • Ultra-Crispy Skin: A dry rub acts as a dry brine, helping to draw moisture from the skin and give you an extra-crispy exterior.
    • Convenience & Speed: If you are short on time and need a quick way to add seasoning, the dry rub is much faster to apply than the compound butter.

FAQs

How much compound butter do I need for turkey?

Over the years of using this compound butter when making our Thanksgiving turkey, I learned that 8 tablespoons (1 stick or 4 ounces) is enough for a bird that is up to 12 pounds, which is about ¾ tablespoon per pound. The important thing here is even distribution under and over the skin without overdoing it.
For a larger bird, you can easily multiply the recipe. If your turkey is between 12 and 18 pounds, multiply the ingredients by 1.5 times.

When should I butter my turkey?

It’s best to butter the turkey right before roasting. Applying the butter just before it goes in the oven helps the skin get crispy while the meat stays juicy and tender throughout cooking.

How to make butter stick to turkey?

If the butter isn’t spreading easily, it’s usually because the turkey skin is damp or the butter is too cold. I like to take the turkey out of the fridge about 1 hour before roasting and pat the skin completely dry with paper towels before adding the butter.

Can I add compound butter to the turkey cavity?

I’ve found it’s best to spread the butter under and over the skin rather than inside the cavity. That way, it melts evenly and keeps the skin golden instead of soggy.

Expert Tips for the Best Compound Butter for Turkey

If this is your first time making compound butter, these notes from several rounds of testing will help you get it just right every time:

  • Use softened butter: Let the butter sit at room temperature for about an hour, until it’s soft and spreadable. If it’s too firm, it won’t blend smoothly with the herbs and seasoning.
  • Rinse and dry your herbs: If you’re using fresh herbs, wash and dry them thoroughly before mincing, as they can hold onto moisture, which makes the butter watery. I like to place the washed herbs between two pieces of paper towels to absorb excess moisture; alternatively, put them in a salad spinner to remove as much liquid as possible.
  • Mince herbs finely: Chop your herbs as finely as possible to ensure they distribute evenly throughout the butter. 
  • A word on using fresh garlic and botulism: When using fresh garlic to make compound butter, keep in mind that a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic is stored at temperatures between 50 °F (10 °C) and 113 °F (45 °C).  Therefore, be sure to keep this seasoned butter in the refrigerator unless you plan to use it within the next hour or so.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Delicious Ways to Use Compound Butter (Turkey and Beyond)

Now that you have this perfect turkey butter prepared, it’s ready to transform your Thanksgiving centerpiece. In fact, this is what I use in my Butter Herb Roasted Turkey and Roasted Turkey Breast recipes.

That being said, just because I’m featuring this compound butter for turkey does not mean it cannot be used in other ways. It is truly the perfect finishing touch to many different meals. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Grilled or Roasted Meat Recipes: It’s hard to find a steakhouse that doesn’t serve a slice of compound butter over their hot, juicy steaks. Make a restaurant-quality meal at home by serving rounds of herb butter on top of Grilled Steak, Beef Tenderloin, or Roasted Chicken Breast.
  • Seafood: Don’t you love a warm, garlicky butter with seafood? Use this herb butter mix to elevate Grilled Salmon or Grilled Shrimp.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: You can truly elevate the flavor of roasted vegetables with this compound butter. Serve it as the topping for Grilled Corn or finish Roasted Butternut Squash with a few melting spoonfuls of this butter.
  • Bread: Butter and bread are a classic pair. Spread a few thin rounds over warm slices of my  Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread, or use it as the butter base when making my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
Thanksgiving butter with herbs sliced.
Print

Compound Butter for Turkey Recipe

Here's a fantastic compound butter for turkey that you can make in minutes. This is probably the easiest way to flavor your Thanksgiving turkey with succulent flavors from fresh (or dried) herbs, garlic, and lemon zest. Make ahead friendly, this recipe is my secret sauce for properly seasoned and moist turkey.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 8 tablespoons
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz unsalted butter 1 stick – at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ⅓ teaspoon dried sage
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Mix until well combined using a fork.
  • You can use it right away, or you can turn your compound butter into a log. If you are not using it right away, transfer the butter mixture onto a piece of parchment paper or stretch film and shape it into a log.*
  • Wrap it tightly so it holds its shape. Transfer it to the fridge and let it rest for at least 3 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 tablespoons (4 ounces) of compound butter, which is ideal for a turkey that weighs 10-12 pounds. If your bird is larger, you can multiply the recipe and vice versa. The calorie information below is for one tablespoon.
  • *If it is too soft, you might have to chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before rolling
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter mixture as directed. Follow the instructions to shape it into a log and wrap it tightly. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five days.
  • Freezing: Store it in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, and be sure to take it out of the fridge at least an hour before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Thanksgiving compound butter in a bowl from the top view.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/feed/ 2
Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/#comments Tue, 04 Nov 2025 20:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15392 Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You…]]>

This is the only way I make mashed sweet potatoes.

Aysegul

When it comes to Thanksgiving side dishes, I have a few go-to recipes, and this creamy sweet potato mash has been one of them for over 10 years. I first came across the recipe in Cook’s Illustrated, and it has never let me down.

What I love most is its flexibility. You can make it right before serving dinner, or prepare it ahead of time and reheat it without losing any of its creaminess. I usually keep it simple, but it’s also the perfect base for adding your own twist, whether you prefer a sweet touch with maple syrup or a savory one with herbs and spices.

Over the years, I’ve tried it both slightly sweet and boldly savory, and it always turns out creamy and delicious. I don’t know about you, but for me, this is the best kind of recipe I need for the holidays: easy, reliable, and open to your own creativity.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work

This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my testing:

Ingredients from the top view with text on each one.

Sweet Potatoes: I use the standard sweet potatoes commonly found at most U.S. grocery stores. The most popular kinds are Jewel or Garnet; they both work in this recipe and offer a naturally sweet taste and creamy texture. 

Look for firm ones with smooth skin and no visible bruises. Peel them and cut into similar-sized chunks so they cook evenly.

Unsalted Butter: I used unsalted butter so I can adjust the salt myself, but salted butter can also be used. If you want to make these mashed potatoes dairy-free, you can swap in your favorite vegan butter.

Heavy Cream: If you look at the recipe below, you might think that only 2 tablespoons of heavy cream won’t be enough to cook all the potatoes, but it is. Both sweet potatoes and butter will release their juices, which is plenty to steam them in the pan.

While it won’t be as creamy, you can substitute it with half-and-half, regular milk, or almond milk for a vegan option.

Seasonings: I keep it basic with kosher salt and black pepper. However, if you want a hint of warmth, add a pinch of ground cinnamon and a touch of nutmeg; they both pair particularly well with sweet potatoes.

Maple Syrup (Optional): I personally love how it brings out the natural sweetness of the potatoes, but if you prefer not to add any sweeteners, you can leave it out.

How to Make Mashed Sweet Potatoes

When it comes to mashed sweet potatoes, the first question that always arises is: should you bake, steam, or boil them? While there are recipes for each, over the years of making this creamy sweet potato mash, I’ve found that the easiest and most reliable way is none of those. 

Instead, cooking cubed sweet potatoes right in the pan with a bit of butter and cream is the right answer. 

Images showing the adding of sweet potatoes, cream and butter to the pan.

Step 1 – Cook the Sweet Potatoes: Place the peeled and cubed sweet potatoes in a large pot with butter, cream, a splash of maple syrup, and salt and pepper. There’s no need to add water as the potatoes release their own liquid as they cook. 

Next, cover the pan with a tight lid so they can steam. This step is important because it keeps the potatoes from drying out. Stir every so often to keep them from sticking to the bottom.

Also, keep in mind that this whole process is quite quick, so keep a close eye on it.

Person showing how to mash sweet potatoes after they are cooked.

Step 2 – Mash To Your Liking: Once the potatoes are soft and tender, mash them right in the pot. I like to use a potato masher or even a fork for a more chunky texture.
For a perfectly smooth consistency, consider using an immersion blender or a potato mill.

Easy mashed sweet potatoes garnished with butter and pecans in a bowl.

Step 3 – Season and Serve: Taste the mash and add a little more salt or pepper, as needed. Then, transfer it to a serving bowl and finish with your favorite garnish.

Expert Tips for the Best Mashed Sweet Potatoes

Although this sweet mashed potatoes recipe is as simple as it gets, a few tricks will help you achieve the best results. Here are my notes from making it over the years:

  • Potato masher vs. food processor: A masher works perfectly for a more rustic texture. If you use a food processor, pulse instead of blending continuously, so the mash stays creamy rather than gluey.
  • Use a pot with a tight-fitting lid: The lid helps the potatoes steam in their own juices, which makes them creamy without the need for extra liquid.
  • Keep a close eye on it: This recipe comes together quickly, usually in about 20 minutes. Keep the heat at medium to medium-low and give them a stir a couple of times. Potatoes cook quicker than you think, and if they are left alone, they can stick to the bottom.
  • Cut the potatoes the same size: This helps them cook evenly, so you don’t end up with some pieces still firm while others are mushy.

FAQs

Why are my mashed sweet potatoes watery?

With many recipes, this occurs when the potatoes are boiled but not drained properly. Since this recipe cooks the potatoes in their own juices, you don’t have to worry about excess water.

How do I fix a dry mash?

If the mash feels too thick, stir in a splash of warm cream or milk until it reaches to your desired level of consistency.

Can I use yams instead?

I do not recommend using yams in this recipe. Here in the US, most people refer to sweet potatoes as yams but they are not the same thing. True yams are very starchy with a mild flavor so they won’t deliver the same results.

Serving Suggestions

This is one of my go-to Thanksgiving sides, and it pairs beautifully with both holiday favorites and simple weeknight meals. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and thyme.
Print

Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes Recipe

Most mashed sweet potato recipes boil the sweet potatoes, and while that is a good approach, it takes a long time, and you lose most of the flavor in the boiling water. My recipe here cooks them in a pot along with a bit of butter and heavy cream. The result is a super creamy sweet potato mash that comes together in under 30 minutes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 343kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter cut into 4 pieces, extra for topping if preferred
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 2 pounds sweet potatoes 3 medium-sized , peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup optional
  • 3/4 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon pecans as garnish – optional
  • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs thyme or parsley, chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Place butter, heavy cream, sweet potatoes, maple syrup, salt, and black pepper in a medium-sized saucepan with a tight fitting lid.
    Person pouring in heavy cream into saucepan.
  • Stir well to combine.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Cook, stirring occasionally, over low heat until sweet potatoes are soft (almost falling apart), 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a knife into a sweet potato. If it comes in and out easily, it should be ready to mash.
    Person checking the doneness of a sweet potato cube with a knife.
  • Using a potato masher (or a fork), mash the potatoes. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Place in a bowl or a plate (like I did) and garnish with pecans and/or butter.
    Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter, thyme, and pecans.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 4-5 cups of mashed sweet potatoes, enough to serve 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make-Ahead: You can prepare the mashed sweet potatoes 1 to 2 days in advance of serving. Simply let them cool completely, then store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: There are a few simple ways to warm them up:
    • Stovetop: Warm them gently over low heat with a splash of cream or butter until they reach your desired consistency. Stir frequently to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.
    • Oven: Place them in an oven-safe dish, cover loosely with foil, and let them warm up for about 10-15 minutes. 
  • Freezing: You can also freeze it in a freezer-safe container or bag for up to 2 months. Just thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat to enjoy.

Nutrition

Calories: 343kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 565mg | Potassium: 791mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 32640IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg

Holiday Variations and Garnish Ideas

I usually garnish with a couple of pecans, but this mash is super flexible. Here are some of my favorite ways to spice it up:

For a sweet version: You can garnish with cinnamon, brown sugar, roasted marshmallows, or add a little extra maple syrup. A touch of fresh orange zest or lime zest are also good options.

For a savory version: Mix in a small clove of roasted garlic (or try this quick air fryer roasted garlic) and a small amount of fresh herbs like fresh thyme or rosemary. You can also add a sprinkle of shredded parmesan and a handful of fresh chives. 

For the holidays: If you want to take it up a notch for Christmas or Thanksgiving, I recommend browning the butter. Before adding the sweet potatoes to the pot, let the butter simmer until browned. 

You can also garnish with candied bacon or toasted pumpkin seeds for crunch.

Maple sweetened easy mashed sweet potato recipe placed on an oval dish served with pecans

More Sweet Potato Recipes 

If you are like me and can’t get enough of sweet potatoes, here are a few more recipes I make every year around the holidays:

  • My adaptation of Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Soufflé Recipe has been one of the most popular holiday potato recipes on the blog, thanks to its thick butter and pecan streusel-like topping.
  • If you’re looking for something both sweet and savory, try my Sweet Potato Stacks. It’s baked thin slices of sweet potatoes that are perfect for brunch, dinner, or any holiday meal.
  • And if you’re craving something warm and comforting, this Vegan Sweet Potato Soup is silky, spiced with ginger and carrots, and perfect as either a holiday starter or a simple weeknight meal.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 18
Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Tahini Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/#respond Sat, 01 Nov 2025 19:45:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84257 Ingredients You’ll Need This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler…]]>

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with a Mediterranean Twist

Aysegul

Let’s face it, perfectly crispy and tender roasted Brussels sprouts already have their place on the holiday table, but why not spend 5 more minutes to give them a little Mediterranean flair and turn them into a showstopper? 

Growing up in Turkiye, I learned how a few simple ingredients, such as olive oil, Greek yogurt, garlic, and tahini, can transform even the most familiar dishes into something a bit more thoughtful and creative.

This crispy Brussels sprouts recipe follows that same philosophy: an easy way to take a holiday classic and elevate it with bold, balanced flavors, all without adding any extra stress to your cooking routine.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler than it looks. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing to make sure it all comes together perfectly:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Brussels sprouts: 

Brussels Sprouts: When shopping, take the time to choose firm, bright green sprouts that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Seasoning: I kept the Brussels sprouts seasoning simple with paprika, ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

For the Tahini Yogurt Sauce:

The Tahini Yogurt Sauce recipe I am using in this baked Brussels sprout recipe is one of the first recipes I learned from my mom. It is also a staple in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Greek Yogurt: I recommend using a thick Greek yogurt instead of regular yogurt. It’ll give you a creamier texture and will spread smoothly.

Tahini: I really like Soom’s tahini because it’s super creamy, smooth, and easy to work with. Be sure to give your tahini a good stir and a quick taste before using it, as the flavor and texture can vary between brands.

Garlic: I am using freshly minced garlic, but if you prefer a milder taste, you can use ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder as an alternative, or simply omit it.

For Garnish:

Pine Nuts: Taking the time to toast the pine nuts makes all the difference, and it’s, in my opinion, what takes this oven-roasted Brussels sprouts recipe to the next level. 

Toasting them is so easy! Simply add them to a dry skillet and toast over medium heat for 4-5 minutes, stirring often, until they’re golden and fragrant. 

Pomegranate Arils: I am using them to add a festive color, more texture, and to balance the creaminess of the sauce. In a pinch, dried cranberries can be used as a substitute.

Pomegranate Molasses (optional): If you can get your hands on it, a drizzle of pomegranate molasses is a classic Mediterranean finishing touch. Alternatively, you can use balsamic glaze as a substitute. It will have a different flavor profile but will still taste delicious.

How to Make Crispy Roasted Brussels Sprouts: Oven Method

The secret to getting that irresistible crisp edge and tender center is high heat, space on the pan, and a touch of olive oil. Here’s exactly how I roast Brussels sprouts so they come out golden and crisp every single time:

Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.

Step 1 – Prep the Brussels Sprouts: Preheat your oven to 425°F (204°C) and line a sheet pan with parchment paper. Trim the ends of each Brussels sprout and slice them in half. Transfer the sprouts to the pan and drizzle them with extra virgin olive oil, and sprinkle with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.

Person seasoning Brussels sprouts with ground cumin and paprika on a sheet pan.

Step 2 – Arrange the Sprouts Cut-Side Down for Maximum Caramelization: This may seem like an extra step, but it’s crucial for achieving the best texture. Flip each sprout cut-side down and make sure they’re spaced evenly on the pan. When the flat sides touch the hot pan, they caramelize beautifully. Otherwise, the moisture will trap and steam them instead.

Freshly roasted Brussels sprouts from the top view.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the Brussels sprouts for about 20 minutes, tossing them once halfway through so they brown evenly. Since each oven is different, check on them around the 18-minute mark. You’re looking for golden edges and centers that are soft enough to pierce with a fork but still hold their shape.

If they’re not crispy enough, leave them for a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on them.

Step 4 – Let Them Cool: Once the Brussels sprouts are out of the oven, allow them to cool in the pan for a few minutes before assembling, allowing the steam to escape and keeping the outsides crisp.

Assembling the Baked Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce

Now that we have roasted the Brussels sprouts, it is time to put them all together. Honestly, this is my favorite part as it takes no more than 2 minutes but looks so impressive.

Person making the tahini yogurt sauce for the recipe.

Step 1 – Make the sauce: If you’ve never paired roasted vegetables with a cool yogurt sauce before, you’re in for a treat. To make my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, whisk together thick Greek yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, and salt in a bowl. 

Step 2 – Spread: Place a large serving platter (or an oval plate, as shown in the pictures) on a flat surface and spread the yogurt sauce evenly on the bottom in a layer using the back of a spoon. This creamy base should be easy to spread but nice and thick.

Roasted Brussels sprouts served over yogurt sauce with tahini.

Step 3 – Add the Brussels Sprouts: Add the now slightly cooled Brussels sprouts directly over the sauce. It does not have to be perfect; let some of the sprouts overlap or fall to the sides. 

Step 4 – Garnish and Serve: Finish it off with toasted pine nuts for added crunch, a handful of pomegranate seeds for a touch of sweetness, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, if using.

Helpful Tips for the Best Roasted Brussels Sprouts

After testing this recipe a few times, I found a few small details that make a big difference in getting Brussels sprouts that are perfectly crisp on the outside and tender on the inside:

  • For the Best Crisp: The key to perfectly golden Brussels sprouts is spacing them so the steam doesn’t trap, which makes them soft instead of crispy. Arrange them cut-side down to get that beautiful golden crust where they touch the pan.
  • Using parchment paper: Direct contact with the hot pan helps the cut sides caramelize more. I’ve tested both ways, and thanks to the high 425°F/218°C oven temperature, the difference was negligible. So, choose whichever matters more to you: easy cleanup or maximum crispiness.
  • Toss halfway through: Giving them a quick stir at the halfway point helps them brown evenly and prevents one side from overcooking or burning. 
  • Dry them thoroughly: Make sure the sprouts are completely dry before seasoning them. It will help them roast better. If you’re short on time, a good shortcut is to buy pre-cut, ready-to-eat Brussels sprouts, which can be easily found in most large grocery stores.

FAQs

How do you prepare Brussels sprouts for roasting?

Rinse them under cold water to remove any debris, then dry them really well. Trim the woody ends and cut each sprout in half.

How long to roast Brussels sprouts at 425°F?

At this temperature, they’ll roast in about 20 minutes. If your sprouts are larger, you may have to roast them a bit longer (no more than 5 minutes).

How do you know when Brussels sprouts are cooked?

The outer layers should look golden brown with a crispy texture, while the insides feel soft and tender in the center when pierced with a fork.

How do you season Brussels sprouts?

Brussels sprouts take well to warm, earthy spices. Start with salt and pepper, then add a warming spice like paprika, cumin, or coriander. They’re also great with smoked paprika, garlic powder, or a little cayenne if you want some heat.

Can I reheat leftovers?

Yes! While roasted Brussels sprouts are always best fresh out of the oven, you can revive leftovers by warming them in a 400°F (200°C) oven for 5-7 minutes to restore their crispness. I don’t recommend microwaving them, as they’ll soften too much and lose their crispiness.

More Brussels Sprouts Recipes to Try

There is a reason why Brussels sprouts are one of the most popular Thanksgiving vegetable sides. They are so versatile and take on pretty much any flavor. So, if you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few Brussels sprouts recipes from the archives:

  • If you love a crisp and tangy green salad that makes sprouts shine, look no further than my Kale Brussel Sprout Salad
  • For another brussels sprouts recipe perfect for your holiday table, try my Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts. This 5-ingredient recipe is just as colorful and easy to make.
  • If you’ve never had shredded Brussels sprouts, you’ll love my Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad. It’s a bright and crunchy salad that is tossed with apples, hazelnuts, and goat cheese. 
  • For an easy sheet-pan side, try my Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes. This is the perfect simple fall side that works for both simple weeknights and holidays.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Roasted Brussels sprouts garnished with pomegranate seeds and served over yogurt tahini sauce.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce Recipe

These roasted Brussels sprouts are crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and served over a creamy tahini yogurt sauce for a bright Mediterranean twist. Finished with toasted pine nuts, pomegranate seeds, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, this simple side dish feels restaurant-worthy yet easy enough for any weeknight or your holiday table.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 389kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Brussels Sprouts:

  • 1 ½ lbs Brussels sprouts cleaned and sliced in half lengthwise
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Tahini Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt full-fat
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

As Garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425 °F/204 °C. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchement paper.
  • Place Brussels sprouts on the sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle them with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
    Person seasoning Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the sprouts are evenly coated with everything. Arrange the Brussels sprouts cut side down and roast them for 20 minutes, tossing them halfway through.
    Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down while you are working on making the yogurt sauce.
    Crispy roasted Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • While the sprouts are roasting, make the tahini sauce. In a medium bowl, whisk together yogurt, tahini, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper.
    Two images side by side showing the making and spreading of the yogurt tahini sauce.
  • When ready to assemble, spread the yogurt sauce on a serving platter. Arrange the Brussels sprouts over the top. Sprinkle them with toasted pine nuts and pomegranate arils. If using, finish it off with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses.
    A collage of images showing the roasted Brussels sprouts being assembled.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4-5 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How to Make Ahead: I’ve tested this recipe both fresh and prepped ahead, and while it’s best right out of the oven, it still tastes wonderful the next day. To prep ahead, you can roast the sprouts and make the sauce, then store them separately in the fridge for up to one day in advance. On the day off, you can reheat the sprouts in a 400-degree oven for 7-8 minutes and then assemble the recipe as written.
  • Storage: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for 2-3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 937mg | Potassium: 920mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1423IU | Vitamin C: 151mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 4mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 0
Cottage Cheese Egg Bites https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-egg-bites/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-egg-bites/#comments Mon, 20 Oct 2025 19:52:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83872 I recently started working with a health coach to make sustainable lifestyle changes, and as you can probably guess, increasing…]]>

I recently started working with a health coach to make sustainable lifestyle changes, and as you can probably guess, increasing my daily protein intake has been a big focus. As a professional recipe developer, I’m always thinking about ways to make food not just tasty but also easy to make.

Like many of you, I’ve seen the cottage cheese egg bites trending all over social media. They looked promising, but most versions required a blender or sous vide, which felt more complicated than I wanted.

So I developed a version that could be mixed in one bowl with minimal ingredients in 5 minutes and baked in a standard 12-cup muffin tin. Think of this as a customizable base: you can toss in leftover veggies or cooked protein you already have on hand.

Along the way, I also addressed common issues like watery textures or deflated bites, so you’ll find helpful tips throughout the post to ensure yours turn out just right.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Some recipes you’ll find online refer to this recipe as “3-ingredient egg bites” because it uses three simple ingredients: eggs, cottage cheese, and shredded cheddar cheese. 

Ingredients for eggs with cottage cheese bites with text on the image.

From there, you can mix in your favorite vegetables or breakfast meats to make it your own. You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Eggs: I recommend using large organic eggs. While it won’t be as fluffy, you can up the amount of protein by using a mix of whole eggs and egg whites (4 whole eggs and 4 egg whites). I wouldn’t recommend using only egg whites because without the yolks, it loses that soft, custardy texture and rich taste that make it so satisfying.

Cottage Cheese: During my recipe testing, I found that full-fat (4%) cottage cheese gives the most creamy and custardy results. You can use both small and large curd cottage cheese.

Be sure to strain it if it has any excess liquid, so the egg mixture is not too watery. Additionally, some cottage cheeses can be saltier than others, so give yours a quick taste before adding extra salt to the mixture. 

Cheese: I am using freshly shredded cheddar cheese, but if you’re wondering about the best cheese for egg bites, mozzarella, Monterey Jack, Parmesan, or gruyere cheese all work well. Feel free to mix a couple of cheeses together for extra depth. 

If you have the time, shred your own cheese as store-bought pre-shredded cheeses contain anti-caking agents that prevent even melting and the creaminess of these egg and cottage cheese bites.

Spinach: I opted for baby spinach as it is quick and easy to incorporate into the cottage cheese egg bites. I buy prewashed spinach that is sold in stores to save time. 

If you prefer to wash your own, be sure to rinse and drain well before adding it into the egg mixture to prevent egg bites from turning watery.

Seasonings: I kept it simple with kosher salt, black pepper, garlic powder, and paprika. But feel free to adjust to match the flavors you enjoy. You can add onion powder, red pepper flakes, or even a small amount of dried herbs like parsley, dill, oregano, or thyme.

Add-Ins and Flavor Ideas

These egg bites with cottage cheese are so easy to make, and there’s plenty of room to get creative. Here are a few of my favorite ways to change them up:

Breakfast meats: You can add about 1 cup of crumbled baked turkey bacon, regular bacon, cooked sausage (both pork and chicken would work), or diced ham. 

Potatoes and chives: If you love Starbucks’ Potato and Chive Egg Bites, you can easily recreate their flavor at home with this recipe. Cut a small yellow potato into ½-inch cubes and sauté them in a bit of oil until tender. Once cooled, stir them into the egg mixture along with a handful of chopped chives.

Other vegetables: Lighter vegetables, such as mushrooms, cherry tomatoes, or baby spinach, work best. Heavier vegetables, such as broccoli or bell peppers, can be used, but I recommend chopping them finely before adding them to the egg mixture. Stick to about 1 cup of vegetables so the bites don’t get weighed down.

Frozen vegetables would also work (such as frozen spinach); however, be sure to thaw them and squeeze out all the liquid before adding them to the egg mixture.

How to Make Egg Bites with Cottage Cheese 

Aside from the simple ingredients, these cottage cheese cups come together in just a few simple steps, requiring only a large bowl and a whisk. Here’s exactly how I make them:

A casserole dish filled with water in an oven.

Step 1 – Prep the oven: Set your oven to 325°F (162°C). Place a 9×13 dish with 2 cups of hot tap water on the bottom rack. 

I know it sounds like an extra step, but the steam created by the water as the egg bites bake is what keeps them soft and custardy. It also helps the eggs bake evenly without turning rubbery or completely deflating as they cool, similar to the Starbucks version made with a sous vide machine.

That said, you can skip this step if you prefer. The egg bites will still turn out delicious, just a bit firmer in texture.

A muffin tin with parchement liners.

Step 2 – Grease or line your muffin pan: Most egg bite recipes online use a silicone muffin pan to bake the bites. Sadly, I do not own one. If you have it, I would still recommend greasing it before pouring in the egg mixture.

If you are like me, and only have a regular metal 12-cup muffin tin, then I highly recommend lining them with parchment liners. It is truly the foolproof solution to prevent the egg bites from sticking to the pan. I tried using paper liners, and while the egg cups did not stick to the pan, it was hard to remove the paper from the egg bites in one piece.

Otherwise, take your time greasing/buttering the muffin tins well, covering all edges and even the top, as eggs always stick to metal if not greased properly.

Eggs whisked in a bowl with spinach.

Step 3 – Whisk the eggs: Crack the eggs into a large bowl along with salt (if using) and pepper until they are fully combined. Try not to overmix as they can trap too much air, causing them to puff up in the oven and then deflate as they cool. A little deflation is normal, but whisking just until smooth helps keep their shape.

Step 4 – Add the remaining ingredients: Stir in the cottage cheese and shredded cheddar until everything is well combined. Fold in the roughly chopped baby spinach.

It is easier to switch from a whisk to a spatula when folding. 

Additionally, while I listed only 2 cups of baby spinach in the recipe card below, you can use up to 3 cups if you prefer to up the nutritional value of these cottage cheese egg cups. Just make sure that they are chopped a bit so you won’t have big chunks of spinach in your egg bites.

Muffin tin with egg and cottage cheese bites before and after they are baked in the oven.

Step 5 – Fill the muffin cups: Scoop about ¼ cup of the mixture into each muffin well. If you are using a standard 12-cup muffin tin, fill it closer to the top. If you are using a different size, divide the batter evenly among the cups, keeping in mind that the baking time may vary.

Step 6 – Bake: Slide the muffin pan onto the middle rack, positioned directly above the water dish, and bake for 30-35 minutes. You’ll know they’re done when the tops look set and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean. The lower temperature, combined with steam, is the secret to that custardy, Starbucks-style texture.

Step 7 – Let them rest: When they first come out of the oven, they will appear puffy, but they will deflate as they cool and rest. I like to let them cool for 10 minutes before removing them from the muffin tin, so they are not too hot.  You can enjoy them warm or let them cool completely if you are making them as part of your weekly meal prep.

5 Secrets to Starbucks-Style Custardy Egg Bites

Like with any egg recipe, a few small details make all the difference between bites that are rubbery or soggy and ones that are soft and fluffy. Below, I am sharing some of the things I learned during my recipe testing to help you get the best cottage cheese bites on your first try:

  1. Use a water bath: The steam from a dish of hot water in the oven is the secret to a soft, custardy texture that mimics the Starbucks sous vide method. If you omit it, the bites will still be delicious but noticeably firmer and more rubbery.
  2. Avoid Watery Bites: Excess liquid from cottage cheese or undrained vegetables is the main reason for watery egg and cottage cheese bites. Be sure to strain your cottage cheese if it looks wet.
  3. Parchment liners: If you are using a metal 12-cup muffin tin, keep in mind that eggs can stick to metal. To ensure easy release, take your time to grease every corner of your muffin pan or use parchment liners for a guaranteed easy release. If you are using silicone liners, I would still apply a light coating of oil, but it is definitely much easier to remove without the egg bites sticking to the pan. 
  4. Don’t overbake: The bites will continue to set as they cool, so if they’re baked too long, the texture will turn rubbery.
  5. Whisk by hand/Skip the blender: Egg bites puff slightly in the oven and settle as they cool, so a little settling/deflation is normal. However, I learned during my testing that the biggest difference maker was skipping the blender entirely. While blending creates a smooth batter, it traps too much air, causing the bites to over-inflate in the oven and then deflate significantly. To keep that beautiful, full, custardy texture, just whisk the batter by hand until the eggs and cottage cheese are just combined, leaving the curds intact.
Egg bites on a plate from the front view.

How to Make Ahead, Meal Prep, Freeze, and Reheat

I think one reason these baked egg bites with cottage cheese are so popular is that they stay fresh all week. You can meal prep a batch for busy mornings and have a grab-and-go breakfast all week. 

Make ahead: You can whisk together the mixture and keep it covered in the refrigerator overnight. When you are ready to bake, pour the mixture into the muffin tin and follow the usual baking directions, adding an extra 5 minutes if needed, as it will be starting from a colder temperature.

Meal Prep: Once baked and cooled, place the egg bites in an airtight container. They will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days and make for a perfect high-protein breakfast.

Freezing: Once they are at room temperature, arrange the egg bites on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper and freeze for an hour or two. Then transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container. They should keep well for up to 2 months. Thaw them overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: You can warm up your protein egg bites straight from the fridge using one of the methods below:

  • Microwave: Heat individual bites in 30-second increments, no longer than a minute or two, stopping and checking often.
  • Oven: While not as quick as the microwave, reheating them in the oven gives you the best, freshly baked results. Place the egg bites on a baking sheet and reheat at 325°F (163°C) for 10 minutes or warm to your liking. 
  • Air Fryer: Reheat at 300°F (149°C) for 5-6 minutes.

FAQs

Can I make these with egg whites only?

I wouldn’t recommend using only egg whites, as the bites will not be as creamy. However, you can do a mix of whole eggs and egg whites ( 4 whole eggs and 4 egg whites).

Do I need to use full-fat cottage cheese?

I recommend full-fat cottage cheese because it gives the best texture. Lower-fat versions tend to release more liquid and can make the egg bites watery, but you can still use them. Be sure to strain off any excess liquid before mixing it into the eggs.

How do I prevent egg bites from sticking?

Parchment liners or a silicone muffin tin are the easiest way to avoid sticking. If you don’t have either, grease your muffin pan thoroughly, ensuring that all edges, corners, and the top of the pan are well-coated.

Why did my egg bites deflate?

Egg bites puff in the oven and then settle as they cool, so some deflation is inevitable. To minimize this, whisk the eggs just until combined and avoid using a blender, which adds too much air to the mixture.

Can I freeze cottage cheese egg bites?

Yes, let them cool completely, then flash-freeze them individually on a parchment-lined tray for a few hours before transferring to a freezer-safe bag or container. They will keep well for up to 2 months.

Pairing Suggestions

These cottage cheese egg bites are a great grab-and-go breakfast, lunchbox snack, or even as a brunch item. They are satisfying on their own, but I love pairing them with a few simple sides to round out the meal:

  • Breakfast meats: Add extra protein by serving them alongside a few slices of Baked Turkey Bacon, breakfast sausage, or chicken sausage.
  • Toast: Treat yourself to a satisfying breakfast by serving these with a slice of avocado toast. When I serve these over the weekend, I almost always make a batch of my Salmon Avocado Toast to make it a full meal.
  • Yogurt: A creamy yogurt cup pairs beautifully with eggs. My Chia Seed Pudding with Yogurt, Vanilla Yogurt, or a Yogurt Parfait are great options to help you increase your protein intake.
  • Fresh fruit: Serve them with a bowl of fresh berries or make a batch of my Breakfast Fruit Salad for a simple yet visually appealing pairing.

More Cottage Cheese Recipes You’ll Love

I think we can all agree that cottage cheese is having the time of its life with its popularity, and I am here for it. Below are a few cottage cheese recipes from the archives:

  • Cottage Cheese Flatbread is the latest social media sensation, and for a good reason. Made with just two ingredients, this high-protein bread option (with 17 grams of protein per serving) is a great choice for wraps and sandwiches.
  • If you love classic comfort food like I do, but are looking for lighter options, you’ll love my Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese. It has the same creamy texture with 26 grams of protein per serving.
  • And if you are planning to make this recipe for a crowd, try my Egg and Cottage Cheese Bake. It has all the same flavors baked into a casserole-style dish that you can slice, store, and enjoy throughout the week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Egg bites with cottage cheese cooked in oven on a plate.
Print

Cottage Cheese Egg Bites Recipe

These cottage cheese egg bites are soft and fluffy high protein breakfast that are perfect for you weekly meal prep. Made with eggs, cottage cheese, cheddar, and spinach, they bake in a muffin tin for easy, portable breakfasts.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 295kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 large eggs
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup full-fat cottage cheese
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese
  • 1 ½ cups baby spinach leaves washed, rinsed, dried and roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 325 °F (162 °C). Fill a casserole dish (I used a 9X13) with 2 cups of hot tap water and place it on the bottom shelf of your oven.
    A casserole dish filled with water in the oven.
  • Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment liners* or spray them with nonstick cooking spray. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the egg and cottage cheese mixture.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk eggs with black pepper until well beaten.
  • Fold in the cottage cheese and shredded cheddar cheese. Mix until the cheese is evenly distributed. Add the baby spinach and mix until well combined.
  • Divide the egg mixture evenly among 12 muffin cups (a little more than ¼ cup each).
    Muffin tin with egg and cottage cheese bites before and after they are baked.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center of an egg bite comes out clean.
  • Cool for 10 minutes, then remove the muffins from the muffin pan and transfer them to a platter. Serve warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 egg and cottage cheese bites ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are for 3 egg bites (per serving).
  • *Parchement Liners: I highly recommend using parchement liners to ensure easy removal. Otherwise, be sure to brush the muffin tins generously with oil.
  • A word on adding salt: I tested this recipe with national cottage cheese brands like Daisy and Good Culture and never needed to add any salt as they were already salty. However, I recommend giving your cottage cheese a taste before deciding whether or not you need to add salt to the egg mixture.
  • Storage: Bring leftover egg bites to room temperature and store in an airtight container in the fridge for upto 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 365mg | Sodium: 629mg | Potassium: 262mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1887IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 304mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-egg-bites/feed/ 2
Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-and-egg-bake/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-and-egg-bake/#comments Mon, 20 Oct 2025 19:50:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83730 I feel like these days, protein is the magic word. Say it, and everyone’s suddenly paying attention. Every time I…]]>

I feel like these days, protein is the magic word. Say it, and everyone’s suddenly paying attention. Every time I open Instagram, I see one video after another showing how to sneak more protein into every meal. 

And right now, cottage cheese seems to be the star of the show, especially when it comes to breakfast. I’m completely on board, and this cottage cheese and egg bake is my small contribution to the internet’s high-protein breakfast lineup.

What I love most is how practical it is. It uses a full carton of eggs, comes together with just a bowl and a whisk, and bakes while you take care of everything else. 

It is easy to customize with whatever veggies or breakfast meats you have on hand. Best of all, it stores beautifully and makes weekday mornings so much easier.

Ingredient Notes for The Fluffiest Texture & Endless Customization Ideas

This recipe begins with three main components: eggs, cottage cheese, and a small amount of shredded cheddar cheese. From there, you can add your favorite veggies or breakfast meats to make it your own. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

I’ve listed the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some helpful notes on ingredients from my recipe testing:

Eggs: I recommend using a full carton of large organic eggs. It gives you enough for a week’s worth of grab-and-go breakfasts or to serve multiple people. 

If you’d like to increase the protein content of this egg bake, you can substitute half of the whole eggs with egg whites only. I wouldn’t recommend using just egg whites, as you’ll end up with a different, less creamy texture. 

Cottage cheese: During my testing, I found that full-fat (4%) cottage cheese yields the best texture for this cottage cheese egg bake. You can use low-fat cottage cheese, but it tends to be slightly less puffed and creamy after baking. 

Additionally, as it sits in the fridge, some brands of cottage cheese collect a small amount of liquid on top. If that is the case, be sure to strain it before adding it to the egg mixture.

Finally, I tested this recipe both with large curd and small curd cottage cheese, and they both worked well.

Vegetables: I opted for a simple combo of sautéed mushrooms and baby spinach. I used cremini mushrooms, but you can also use sauteed shiitake mushrooms or roasted shiitakes

With that being said, you can make this egg bake with cottage cheese your own with any leftover veggies you already have in the fridge.

My go-to ratio is 1 cup of cooked veggies plus 2 cups of leafy greens or fresh herbs. Below are a few options you can try:

  • Frozen veggies: Veggies like frozen spinach can be used, just be sure to thaw them first and squeeze out every bit of liquid before adding to the mixture.
  • Sautéed veggies: Veggies like broccoli, yellow onion, or a small red bell pepper are a great addition, but I recommend sauteeing them prior to adding them to the egg mixture.
    In terms of greens, you can use lightly sautéed (and cooled) Swiss chard or blanched kale as a base, and add some fresh (or dried) parsley, dill, or oregano.
  • Quick-cooking veggies: You can also add up to 1 cup of fast-cooking vegetables, such as shredded zucchini, cherry tomatoes, or chopped green onions. There is no need to sautee them, but be sure to squeeze out the excess liquid prior to adding them to the egg and cottage cheese mixture.

Cheese: I used shredded sharp cheddar cheese, but you can also use Monterey Jack, Parmesan cheese, or shredded mozzarella cheese. You can also mix two cheeses for more depth.

Seasonings: I kept it simple with garlic powder, paprika, salt, and black pepper. However, you can adjust the seasonings to suit your preferred flavor profile. A pinch of Italian seasoning or my homemade Mediterranean Seasoning are both great options.

Optional Add-Ins: You can increase the protein content by adding about 1 cup of cooked meat. Crumbled turkey sausage, chicken sausage, chopped baked turkey bacon, regular bacon, or diced ham all work well.

How to Make Egg and Cottage Cheese Bake 

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with no more than 15 minutes of hands-on time.  Here’s exactly how I make it step by step:

Step 1 – Prep the baking dish: You can use a 9×11 or 9×13 casserole dish or a 9×9 square dish to make this cottage cheese egg bake.

Whatever size dish you use, do not skip greasing it; otherwise, it sticks to the pan after it is fully baked. A light coating of butter or cooking spray will make cleanup easier and help each slice come out neatly.

A collage of images showing how to sautee mushrooms and whisk eggs.

Step 2 – Cook the mushrooms: When it comes to cooking mushrooms, I like to use a bit of butter and a preheated skillet.

As soon as they hit the hot skillet, they will soften, and depending on the type of mushrooms you are using, they will likely release some liquid. I like to sauté them for about 3-4 minutes, which is usually enough for the liquid to evaporate.

However, if any liquid remains, be sure to drain it before adding it to the egg mixture.

Step 3 – Whisk the eggs: Crack the eggs into a large mixing bowl and whisk until smooth. It is important to whisk the eggs first, as it will be more difficult to do so later. This initial whisking also adds a little air to the eggs, which helps the bake turn out lighter and fluffier.

The rest of the ingredients are added into the egg mixture.

Step 4 – Add the rest of the ingredients: In the same large bowl, stir in the cottage cheese, shredded cheese, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until well combined, then fold in the now-cooled sauteed mushrooms and chopped fresh baby spinach. 

Cottage cheese egg breakfast before and after it is baked.

Step 5- Bake: Pour the egg mixture into the greased dish and bake at 375°F (190°C) until the center is set, about 35-40 minutes. To check doneness, give the pan a gentle shake. If the middle is not jiggly, it’s ready. 

Step 6 – Let cool: Once it comes out of the oven, let your egg and cottage cheese bake rest for about 10 minutes before slicing. 

The short cooling time helps it firm up slightly, which makes slicing and serving easier.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Baked eggs with cottage cheese make a wonderful breakfast, mainly because they can be made ahead and stored well. Not to mention, this recipe is perfect for brunch or whenever you need to feed a crowd.

Here’s how to store and reheat it without losing its texture:

Make ahead: You can combine all of the ingredients, pour them into the prepared baking dish, and keep it covered in the refrigerator overnight or for up to 24 hours. When you are ready to bake, follow the usual directions above, adding an extra 5 minutes as needed since it will be starting from a colder temperature. 

Storing: Once baked and cooled, slice the egg casserole into portions and place them in an airtight container. They will keep well for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Yes, it can be frozen, but I must warn you that the thawed portions lose their fluffy texture. Still, if you want to freeze, you can let the cheese egg bake cool completely, then slice it into portions.
Place the slices on a parchment-lined sheet pan to prevent them from sticking together. Once they are frozen, place them in a freezer-safe bag or container. They will keep well for up to 3 months.

Reheating: You can warm up your portioned slices straight from the fridge Here are a few reheating methods:

  • Microwave: Heat individual slices for no more than a minute or two in 30-second intervals, stopping and checking every time.
  • Oven: Place slices in a baking dish, cover with foil, and reheat at 325°F (163°C) for 10 minutes or until heated through.
  • Air Fryer: Reheat slices at 300°F (149°C) for 8-10 minutes.
Baked eggs with cottage cheese in a casserole dish from the top view.

Don’t Let it Get Watery! My Best Tips for Success

  • Avoid a watery bake: This is one of the biggest complaints when making this baked cottage cheese and eggs recipe, and the only way to prevent a watery bake is to remove any excess liquid from your cottage cheese and vegetables (after sauteing). Additionally, keep in mind that letting it rest for 10 to 15 minutes helps harden it and make it easier to slice.
  • Save time by using pre-washed fresh spinach: It costs a bit more, but I prefer to buy pre-washed, ready-to-eat baby spinach, which saves me time by eliminating the need to rinse and spin dry before adding it to the egg mixture. 
  • Taste before salting: I intentionally omitted salt from the recipe, as most cottage cheese sold at the market already has enough salt to flavor this egg casserole. Still, it is best to give your cottage cheese a quick taste to gauge whether or not it needs any additional seasoning.
  • Baking dish: Please note that the size of your baking dish will impact the cooking time. A 9×11 or 9×13 pan usually bakes in 35 to 40 minutes, but a deeper 9×9 dish may require an additional 5 minutes. 
  • Check for doneness: The best way to determine doneness is to inspect the center. It should be set and not jiggly. If you insert a toothpick or knife in the middle, it should come out mostly clean.
  • Cool the vegetables before mixing: If you are using sautéed vegetables (regardless of the type of vegetable you use), be sure to let them cool slightly before adding them to the eggs. If they go in too hot, the eggs may start cooking unevenly and affect the texture of the bake.
  • Deflation is expected: Egg bakes naturally rise in the oven and then settle as they cool, so a little deflation is completely normal. Unless you are using a larger casserole dish than the one I recommend in the recipe (9 by 11 or 9 by 13), your cottage cheese egg breakfast should still have a satisfying thickness after it is rested.

Pairing Suggestions 

It is no secret that this egg and cottage cheese casserole is a popular breakfast option among those of us seeking high-protein breakfast choices. While it is perfectly fine to serve it as a standalone dish, you can turn it into a satisfying breakfast with dishes like:

FAQs

Why is my egg and cottage cheese bake watery?

Most of the time, it comes from excess liquid in the cottage cheese or vegetables. To prevent this, strain the cottage cheese and the excess liquid (if there is any) from the sauteed vegetables before adding them to the egg mixture. If the bake still looks a little loose, give it a few more minutes in the oven and be sure to let it rest for 10-15 minutes before slicing.

How long do you bake cottage cheese and eggs?

The timing depends on the size of your baking dish. If you are using a 9×11 or 9×13 casserole dish, it will take about 35 to 40 minutes at a 375°F (191°C) oven. If you are using a smaller (and deeper dish) such as an 8 by 8 or a 9 by 9, you may have to bake 5 to 8 minutes longer.

Can I make this ahead?

Yes, assemble the casserole as usual, cover, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to bake, follow the usual baking instructions, but add a few extra minutes if needed, since it will be starting from a colder temperature.
Alternatively, you can bake the whole thing, bring it to room temperature, cover tightly and store it in the refrigerator until ready to serve.

Can I use only egg whites?

You can use 6 whole eggs and 6 egg whites. I wouldn’t recommend using only egg whites, as the lack of egg yolks will result in a loser and less fluffy texture.

Can I make this in a muffin tin?

You can. However, you will need two 12-cup muffin tins. The amount of eggs I use is too many for a standard muffin tin. If you prefer a muffin version, I recommend checking out my cottage cheese egg bites recipe instead.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Cottage Cheese Recipes To Try 

It is no secret that cottage cheese is having a moment, and I am here for it. So, don’t let any leftover cottage cheese go to waste and try some of my other reader favorites below:

  • If you are looking for a high-protein bread alternative, my Cottage Cheese Flatbread is a two-ingredient recipe that is gluten-free, low-carb, and has 17 grams of protein per serving.
  • For a lighter spin on comfort food, try my Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese. It’s creamy with a classic, cozy taste you’d accept from mac and cheese, but with 26 grams of protein per serving.
  • And if you prefer something more portable and just as quick to make, my Egg and Cottage Cheese Bites offer the same flavors in a single-serve, grab-and-go form, making them perfect for meal prep.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

A slice of egg and cottage bake on a spatula.
Print

Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake Recipe

In need of a quick and easy-to-make high-protein breakfast idea? You have found it! This Egg Bake is made with cottage cheese, spinach, and some seasoning, is a great meal prep breakfast recipe. Make it over the weekend and enjoy throughout the week.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 283kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tbsp unsalted butter or olive oil plus more for greasing the pan
  • 8 ounces cremini mushrooms 226 gr. (Rinsed and sliced)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 12 large eggs
  • 1 ½ cups cottage cheese (360 gr) whole milk 4%
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese shredded (100 gr) packed
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 cups baby spinach leaves chopped (52 gr)
  • Cooking spray or butter for greasing the casserole dish

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375 °F (191°C). Lightly grease a 9X11 (or 9 X13 casserole dish). Set it aside.
  • Heat butter in a 10-inch nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add the sliced mushrooms and cook until softened, 3-4 minutes, stirring occasionally. Season with salt and set it aside to cool.
    A collage of images showing cooked mushrooms and eggs being beaten.
  • In a large bowl, whisk eggs until well beaten.
  • Mix in the cottage cheese, cheddar cheese, garlic powder, paprika, and black pepper.
    Photos showing egg and cottage cheese mixed with spinach and spices.
  • Fold in the now-cooled mushrooms and baby spinach.
  • Pour the mixture into the prepared casserole dish.
    Photos showing the egg cottage cheese bake before and after it is baked.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes or until the middle of the egg bake is set (no longer jiggly).
  • Let it cool for 10 minutes. Slice and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 servings of egg bake. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cottage cheese: I tested this recipe both with small curd and large curd cottage cheese, and they both worked well. I prefer 4% for the most creamy (and let’s face it, most delicious) results, but you can use 2% as well.
  • Storage: Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 283kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 360mg | Sodium: 618mg | Potassium: 424mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1816IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 244mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-and-egg-bake/feed/ 4
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/#respond Tue, 14 Oct 2025 19:13:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83779 Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in…]]>

Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in my early 20s? The fact is, sweet potatoes aren’t a typical ingredient in Turkish/Mediterranean cooking.

However, that doesn’t mean we can’t incorporate some of those classic Mediterranean flavors into a salad that could easily be the centerpiece of your holiday table or, really, any time you need a great fall salad. 

To me, this Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is just that. Made by roasting sweet potatoes with shallots and chickpeas, layering them with arugula, and topping everything with candied walnuts and feta cheese, it may sound a bit unexpected, but I promise you it works wonderfully.

Ingredients You’ll Need Plus Smart Swaps:

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here’s a closer look at what goes into this roasted sweet potato salad, and a few simple swaps, to help you make it your own:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The Core Components: Sweet Potato & Shallots

Sweet potatoes: When choosing sweet potatoes, go for ones that feel firm with smooth skin and have no soft spots. Smaller to medium-sized potatoes are ideal as they’re sweeter, creamier, and easier to manage than the larger, starchier ones. Once peeled and chop them up into even pieces so they roast evenly. 

PRO Tip: Some people incorrectly call sweet potatoes yams, but they are not the same thing. This recipe is tested only with sweet potatoes.

Shallots or Red Onion: Roasting them in large chunks turns them super sweet and caramelized, but if you are not a fan of large chunks of onion in your salad, you can slice them thinly before roasting.

However, I find that the large pieces give you more caramelized flavor compared to the sliced version. 

Alternatively, you can use a large red onion as a substitute for shallots.

Chickpeas: I am using canned chickpeas for convenience. Though it is imperative to take the time to pat them dry well after draining, as they won’t crisp up if they are still soaking wet.

Green, Cheese, and Dressing

Arugula: I usually buy triple-washed arugula from the store to save on time. 

I think the slightly bitter, peppery taste of arugula pairs beautifully with the rest of the ingredients. However, if you prefer something milder, you can use spring mix or baby spinach. For a heartier baked sweet potato salad, you can use massaged kale

Regardless of the salad greens you are using, make sure that they are rinsed and spin-dried so that the salad dressing can coat the greens well.

Maple Candied Walnuts: I use a handful of walnuts for extra crunch and some sweetness. You can also use pecans or almonds, or for a nut-free version, go for roasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. Maple syrup is my choice of sweetener, but agave or honey would also work.

Feta Cheese: This is a Mediterranean classic, but you could also add goat cheese instead. For a vegan, dairy-free option, simply omit the feta or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Optional Add-Ins and Flavor Boosters

Pomegranate molasses and arils: While this is also a Mediterranean classic and works beautifully in this salad, I know not everyone has it in their pantry. It will change the overall taste a bit, but a drizzle of balsamic reduction would be a good alternative to pomegranate molasses.

Again, optional, but I also like to add a handful of pomegranate arils for a pop of color.

Grains/seeds: If you are making this sweet potato salad as a part of your weekly meal prep and want it to be a bit more filling and satisfying, you can add a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, couscous, farro, or even bulgur wheat.

How to Make Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Here’s how this salad comes together: first, we roast the veggies and make the candied walnuts, and then we make a simple vinaigrette and assemble. Here’s exactly how I do it step by step:

Sweet potatoes, shallots and chickpeas on a sheet pan from the top view.

Step 1 – Roast the Vegetables: After testing this recipe multiple times, I found that roasting everything at once makes cleanup so much easier without sacrificing crispness. 

Grab a large baking sheet, as we want to make sure all the veggies have enough room to roast evenly. I like to use parchment paper for easy clean up, but it is optional.

Spread sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas on the sheet pan, drizzle them with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and give them a good toss. Roast everything in a preheated 425 °F /218°C oven for 20 minutes. Be sure to give it a toss halfway through to ensure everything browns and caramelizes evenly.

A collage of images showing how to make maple candied walnuts.

Step 2 – Make the Candied Walnuts: My version of making maple candied walnuts here is super simple. Simply mix walnuts with maple syrup, spread onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, sprinkle with coarse salt, and roast for 5-7 minutes in the oven.

I usually roast them while the veggies are in the oven, so I don’t have to wait later on.

Whatever you do, do not (I repeat, do not) skip the parchment paper (because they will stick to the pan) and sea salt (it helps make them even more delicious).

A collage of photos showing how to make the dressing for the salad and how to dress arugula.

Step 3 – Prep the Dressing and season arugula: When the veggies are cooling, make the dressing. It is as simple as it gets: Add olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and whisk to combine. 

When you’re ready to serve, place the arugula in a large bowl and drizzle with the dressing. Using your clean hands or a pair of tongs, gently toss to ensure that all the greens are coated with the dressing.

Give it a taste and make sure they are seasoned well. If necessary, add more salt and pepper. 

A collage of photos showing the assembly stages of making this roasted sweet potato salad.

Step 4 – Assemble: You can assemble the salad in the bowl with the now-well-seasoned arugula, but since we are planning to serve this as a showstopping centerpiece for Thanksgiving, I transfer it to a large oval serving platter. 

Then all we need to do is to top them off with the roasted veggies, maple candied walnuts, crumbled feta cheese, and, if using, drizzle everything with a few tablespoons of pomegranate molasses. I also add a handful of pomegranate seeds to make it even more colorful and festive, but it is optional.

Making This a Festive Holiday Centerpiece: Make-Ahead & Presentation Tips

This Mediterranean fall salad is a fantastic alternative to your usual boring roasted sweet potatoes that everyone serves on Thanksgiving.

Mediterranean sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

And, the good news is that you can make each component of the recipe ahead of time and assemble it right before serving. Here’s how I do it:

Presentation: Platter vs. Bowl

Serve on a Platter: I strongly recommend serving this salad on a large oval platter instead of a deep bowl, which not only makes for a much prettier presentation but also helps the delicate arugula hold its shape since it’s not weighed down by the toppings. It also ensures that every guest gets a bit of everything with each serving.

Make-Ahead Strategy (For a Crispy Salad)

  • Roast Components Ahead: You can roast the sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas, and prep the candied walnuts and salad dressing a day or two in advance.
  • Bring to room temperature: Ensure the roasted veggies and nuts are completely cooled before storing them or adding them to the arugula, as warm ingredients will melt the feta and cause the delicate greens to wilt.
  • Store Separately: Store the cooled components in airtight containers in the refrigerator, and assemble everything right before serving.

Storage of Leftovers

  • Leftovers Keep Well: Leftovers do keep well for up to 3 days in the refrigerator if kept in an airtight container.
  • Arugula will Wilt: The arugula will naturally wilt once dressed. However, a good toss before serving brings it back to life. Always taste for seasoning and add more salt or pepper as necessary before serving.

Serving Suggestions

This Mediterranean baked sweet potato salad is as versatile as it is beautiful. Serve it warm or at room temperature, making it perfect for a cozy fall dinner or your Thanksgiving spread. It is surely one of my favorite Thanksgiving vegetable sides that I make every year.

Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

With Turkey: If you’re planning on making a complete Thanksgiving spread, serve it alongside my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, pair it with my Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a smaller holiday meal or simple weeknight dinner.

With Chicken: For another simple weeknight option, try serving it with my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Alternatively, if you want to keep the Mediterranean flavors going, serve it alongside my Harissa Honey Chicken for a feast that is guaranteed to impress.

Vegetarian: This salad makes the perfect side to my Stuffed Eggplant as a Mediterranean-inspired meatless meal.

FAQs

Can I use canned sweet potatoes?

I wouldn’t recommend it since they’re too soft and won’t caramelize properly in the oven. That said, if it’s all you have on hand, just bake for about 10 minutes to warm them through.

Can I serve it cold?

Yes, this salad tastes great warm, at room temperature, or chilled straight from the fridge.

Can I air fry the veggies?

You technically can, but it will be hard to fit them all at once. If you prefer to roast everything in the air fryer, I recommend either doing it in two batches or air frying each veggie separately to ensure even roasting.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Salads You Might Like

I love keeping a few salads in rotation that are just as easy to make as this sweet potato salad recipe. Here are a few other Mediterranean salads I never get tired of:

  • My go-to for BBQs, picnics, and meal prep is this Mediterranean Pasta Salad. It is easy to make, and just uses a few pantry staples and fresh veggies.
  • Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası) is a refreshing Turkish tomato and cucumber salad tossed with olive oil and lemon juice. It’s a summer staple I grew up eating in Turkey.
  • If you want a quick, plant protein-packed salad that is ready in 30 minutes, try my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. It can also be served cold or warm and it is another salad recipe that you can make ahead.
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad from the top view on a serving platter.
Print

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad Recipe

Sweet Potatoes are not common in the Mediterranean, but that doesn’t mean we cannot use them in a salad that embodies the flavors of the region. Made by roasting sweet potatoes tossed with chickpeas, feta, and candied walnuts and serving them on a bed of arugula, this make-ahead salad is worthy of your holiday table as a colorful centerpiece or a humble yet filling lunch to take to work with you on a Tuesday.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Veggies

  • 2 large sweet potatoes 1 ½ lbs peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 3 shallots medium size – peeled and sliced/quartered (or 1 large red onion, cut into wedges)
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce- drained, rinsed, and patted dry
  • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Candied Walnuts

  • ½ cup halved walnuts
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1/8 teaspoon flaky sea salt

For The Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups arugula leaves loosely packed, rinsed and spin dried
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta cheese 2 oz.
  • 2 tablespoons Pomegranate molasses* optional

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place cubed sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas onto the baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to ensure they are evenly coated with the seasonings.
    Roasted veggies on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Roast for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through, until the potatoes are golden, the shallots are caramelized, and the chickpeas are lightly crispy.
  • To make the candied walnuts, in a small bowl, mix together the walnuts with maple syrup.
    Candied walnuts in the making.
  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and spread the walnuts evenly. Sprinkle them with a pinch of flaky sea salt and roast them in the oven for 5-7 minutes or until lightly toasted and golden. It is okay to roast them while the veggies are roasting.
  • When roasted, remove the veggies and walnuts from the oven and let them cool for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper in a bowl.
    Dressing for the salad and tossing the arugula with it by hand.
  • To assemble the salad, place the arugula in a large salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and toss to coat.
  • Pile the veggies on top and give it another big toss.
    A collage of images showing the stages of the assembly of the recipe.
  • Garnish with candied walnuts, crumbled feta, and drizzle with pomegranate molasses (if using) right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 (loose) cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *A good substitute for pomegranate molasses is balsamic reduction. The flavor will change slightly, but it will still be delicious. Alternatively, if you do not have either of them, you can omit using them entirely.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all components of the recipe in advance, let them reach room temperature, store them in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble the salad right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 362mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 10953IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/feed/ 0
Harissa Roasted Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 21:22:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83581 Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are…]]>

Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are actually planned around them, and this recipe is a perfect example of that. 

Everyday ingredients like rainbow carrots (naturally sweet, inexpensive, and beautiful when roasted) become the star of the plate when paired with harissa, the North African chili paste I turn to often in my cooking. 

And of course, we can’t forget the whipped feta, the creamy and tangy spread that social media has made famous for good reason.

I tested this dish several times to ensure the steps are clear and the cleanup is minimal. Ready in about 50 minutes from start to finish, the result is a side that looks stunning on the table but comes together with ease. It is such a great recipe to serve as part of a holiday spread, alongside a weeknight meal, or even as an appetizer on a mezze platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This recipe has three main components: the creamy whipped feta, the roasted harissa carrots, and the assembly finished with a honey drizzle.

Below, I am sharing some helpful notes on ingredients from my recipe testing. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Carrots:

Carrots: I love using rainbow carrots here because they’re colorful, and when they get roasted, they become slightly caramelized, which pairs beautifully with harissa. 

However, any carrots you have on hand would work. The important thing is to choose ones that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Before roasting, I like to give them a good scrub and peel them for a smoother texture, although this step is optional. I usually grab about two to three bunches for this recipe, and if any are very thick, I slice them in half lengthwise.

Harissa: You can go a few different routes here:

Honey: This is a key ingredient in this recipe, so don’t skip it. It helps caramelize the carrots and tames the spiciness of harissa. If you don’t have honey on hand, you can substitute it with maple syrup or agave syrup.

Garnishes: Here is where you can mix it up and make this recipe your own. The toppings are what take these harissa-glazed carrots to the next level. Here are my favorites:

  • Drizzles: I am using honey because the sweet and spicy combo is unbeatable. You can also try maple syrup for a deeper sweetness or opt for tahini lemon sauce for a savory flavor.
  • Nuts: My go-to is pistachios, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts would be delicious. If you can, toast them slightly in a pan to enhance their flavor.
  • Fresh Herbs: I opted for parsley, but you can use any herb you love, such as dill, cilantro, or mint. You can even use the carrot tops; just wash and dry them thoroughly before chopping them finely.
  • Optional: During the holiday season, I also use a handful of pomegranate seeds to add a pop of color.

For the Whipped Feta: 

For the creamiest base, start with a block of feta packed in brine rather than the pre-crumbled kind. And for the yogurt, choose plain, unsweetened whole milk Greek yogurt for the creamiest texture. 

Ingredients for the creamy whipped feta spread.

You’ll find the full whipped feta ingredients in the recipe card below. For more tips, steps, and variations, check out my full Whipped Feta Recipe post. 

Alternatively, you can use Cava’s Feta Sauce or my Tahini Yogurt Sauce as a spread; both will provide a similar creamy base.

How to Make Harissa Carrots

The beauty of this recipe is that most of the work happens in the oven. While the carrots roast and caramelize, you whip the feta and prep the toppings. 

Step 1 – Prep the pan: Set your oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a large sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup. 

I know some people recommend against using parchment paper to achieve the most browning, especially when roasting root vegetables like carrots. I prefer to use it to make the clean up easier, but you can go either way.

Steps showing the making of the harissa and spreading it over the carrots.

Step 2 – Make the marinade & coat: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Always taste the mixture before adding any seasoning, especially if you are using a store-bought harissa. 

Add the carrots and toss until fully coated. I like to use my hands here to really work the marinade into all the nooks and crannies, but a pastry brush can also be used.

Images showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.

Step 3 – Roast: Arrange the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan, leaving a little space between each one so they bake and caramelize instead of steaming. 

Roast the carrots for about 30 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until caramelized and tender in the center. If your carrots are on the thinner side, start checking around the 25-minute mark.

Step 4 – Make the whipped feta: While the carrots are roasting, break the feta into chunks and add it to a food processor along with the Greek yogurt and lemon zest. 

Pulse it a few times, and then as the food processor is running, slowly drizzle in olive oil until smooth and creamy, scraping the sides as needed. Blend for about 40-45 seconds, until smooth, to maintain a thick and spreadable consistency.

Images showing the assembly of roasted harissa carrots recipe.

Step 5 – Assemble and Garnish: Once the harissa carrots are done, let them cool for 10 minutes so that when you add them on top of the feta cheese spread, they don’t melt.

Spread the whipped feta onto a large serving platter, arrange the carrots on top, drizzle with honey, and sprinkle with pistachios and parsley.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat

One of my favorite things about this honey harissa carrot recipe is that it can be served hot from the oven, made ahead, and enjoyed chilled. Not to mention, they store well in the refrigerator for later use.

Make Ahead: You can roast the carrots and make the whipped feta up to a day in advance. Store them separately or assemble them right away so the dish is ready to serve as soon as you need it. 

Storage: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. The whipped feta may firm up slightly as it chills, so take it out of the fridge 10 minutes before serving to allow it to become creamier. 

Reheating: When it comes to reheating, I do not recommend heating the whipped feta. However, you can reheat the carrots in a 325°F (163°C) oven for about 8-10 minutes, or until they are heated through. Then, reassemble the recipe as written.

Expert Tips for Best Results

While this harissa-roasted carrot recipe is quite simple to put together, here are a few things I learned during my recipe testing:

  • Pick similar-sized carrots: Choose carrots that are roughly the same size so they roast evenly. If some are very thick, cut them in half lengthwise so everything bakes at the same rate.
  • Taste before salting: Some harissa brands are saltier than others, so always give the marinade a quick taste before seasoning to avoid over-salting the carrots.
  • Flip halfway: Give the carrots a quick toss and turn them halfway through roasting so they caramelize evenly and don’t burn on one side.
  • Let them cool slightly: Let the carrots sit for 10 minutes before serving to prevent the whipped feta from getting melty and soggy.
  • Loosen thick harissa: Harissa paste can vary in thickness, so if yours is very thick, whisk in a splash of olive oil to loosen it and help coat the carrots more evenly.

Serving Suggestions

While you can enjoy these carrots straight from the oven, they are even better when paired with a full meal. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve them:

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and drizzled with honey.

FAQs

Can I use harissa powder instead of paste?

I wouldn’t recommend using harissa powder by itself for the full effect. Instead, you can make a quick harissa paste with harissa powder in minutes and use it to coat the carrots.

How do I tone down the spice?

You have a few options here. You can make your own harissa or buy a brand that offers a mildly spiced harissa. Additionally, keep in mind that serving the carrots over dairy naturally helps to tone down the spice.

What toppings or spices work best?

Chopped pistachios are my go-to, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts are great alternatives. Fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley, dill, or cilantro, add a pop of color and freshness.

Do I need to peel carrots before roasting?

It is a personal choice. If you are buying organic carrots, you can give them a good scrub under cold water and roast them with the skins on. Still, if you prefer, you can peel them as well.

More Harissa Recipes to Try

When I have harissa on hand, I find myself adding it to everything from roasted vegetables to grain bowls. If you want more ways to use harissa, here are a few of my favorites:

  • My Harissa Dressing is a bright and spicy five-minute dressing that I drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, and even roasted veggies.
  • For dinner, my BBQ Harissa Chicken is smoky, juicy, and takes just twenty minutes of hands-on time. And if you prefer a recipe that requires no grilling, then I suggest my Harissa Honey Chicken, which caramelizes beautifully in the oven for the perfect sweet-and-spicy bite.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and parsley.
Print

Harissa Roasted Carrots Recipe

These rainbow carrots are roasted with harissa until caramelized, then served over creamy whipped feta and topped with honey, pistachios, and fresh herbs.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Harissa Carrots

  • 2 lbs rainbow carrots (18-20 carrots) ~ 20 oz, scrubbed and peeled
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons harissa
  • 1 tablespoon honey plus more to drizzle on top
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one lemon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt optional – add after tasting harissa first
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Whipped Feta

  • 8 ounces feta whole block
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt whole milk / unsweetened
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil

As Garnish

  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 2 tablespoons pistachios roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Taste for seasoning and season with salt if necessary.
    Person making harissa sauce and spreading carrots with the sauce.
  • Add the carrots to the prepared sheet pan and spread the harissa mixture evenly, ensuring the carrots are fully coated with the mixture. Spread them on a single layer.
  • Roast for 30-35 minutes, flipping them halfway through to ensure even roasting.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down for 10 minutes.
    Side by side photos showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.
  • While carrots are roasting, make the whipped feta. Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade, along with Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Pulse a few times to mix, and then turn the machine on and drizzle the olive oil over the tube. Let it run for 40-45 seconds, stopping once or twice to scrape the sides of the bowl to ensure even mixing.
  • Grab a large serving plate, spread the bottom with whipped feta cheese, and then transfer the now-slightly cooled harissa carrots on top.
    Photos showing the assembly of the dish.
  • Drizzle with 1-2 tablespoons of honey and garnish with pistachios and parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields enough harissa carrots to serve 6 people, with approximately 3 carrots per serving, depending on the size of the carrots used. The nutritional values are per serving and include the calories coming from whipped feta.
  • Carrots: While I roasted the carrots whole, you can cut them into 1 1/2- to 2-inch chunks and roast them that way.
  • Spread at the bottom: Whipped feta is optional here, and you can serve the harissa carrots by themselves if you prefer. Alternatively, my yogurt tahini sauce would be a great option as a spread.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container and kept in the fridge for 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 803mg | Potassium: 588mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 25521IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 261mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/feed/ 0
Whipped Feta Dip https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 19:54:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83576 Ingredients You’ll Need You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones…]]>
Aysegul

Whenever I have friends over, I like to go beyond the usual meat-and-cheese plate and put together a spread that feels a little more Mediterranean and creative without being complicated. 

Over the years, I’ve built a few go-to menus that always get oohs and aahs, and after this whipped feta cheese recipe took off on social media last year, I added this version to the mix. Now I get the same question every time: “Is the recipe on the blog?

It’s popular for a reason: it’s incredibly versatile. Serve it as a cheese dip, spread it under roasted vegetables, or thin it into a sauce; top with savory herbs and spices or go sweet with honey and nuts. 

Think of this creamy feta recipe as a simple base you can dress up a dozen ways. After months of testing, I’ve dialed in the texture so it delivers every time.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones you can find, as their flavor really shines through. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing:

Feta Cheese: For the creamiest whipped feta cheese, start with an 8-ounce block of feta packed in brine. You can use either cow’s milk or sheep’s milk feta, but the most important thing is choosing one you like for its flavor, creaminess, and saltiness.

I do not recommend pre-crumbled feta because it often contains caking agents that make the dip grainy. Since we will be blending everything in the food processor, there is no need to buy it pre-crumbled.

Greek Yogurt: Some whipped feta recipes call for cream cheese or sour cream, but I prefer using whole milk unsweetened Greek yogurt for a lighter, tangier base. 

Because it’s thicker and less watery than regular yogurt, it keeps the dip extra creamy while adding a subtle tang. For the best texture, avoid fat-free or 2% yogurt.

Olive Oil: Use your favorite extra virgin olive oil. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, just something you like, since the flavor really shines through.

Lemon zest: Adding a little lemon zest brightens the dip, brings fresh aromatics, and adds a bit of tang.

Optional Add-Ins: I wanted to make this recipe with minimal ingredients, so it is quick and easy to put together. However, if you’d like, you can also add a clove of fresh or roasted garlic for a mild garlic flavor and a squeeze of lemon juice for a bit more tangy flavor.

How to Make Whipped Feta Cheese

Whipped feta comes together in just minutes, and the key is blending it just enough to achieve a smooth, creamy texture without overblending. Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1: Prep the feta: First, drain the brine, pat the block dry to prevent a watery dip, and break it into large chunks. This way, there is no excess moisture, and it can blend smoothly. 

Process photos showing how to make creamed feta cheese dip.

Step 2: Blend: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, and lemon zest to the food processor or blender. Turn on the processor and slowly pour in the olive oil through the feed tube. 

Pro Tip: Most whipped feta recipes use ¾ cup of Greek yogurt, but during my recipe testing, I found that using a lesser amount (½ cup of yogurt) yielded a more spreadable dip than a sauce-like, runny whipped feta.

Pouring the olive oil slowly helps the cheese and yogurt emulsify into a silky mixture. If you’re using a high-power blender, blend for a shorter time, as it will thin out more quickly.

A collage of images showing the making of the creamy Greek yogurt feta dip.

Step 3: Scrape halfway through blending: For a smooth and evenly blended whipped feta, stop the machine and scrape the sides with a spatula once or twice during the whipping process.

Doing this also helps with gauging the texture. I thought that 40-45 seconds of blending yielded the perfectly silky and smooth texture, but you can adjust the blending time according to your preference.

Step 4: Serve and garnish: Spoon into a bowl and finish with olive oil and your favorite toppings.

Ways to Customize Whipped Feta with Different Toppings

While this feta spread is perfectly delicious on its own, adding toppings is an easy way to dress it up and make it feel new every time you serve it. Choose a savory or sweet topping below and make it your own:

  • Savory Toppings: Sprinkle with fresh parsley, mint, or dill, plus a pinch of sumac, red pepper flakes, black pepper, or Aleppo pepper. You can keep it light, as I did in the photos, or spread it on a platter and layer on more herbs for a dramatic look.
  • Sweet Toppings: Drizzle a little honey and a handful of toasted pine nuts or crushed pistachios for a more dessert-like spread.
  • Spice Blends: If you prefer a lighter approach, sprinkle it with a pinch of my Mediterranean Seasoning or za’atar for an even more Mediterranean dip. Both bring a subtle herby flavor without overpowering the dip.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Add this whipped feta cheese dip recipe to your collection of party appetizers asap! Why? Because it stores well and can be made ahead of time. Here’s how I do it:

Make-ahead: You can prepare it up to 2 days in advance. It gets slightly thicker as it sits. If you plan to serve it as a dip, you can serve it right away. However, though it is optional, if you want to use it as a spread for a perfectly creamy, silky texture, you can give it a quick whiz in the food processor right before serving. 

Storage: Transfer the dip to an airtight container. It keeps well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. If the dip appears slightly separated after sitting in the fridge, let it rest at room temperature for a few minutes, then give it a quick stir before serving.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whipped feta as the texture changes and turns grainy once thawed, so it’s best enjoyed fresh.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

After plenty of testing (and a few grainy batches), I’ve figured out what makes whipped feta turn out silky and creamy every time. Here are the tips I wish someone had told me from the start:

  • Use a block of feta cheese: A block of feta in brine is creamier and fresher, while pre-crumbled feta often contains caking agents that make the dip too grainy.
  • Taste your feta first: Some feta cheese sold at supermarkets can be very salty. Since this dip relies on just a few basic ingredients, it would be hard to mask that, so it is best to taste it before whipping it.
    • Too salty? Place the block in an airtight container with enough water covering it and let it sit in the fridge for a couple of hours or overnight. This helps reduce some of the excess salt.
  • Bring to room temperature: If possible, remove your feta from the fridge 5-10 minutes before blending. This is optional, but it will make your dip blend smoother. 
  • Food processor or blender: I prefer using a food processor because it allows for easier control over texture and thickness. In contrast, a blender (especially a high-speed blender) blends faster, which may result in a runny creamed feta cheese dip. Therefore, if you are using a blender, pulse and check often instead of running the machine continuously.

How To Serve Whipped Feta

Don’t get me wrong, this is a wonderful appetizer dip served with fresh veggies like radishes, cucumbers, and bell peppers. However, there are many other ways to use it in your daily cooking, especially if you are a fan of Mediterranean cuisine.

Images of recipe ideas that uses this whipped feta recipe.

Here are some of my go-to ideas:

  • Build a Mezze Platter: Serve your freshly made feta yogurt dip alongside other classics, such as Mediterranean Hummus, Tzatziki Sauce, Baba Ganoush, and fresh vegetables, warm Pita Bread, or pita chips.
  • Add it to any platter: This recipe is not just for a mezze platter. It is wonderful for any meat, cheese, or even seafood platter. I especially love it in my Smoked Salmon Platter.
  • Sandwich or Wrap Spread: Use it as a substitute for mayonnaise or other spreads in your favorite sandwiches and wraps. I love spreading it on lavash bread and then adding some Adana lamb kebab or Chicken Kofta before rolling it into a wrap.
  • As a Creamy Base: Spread a generous layer on a plate and top with roasted, grilled, or even air-fried vegetables. I love pairing it with my Harissa Carrots or Grilled Eggplant whenever I want an impressive side dish, or my Air Fryer Beetroot during the holiday season when I need a pop of color on the table.
  • With Grilled Meats and Kebabs: Serve it alongside Middle Eastern classics like Shish Tawook, Chicken Shawarma, or Lamb Kebabs for a cool, creamy contrast.
  • For Grain Bowls: Add a dollop over any of your Mediterranean bowls as a sauce. It works wonderfully with my CAVA Bowl and Chicken Shawarma Bowl.
  • Over toast with Eggs: Spread it on toast and top with fried or poached eggs, or serve it alongside Turkish Eggs for a savory breakfast or brunch.

FAQs

What’s the best feta for whipped feta?

Use a whole block of feta (not pre-crumbled feta) that you like the taste and creaminess of; it can be cow’s milk or sheep’s milk. I recommend choosing a brand that is not overly salty.

Can I make whipped feta without yogurt?

Yes, you technically can, but I find that the version made with yogurt is better. Still, you can use a splash of water or milk (about ¼ cup) to thin it out and blend until smooth.

How do I thicken whipped feta?

Start with a smaller amount of yogurt and add more as needed until you reach your desired consistency. If your dip turns out too thin and you want to thicken it, blend in a little more feta or chill it for 10-15 minutes to allow it to firm up as it cools.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, you can make it up to 2 days ahead. Simply make a batch, store it in an airtight container, and give it a quick stir right before serving.

How long does whipped feta last?

It keeps well for 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Just give it a quick stir or pulse in the food processor before serving.

Can I freeze whipped feta?

I don’t recommend freezing this whipped feta spread as it turns grainy once thawed. It’s best enjoyed fresh.

Other Mediterranean Dips and Feta Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this feta Greek yogurt dip, you might also like these other feta-packed and Mediterranean-inspired recipes I make regularly. They’re just as fresh and simple to make:

  • If you love that restaurant-style creaminess and sauces, try the cult favorite CAVA Feta recipe. It’s another wonderful dip (or topping) made with feta, roasted onions, jalapenos, and garlic.
  • If you want something cozy and baked, my Spinach and Feta Borek has a super crisp dough, melty feta, and is perfect for when you are having people over. 
  • And if you are in the mood for something refreshing, my Watermelon Cucumber Salad with cucumber, feta, and fresh mint is perfect for warm weather.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Person scooping whipped feta with pita bread.
Print

Whipped Feta Dip Recipe

This quick 5-minute whipped feta dip is made with just 4 simple ingredients. Creamy, tangy, and perfect for spreading or dipping.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 228kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces feta cheese whole block (both cow's milk or sheep's milk feta would work)
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt unsweetened & whole milk/full fat
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for drizzling on top

Optional toppings

  • Handful of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and mint
  • Pinch of Sumac or red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade.
    A collage of images showing the making of whipped feta cheese spread in a food processor.
  • Add in the Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Turn the food processor on. While it is blending, slowly add olive oil through the tube.
  • Blend until smooth, no more than 40-45 seconds, stopping halfway through to scrape the sides as needed.
    A collage of images showing the whipped feta in a food processor and in a serving platter with veggies.
  • Transfer to a bowl and garnish with fresh herbs. Finish with a light drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac or red pepper flakes.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ to 1 ¾ cups whipped feta, ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include calories from the optional vegetables and pita bread shown in the pictures.
  • Feta: Use a mildly salty block of feta for the best whipped feta recipe.
  • Storage: Transfer leftovers to an airtight container and store in the fridge for 3-4 days. Give it a stir before serving.
  • Troubleshooting Consistency and Texture: You have two variables to consider here: the amount of yogurt used and the blending time.
    • For a thicker dip, use ½ cup of yogurt, as written in the recipe.
    • For a looser, more sauce-like, spreadable texture, add ¼ cup more (a total of ¾ cup) yogurt.
    • Too grainy? Blend it a bit longer by stopping and scraping the sides a few times.

Nutrition

Calories: 228kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 656mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 241IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 308mg | Iron: 0.4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/feed/ 0
Almond Flour Pancakes https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-pancakes/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-pancakes/#comments Fri, 26 Sep 2025 18:43:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=23947 If you’re a long-time reader, you know I’ve been sharing almond flour recipes since 2014. Beyond the blog, I use…]]>

If you’re a long-time reader, you know I’ve been sharing almond flour recipes since 2014. Beyond the blog, I use it just as much in my daily life because I love the taste, the satisfaction it brings, and its versatility.

So, it’s no surprise that pancakes using almond flour have made their way to the blog. If this is your first time trying them, the secret isn’t about adding extra ingredients but about how you cook them. 

Making pancakes with almond flour requires patience. Using low heat and a slightly longer cooking time allows the pancakes to set properly, preventing them from browning too quickly.

Pancakes made with almond flour on a plate topped off with maple syrup and berries.

For me, these pancakes are a weekend favorite. I love making a batch on Saturday morning, enjoying a few warm from the pan, and saving the rest for an easy, filling breakfast the next day.

Almond Flour Pancake Ingredients

If you’ve never baked with almond flour before, it might feel a little intimidating at first, but I promise it’s simpler than it sounds.

Ingredients for almond pancakes from the top view with text on each ingredient.

You can find the exact measurements (with ounces and grams) in the recipe card below, but here are some important notes from all my years baking with almond flour:

Almond flour: If you compare the weight of my almond flour to other people’s, you might think that there is a typo. There isn’t.

Throughout the years of cooking and baking with almond flour, I’ve found that packing the cup with almond flour is the most effective approach. If you use a lesser amount, your pancakes may not hold their shape and potentially fall apart.

If you are buying it from the store, my favorite brand is Blue Diamond, but you can also make your own almond flour at home.

PRO Tip: Using Almond flour vs Almond Meal?

For the best, most tender pancakes, stick with almond flour rather than almond meal. Almond flour is finely ground from blanched almonds, resulting in a finer texture. Almond meal is made with the skins left on and has a coarser grind, which can result in pancakes with a slightly denser texture. 

With that being said, if almond meal is all you have, you can use it in a pinch. They’ll still be delicious, but with a more grainy texture.

Baking powder: This is one of the most important ingredients, as it gives pancakes the signature lift that fluffy pancakes are known for, so don’t skip it. I always use aluminum-free baking powder, such as double-acting baking powder like Rumford.

Spices: Use any warm spices you love here. I usually add ground cinnamon and nutmeg, but cardamom would also be a great addition. In the fall, I also love adding a pinch of pumpkin pie spice.

Milk: I am using homemade almond milk, but any plant-based milk, like unsweetened almond milk or regular cow’s milk, will work.

Sweetener: My go-to is maple syrup, as it effectively minimizes the eggy taste and allows the pancakes to brown beautifully. 

If you follow a keto diet, you can swap in your favorite keto-friendly sweetener.

Otherwise, honey, agave, or a couple of tablespoons of regular (or brown) sugar will also work.

Eggs: They are the binder in this recipe. I recommend using large eggs that are at room temperature (or as close to it as possible).

PRO Tip:  If you want to make your pancakes egg-free, you can use flax eggs (mix 1 tablespoon of ground flax with 2 ½ tablespoons of water). They’ll still be tasty, but they won’t be quite as fluffy and may not hold together as well.

Butter (or Oil): You can use melted unsalted butter for that classic flavor, or swap in a neutral oil like avocado oil, olive oil, or coconut oil, for a dairy-free option.

Optional Mix-Ins

This is where you can have fun and make these gluten-free almond flour pancakes your own: 

Chocolate Chips: For almond flour chocolate chip pancakes, stir ¼ cup of mini chocolate chips into the batter. I prefer these over regular chips because they are naturally sweetened and don’t weigh the batter down as much.

Protein Powder: If you want to up the protein content, you can always stir in a scoop of your favorite protein powder into the pancake mix.

Fresh Fruit: You can fold in a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of chopped blueberries or thinly sliced bananas into the batter just before cooking, so they retain their shape and don’t make the pancake batter watery.

How To Make Almond Flour Pancakes

You can still get a stack of fluffy pancakes with almond flour; you just need to mix, spread, and cook them a little differently. Here’s exactly how I make it step by step:

A collage of images showing the almond flour pancake mix and incorporating it with the wet ingredients.

Step 1 – Make the Batter: Whisk the almond flour, baking powder, salt, and spices in a medium bowl until no lumps remain. In a separate large bowl, whisk the eggs, almond milk, maple syrup, and vanilla. 

Pour the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and whisk until you have a smooth batter, ensuring that the large chunks of almond flour are fully incorporated into the mixture. The consistency should be pourable but thick enough to hold its shape. If it feels too thick, add a splash of milk.

Person mixing the almond flour pancake batter and then cooking it in a skillet.

Step 2 – Heat the Pan and Spread the Pancake Batter: Warm a small amount of butter or oil in a nonstick skillet or on a griddle over medium heat. 

The key here is to maintain a gentle heat so that the outside doesn’t burn before the inside cooks through. I usually start with medium heat and then turn it down to medium-low. 

Through testing, I found that ¼ cup of batter makes the perfect pancake. Scoop it into the skillet and gently spread it into a 3½ inch circle

This step is crucial because if your pancake is too thick in the middle, the outside will brown before the center is fully cooked.

Additionally, avoid overcrowding the skillet. Depending on the size of your skillet, it is best to give them enough room so they cook evenly. 

A collage of images showing how to make almond flour pancakes and garnish them with berries.

Step 3 – Cook Low and Slow: Let the pancakes cook over medium-low heat until small bubbles form on the surface and the edges look set, it should take about 4 minutes. Flip each one carefully with a thin spatula and cook for an additional 4 minutes on the second side, until golden brown. 

Unlike regular pancakes that cook in 2-3 minutes, almond flour pancakes take closer to 4 minutes per side. If you rush this step or use a higher heat, they will most likely fall apart. Therefore, keep the temperature low and allow them time to cook through.

Step 4 – Finish and Serve: Continue cooking the remaining batter, lightly greasing the pan between batches to prevent the almond pancakes from sticking. If you are making a larger batch, you can keep the finished pancakes warm in a 200°F (95°C) oven until ready to serve.

Optional Toppings – Ways To Dress Them Up

I kept my almond pancakes recipe simple with fresh fruit and a drizzle of maple syrup, but here are a few serving suggestions to dress them up: 

  • For a truly special treat, try topping them with a spoonful of Blueberry Puree or a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream.
  • Top them off with a spoonful of your favorite nut butter, such as almond butter or peanut butter, to make them extra filling. 
  • Top with a dollop of homemade vanilla yogurt or coconut cream for more creaminess.
  • Sprinkle with your favorite nuts or chunky granola to add a touch of crunch.

Helpful Tips for the Best Almond Flour Pancakes

Like with any pancakes, the first batch may not be perfect, but once you get the hang of it, you’ll see how easy it is to make almond flour pancakes. Below are some of my notes from my own recipe testing to guide you along the way:

  • 2 teaspoons baking powder: Before you ask, I know it seems like a lot, but this amount is intentional. Compared to other flours (i.e., all-purpose, whole wheat, etc.), almond flour is naturally denser, so you need some leavening to help make it “fluffy”. Some recipes rely heavily on eggs, but I found that pancakes made without baking powder fell flat, and they were harder to flip.
  • Use a nonstick skillet: Paleo almond flour pancakes are more delicate than traditional pancakes, and if you don’t use a nonstick skillet, they may stick to the pan and fall apart. A good nonstick pan makes flipping them much easier. For that reason, I don’t recommend using a cast-iron skillet for this recipe, as the pancakes are more likely to burn and stick to the pan. 
  • Cook low and slow: Since almond flour browns faster than regular all purpose flour, keeping the heat on medium-low allows the centers to cook through without the outsides burning.
  • Be patient: Each pancake needs about 4 minutes per side. The first batch may take a little longer since the pan isn’t yet fully hot. Patience is key here; this step is the most common reason pancakes fall apart.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: Give each pancake enough room so you can flip them easily. In a 10-inch skillet, I usually make two at a time. With a 12-inch skillet, you can cook three.
  • Residual heat: Keep in mind that the pancakes continue to cook after you remove them from the skillet. During my recipe testing, I’ve found that letting them rest for 5-10 minutes helps cook the insides further and makes them perfectly tender.

How To Make Ahead, Store & Reheat

One of the best aspects of this almond flour pancake recipe is that it keeps well, making it ideal for meal prep. Here is how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two options. You can prepare the batter a few hours in advance, cover it, and refrigerate until ready to cook. Just give it a quick stir before scooping to ensure everything is well combined. Or, cook the whole batch a day ahead, and let the pancakes cool completely before refrigerating.

Storage: When the pancakes are ready and have cooled, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 to 3 days.

Reheat: You can warm them in a toaster or in a low oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through. Both of these methods will keep the edges crispy, rather than soggy. You can also microwave them in 15-20 second intervals.

Freezing: Once they are completely cool, layer them between sheets of parchment paper in an airtight container or freezer bag. When you’re ready to eat, no need to thaw overnight; just take them out of the freezer about 30 minutes before serving, then reheat in the toaster or oven.

FAQs

Can I use almond meal instead of almond flour?

It is not ideal, but it would work in a pinch. Almond meal pancakes will be denser and have a more grainy texture compared to the lighter and fluffier texture you would get with almond flour.

What’s the best almond flour for pancakes?

Use a finely ground almond flour you like. I personally love and use Blue Diamond Almond Flour in all of my almond flour recipes on this website. Compared to most brands, it is cheaper and has no odor. Bob’s Red Mills’ superfine almond flour is another good brand, but it tends to be pricier.

Why do almond flour pancakes fall apart?

Usually, it’s from a runny batter, cooking on high heat, or flipping them too soon. If your batter has too much liquid, mix in a little more almond flour. Keep the heat low and wait until the edges look set before flipping.

Can I make these vegan?

Yes, you can use flax eggs (1 tablespoon ground flax + 2 ½  tablespoons water per egg), but they won’t be as fluffy and may not hold together as well.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Almond Flour Breakfast Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed these easy almond flour pancakes, here are a few more breakfast recipes I think you might also like:

  • If waffles are more your thing, my Almond Flour Waffles are crispy on the outside and super soft and fluffy on the inside. They are ready in under 30 minutes and are also perfect for meal prep.
  • For something savory, my Almond Flour Biscuits are buttery, tender, and perfect to serve with breakfast or brunch.
  • And if you’re looking for something sweeter, try my Almond Flour Banana Muffins. They are moist with a hint of cinnamon and make the perfect naturally sweet breakfast or snack.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

This recipe was published in April 2019 but has been updated with additional information, an updated recipe and new photos in September 2025.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Gluten free pancakes with almond flour stacked and garnished with berries.
Print

Almond Flour Pancakes Recipe

These almond flour pancakes are light, fluffy, and perfectly golden brown. Made with basic ingredients, they are low-carb and gluten-free. Serve with fresh fruit, maple syrup, or your favorite toppings. Great for weekends or meal prep.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 8 pancakes
Calories 230kcal

Ingredients

Dry Ingredients:

Wet Ingredients:

  • ¾ cup almond milk unsweetened
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup plus more for drizzling
  • 3 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter or vegetable oil

Optional Toppings:

  • 1/2 cup mixed berries
  • 1/4 cup maple syrup

Instructions

  • Place almond flour, baking powder, kosher salt, ground cinnamon, and ground nutmeg in a medium mixing bowl. Whisk until well combined, breaking the large chunks of almond flour.
    Almond flour pancake mix batter in a bowl.
  • In a separate, large mixing bowl, whisk together the almond milk, eggs, and vanilla extract until well incorporated.
  • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ones and whisk until just combined, and you have a homogeneous batter.
    A collage of images showing how to make pancakes with almond flour.
  • Heat a tablespoon of butter or vegetable oil in a 10-inch nonstick skillet over medium-low heat until it is melted.
  • Using a ¼ cup measuring cup (approximately 2.54 oz/72 g.), scoop the batter into the skillet. Using a spatula, gently spread it to form a 3 ½-inch circle. Continue with one more or as many as your pan will accommodate, but make sure not to crowd the skillet.
  • Let it cook for 4 minutes, and once it is lightly browned, flip and cook for another 4 minutes. Low and slow heat is the key here, so do not rush the process.
  • Transfer them to a plate and repeat the process with the remaining batter, using the remaining vegetable oil.
    A collage of images showing how to cook and garnish almond pancakes.
  • When ready to serve, top it off with fresh berries and a drizzle of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 8 pancakes, serving 4. I weighed the ingredients using a kitchen scale while preparing the recipe. The nutritional values listed below are per pancake and do not include optional toppings.
  • Paleo: If you are following a strict paleo diet, I recommend using a paleo-friendly baking powder
  • Storage: Bring leftover pancakes to room temperature and store in an airtight container for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing: Once they are fully cooled, place them in a freezer-safe container with small sheets of parchment paper (to prevent sticking) and remove as much air as possible. No need to thaw overnight. Take it out of the freezer 30 minutes before you are ready to serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 230kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 328mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 177IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-pancakes/feed/ 36
CAVA Cucumber Mint Lime Drink (Copycat Recipe) https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/#respond Tue, 05 Aug 2025 12:59:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82635 As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost…]]>

As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost like making a classic limeade. At first, I blended cucumber juice, lime juice, and a bit of simple syrup. It was good, but honestly, it just tasted like limeade. It was nothing memorable.

Then I came across a tip that suggested enhancing limeade with lime zest and a splash of lemon juice. That tip was golden. Those two small additions completely transformed my simple drink into something bright, layered, and refreshing, and more importantly, just like the version I love at CAVA.

CAVA copycat mint lime cucumber drink in glasses garnished with mint lime, and cucumber slices.

This homemade cucumber mint lime juice drink recipe has that exact light, crisp, and not overly sweet flavor. It’s also incredibly easy to customize, can be served non-alcoholic or as a cocktail, and is also make-ahead friendly, making it a total crowd-pleaser for any warm day. Not to mention, making your own is way more cost-effective than buying at the store.

Cava Cucumber Mint Lime Ingredients

To make this copycat CAVA cucumber mint limeade, you only need a few simple, fresh ingredients you probably already have in your fridge/pantry. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Mint Simple Syrup

Sweetener: Traditionally, simple syrup uses equal parts sugar and water. I like to use honey (or agave syrup) instead, inspired by my Honey Simple Syrup recipe, to keep the drink naturally sweetened. Both options work beautifully.

Mint: Any fresh mint you grow or can find in your local supermarket will do. Peppermint or spearmint are both great choices.

For the Drink

Cucumbers: I prefer Persian cucumbers for their crisp, sweet taste, but English cucumbers are a great substitute. Peeling is optional, but if you keep the skin on, give it a taste first to make sure it’s not bitter, since older cucumber skins can sometimes be tough and a bit bitter.

Lime and Lemon Juice & Zest: Freshly squeezed juice is best for a bright, clean taste. Bottled juice works in a pinch, but if you can, squeeze your own. When I was testing this recipe, I noticed that using only the juice didn’t quite capture the citrusy kick that makes CAVA’s version so refreshing.

That’s when I decided to add the zest of both lime and lemon. It turned out to be the missing piece, bringing the drink much closer to the one I first enjoyed at CAVA.

Ice: Cubed or crushed ice keeps the drink cold and refreshing.

For the Garnishes

This is where you can have some fun. Add cucumber slices, sliced lime, or fresh mint sprigs for a pretty, restaurant-style touch.

How To Make Cucumber Mint Limeade?

Although it may seem like a lot of steps, making this refreshing drink is actually quite simple. Just follow the easy steps below:

A collage of images showing the making of simple syrup and cucumbers in a food processor.

Step 1 – Make the mint simple syrup: To keep my drink naturally sweetened, I am making a batch of my honey syrup recipe. That being said, you can make it with regular simple syrup by using 3/4 cup of granulated sugar and 3/4 cup of water, following the same steps.

If you are following in my footsteps, combine honey (or sugar) and water in a small saucepan over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the honey fully dissolves. Refrain from boiling honey, as exposure to high heat can potentially degrade the nutritional value and natural flavors of your honey.

Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves, ensuring they are fully submerged. Let them steep for 15-20 minutes, then strain and set aside to cool.

Step 2- Puree the cucumbers: Cut the peeled cucumbers into small chunks and transfer them into a food processor or high-powered blender and blend until smooth and lightly pureed. 

A collage of images showing the making of cucumber juice.

Step 3- Strain the juice: Pour it into a fine-mesh strainer set over a bowl (or a nut milk bag would also work). Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out as much of the juice as possible. In the end, you should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.

A collage of photos showing the mixing and making of the cucumber lime mint drink.

Step 4 – Mix the drink: Grab a large pitcher and pour in all the prepared ingredients, starting with cucumber juice, lime and lemon zests and juices, now-cooled mint simple syrup, and 2 cups of cold water. Give it a good stir to ensure everything is thoroughly mixed.

Step 5 – Chill & Serve: Cover and refrigerate for an hour or two to allow the flavors to blend together. When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice and pour the drink over it. Garnish it with a sprig of fresh mint and your other preferred garnishes.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint limeade is how easy it is to prepare ahead of time. It’s perfect for entertaining or for keeping a refreshing drink ready in the fridge all week.

Make Ahead: The mint simple syrup can be made 1-2 days in advance and stored in an airtight jar or bottle in the refrigerator.

If you’d rather mix the whole drink ahead, you can prepare it a day in advance. Just cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Storage: Store the finished drink in a sealed pitcher in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

It’s normal for the liquid to separate as it sits. Just give it a good stir before pouring.

Freezing for Later:

A fun option is to freeze the cucumber mint limeade in ice cube trays. Once frozen, drop the cubes into a glass of water or sparkling water for a light, refreshing sip without making a whole batch.

I like using silicone ice cube molds (affiliate) so the cubes pop out easily.

Expert Tips:

Adjust sweetness to your liking: If you’ve ever made lemonade or limeade, you know that not all lemons and limes taste the same. Some are sweeter while others can be quite tart. I find that about ¾ cup of simple syrup is just right for this cucumber mint drink, but you can easily adjust it according to your taste buds. If it tastes too strong, add a bit more water. If you’d like it sweeter, stir in a touch more syrup until it’s just right for you.

Freshly squeezed juice is best: Fresh limes and lemons make all the difference in this mint and cucumber drink. While bottled juice is a convenient shortcut, it often tastes flat or even slightly bitter. If you can, take the extra few minutes to squeeze your own; it gives the drink a much brighter, cleaner taste.

Don’t skip the straining: It may feel like an extra step, but straining makes a big difference. For a smooth, pulp-free cucumber drink, be sure to strain the mixture before serving. It keeps the drink light, clean, and refreshing.

Chill thoroughly: For the best taste, let the cucumber mint refresher chill in the refrigerator for at least 1-2 hours before serving. This gives the flavors time to meld together. If you’re short on time, you can cut the chilling time by starting with cold ingredients, like refrigerated cucumbers and citrus.

Don’t forget the garnishes: A few simple garnishes can take this beverage from everyday to eye-catching. Add lime slices, sliced cucumber, and a sprig of mint (though be sure to remove the woody stems) to make it look as refreshing as it tastes. For the prettiest presentation, serve it in a clear glass or pitcher over ice; it’s an instant crowd-pleaser.

Variations

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint drink recipe is how easy it is to customize. With just a few simple swaps or additions, you can make it fit any occasion, like serving it to kids on a hot afternoon or mixing it up for friends at happy hour.

Add Sparkling water: For a bubbly twist, replace some or all of the water with sparkling water. You can even use lightly flavored sparkling water  (like Bubly or Spindrift) that you enjoy. It adds a refreshing fizz and makes the drink feel extra special.

Turn it into agua fresca: For a lighter taste, similar to a cucumber mint agua fresca, use less citrus and more water.

Make it a cocktail: This limeade is the perfect base for gin, vodka, or even white rum. Add a splash over ice for a refreshing adult beverage.

Add some ginger: If you enjoy a little spice, try steeping a few slices of fresh ginger in the mint simple syrup. It adds a subtle warmth and zing that balances beautifully with the cool cucumber and bright citrus.

What to Serve It With

This cucumber mint lime CAVA recipe is honestly one of those drinks that just goes with everything. It’s light, refreshing, and makes whatever you’re eating taste even better. But if I had to pick my favorites, these are the times I always want a glass in my hand:

FAQs

Can I substitute fresh lime juice for bottled juice?

Yes, you can. However, please keep in mind that freshly squeezed juice will be better in terms of flavor.

Should I peel the cucumbers for this drink?

Peeling is optional, but here’s a little trick: if you decide to keep the skin on, give it a taste first. Older cucumber skins can sometimes be a little bitter, and I wouldn’t recommend that for this drink.

How long does Copycat Cava Cucumber Mint Limeade last?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, this drink will taste fresh for up to 5 days. You may notice some natural separation, which is completely normal. Just give it a quick stir before pouring, and it should be good to go.

Can I make this drink alcoholic?

Absolutely! This limeade is the perfect base for a summer cocktail. It pairs wonderfully with a splash of white rum, gin, or even vodka. You can just add a shot or two over ice, and you’ve got a fantastic new happy hour drink ready to go!

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Similar Drink Recipes You Might Like

If you’re as obsessed with this CAVA drink as I am, you’ll love these other refreshing recipes from the archives:

  • If you are in search of the most refreshing summer drink on a hot day, look no further than my Strawberry Basil Mocktail. Made in just a few minutes with strawberries and fresh basil, it’s such a nice twist to the classic version.
  • Elevate your lemonade game with my go-to Rosemary Lemonade Recipe, made from scratch with a unique hint of vanilla.
  • Inspired by a trip to Dominica, my honey-sweetened Iced Ginger Tea is a true summer treat for any ginger lover.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

CAVA copycat cucumber mint lime garnished with a sprig of mint.
Print

CAVA Copycat Cucumber Mint Lime Recipe

If you've been looking for a good recipe for CAVA's Cucumber Mint Lime Juice Drink, you are in the right place! This refresher is cool, crisp, and just the right amount of citrusy. Perfect for get-togethers, cocktails, or a refreshing sip for the kids.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Cooling time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 23 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 153kcal

Ingredients

For the simple syrup:

  • cup honey or sugar
  • cup water
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves rinsed and picked over – plus more as garnish (15 g)

For the drink:

  • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into chunks or 2 English cucumber (peeled), plus more as garnish
  • Zest of 1 lime 1g – about 1 tsp
  • Zest of 1 lemon 1g – about 1 tsp
  • 1 ½ cups fresh lime juice about 10-12 medium-sized limes
  • ½ cup fresh lemon juice about 5 medium-sized lemons
  • 2 cups water

As Garnish:

  • 1 lime sliced
  • Ice for serving

Instructions

  • Make the Mint Syrup: In a small saucepan, combine honey (or sugar) and water. Warm over medium heat, stirring occasionally, until the honey dissolves completely. Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves. Make sure they're fully submerged. Let steep for 20 minutes, then strain and set the syrup aside to cool.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Juice the Cucumbers: Place peeled cucumbers in a food processor and blend until smooth. Set a fine mesh sieve or colander over a bowl and pour in the puree. Use a spoon or spatula to press out as much juice as possible. You should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Mix the Drink: In a large pitcher, combine the cucumber juice, lime zest, lemon zest, lime juice, lemon juice, and the cooled mint syrup. Add 2 cups of water and stir well.
    A collage of images showing how to make the drink.
  • Chill: Cover and refrigerate for 1-2 hours to allow the flavors to blend together.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice, cucumber slices, and lime slices. Pour the drink over the ice and garnish with fresh mint.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 to 7 cups of limeade, ideal for serving 6 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Simple syrup: I made a honey simple syrup to keep my drink naturally sweetened, but you can make a regular simple syrup by mixing an equal amount of granulated sugar with water (1 to 1 ratio). Do not skip this step, otherwise the sugar will not dissolve in the drink.
  • Taste and adjust: Not all lemons and limes are created equal. Some can be sweet, some can be too tart. Once you mix all the ingredients, be sure to give it a taste and adjust with more water or syrup.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in a bottle or jar with a tight fitting lid for upto 3-4 days. Be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 153kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 424IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Lavash Bread Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:19:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82286 If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s…]]>

If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s the go-to bread for serving with kebabs, dips, and salads. Growing up in Turkey, I learned early on that you simply don’t eat kebab without a piece of warm lavash.

Yes, you can find it at the store, but once you taste a freshly cooked, puffed-up lavash straight from the skillet, there’s no going back. And the best part? It’s easier to make than you think.

In this post, I’ll walk you through the step-by-step process of making lavash bread, complete with foolproof tips and troubleshooting advice, so you can confidently make it at home anytime.

What is Lavash? A Journey Through This Ancient Flatbread

Lavash (or lavaş, as we call it in Turkey) is a soft, thin flatbread with ancient roots stretching across the Middle East and Central Asia. While the lavash bread recipe may vary slightly from region to region, it is a staple in many countries across the region, including Armenia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Turkey.

At its core, lavash is as simple as bread gets: just flour, water, salt, sugar, milk (optional), and yeast. But despite the short ingredient list, the result is anything but basic. 

Depending on where it’s made, lavash can be thick and chewy or paper-thin and crisp. 

My version here sits right in the middle; soft enough to wrap around your favorite kebabs but sturdy enough to use it as a utensil to scoop up dips and salads just like we do in Turkey.

Essential Ingredients for Lavash Bread

The traditional lavash bread recipes you’ll find in cookbooks are usually made with just three ingredients: flour, water, and salt. 

While that version is beautiful in its simplicity, it can take a bit more time and technique to get right. In my version, I use a small amount of yeast to help the dough rise more easily, a splash of milk for a softer texture, and a touch of sugar (or, in my case, honey) to feed the yeast and get it bubbling faster.

You’ll find the exact measurements of this homemade lavash recipe in the recipe card below, but here are a few essential notes and tips from my testing to help you get the best results every time.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls from the top view.

Water: We use lukewarm water (around 110 °F – 43 °C) to activate the yeast. The temperature is important here because if it is colder, the yeast will not activate, and if it is hotter, it will kill it. 

Yeast: I use instant yeast in this recipe, but I still bloom it in warm water with a bit of honey to give it a head start. This step isn’t always necessary with instant yeast, but I’ve found it helps create a better rise and a more reliable dough. 

If you only have active dry yeast, you can use it the same way, just make sure it foams up before moving on.

Sugar: A small amount of sugar helps feed the yeast and encourages it to bubble up during the resting period. You can use granulated sugar, but I like to use honey to keep this recipe free of refined sugar. Either one will do the job.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: I use a little bit of extra virgin olive oil, mostly for flavor. It adds a subtle richness to the dough and helps keep the lavash soft. 

Milk: A small amount of milk makes the dough softer and adds a slightly richer texture. I use whole milk, but any kind you have on hand will work. Just make sure it’s at room temperature so it doesn’t interfere with the rising time. 

If you prefer a dairy-free version, you can use water instead.

All-Purpose Flour vs. Bread Flour: The recipe I am sharing here is made with all-purpose flour, which yields a soft and pliable dough that is perfect for rolling kebabs. If you prefer a sturdier, chewier texture, you can swap in bread flour instead. It has a higher protein content, which gives the dough more structure.

Kosher salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, which is less salty than most kosher salts. If you use other brands, such as Morton’s, be sure to use half the amount. 

Step-by-Step: How to Make Lavash Bread at Home

Whenever I make any kind of bread, I always want to know how far in advance to start, especially if I’m planning to serve it for dinner. This easy lavash recipe takes about 1.5 hours from start to finish, including time to knead, rise, and cook. So if dinner’s at 7, starting around 5:30 pm is just right.

This recipe makes 10 lavash, just in case you are planning ahead or cooking for a crowd.

Here’s how to make lavash at home, step by step:

Yeast is activated and mixed with oil in a bowl.

Step 1 – Activate the Yeast: Place the lukewarm water (around 110°F / 43°C) and honey (or sugar) in a measuring cup. Stir well to make sure the honey is fully dissolved. Add the yeast and let it sit for 5 minutes, or until you see a grey-ish thick layer of bubbly foam on top. Then stir in the olive oil and milk until fully combined.

Wet ingredients are added into the dry ones and mixed.

Step 2 – Combine Wet & Dry Ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, combine the flour and salt. Pour in the yeast mixture and knead the dough with clean hands for about 5 minutes, or until no dry flour remains. 

At this point, the dough (and your hands) will be sticky, and that is totally normal. As you knead, turn the dough frequently to ensure everything comes together evenly.

The bread dough risen and then kneaded.

Step 3 – First Rise: Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel (or loosely with plastic wrap) and let it rise in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. By the end of that time, it should look a little smoother and slightly puffed in volume.

Step 4 – Knead the Dough: Lightly flour your kitchen counter and transfer the dough over. Knead it for about 5 minutes.

You don’t really need much of a technique here, but when I’m kneading it, I usually press the whole dough with the heel of my hand, push it away, fold it back over, and give it a turn. Then I just keep repeating that motion until the dough feels smooth and stretchy.

It shouldn’t be too sticky, but if it is, go ahead and sprinkle in a bit more flour, just a little at a time (no more than a tablespoon). You don’t want to use too much flour, as this can make your lavash too dry or stiff.

Alternatively, you can knead the dough in a stand mixer using the dough hook. However, keep in mind that you might not need to knead it as long. The visual cue to pay attention to is for the dough to be smooth and no longer sticking to the sides.

The dough rolled and cut into the balls.

Step 5 – Divide the Dough: Shape the dough into a log approximately 12 inches long and divide it into 10 equal pieces. When you go with 10, each lavash ends up being about 9 to 10 inches in diameter once it is rolled out and cooked. If your skillet is smaller, you can divide the dough into 12 and make slightly smaller ones.

You can totally eyeball it, but if you want all your lavash to be about the same size, a kitchen scale helps.

Grab a dinner plate and sprinkle it with a little flour. Roll each piece into a ball and place them on the plate. Then cover them loosely with a kitchen towel and let them rest for 20 minutes.

The lavash dough is rolled out.

Step 6 – Heat the Skillet & Roll Out the Dough: When you are ready to cook, heat a large (10- or 12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat until it is really hot. This part is essential because if the pan isn’t hot enough, the dough will stick. You’ll know it is ready when a few drops of water sizzle and disappear almost instantly.

While the pan heats up, start rolling out the dough. Take one ball at a time and roll it into a 9- to 10-inch circle using a rolling pin. Do your best to keep it round, but I’ll be honest; it is a little tricky at first. 

The good news? It gets easier the more you do it, and honestly, a slightly wonky lavash still tastes just as good.

The lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.

Step 7 – Cook the Lavash: Before you start rolling, grab a basket (a tortilla warmer works beautifully if you have one) or a bowl and line it with a kitchen towel. We need a place to store the freshly cooked lavash and keep it soft and warm. Set that aside.

Carefully transfer the rolled-out dough to the hot skillet. Within 10 to 15 seconds, you should see little bubbles start to form on the surface. Give it a flip, cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. As it cooks and puffs, you’ll see golden brown spots start to appear, which is exactly what we want.

Keep flipping every 10-15 seconds, and cook for about 40-50 seconds total, or until both sides are cooked and it has some nice color.

Transfer the freshly cooked lavash to your prepared basket and cover it with the towel to keep it warm. Then just repeat the process (roll, cook, and store) for the remaining dough balls.

Expert Tips 

Roll it out thin: The key to getting soft, pliable lavash is rolling the dough really thin. I know it is tempting to focus on making a perfect circle, but honestly, thinness matters more than shape. Even if your lavash isn’t perfectly round, it will still taste great.

And if you have a pasta machine, that is a great shortcut to get an even, thin sheet of dough without too much effort.

Go easy on the extra flour: It is tempting to keep adding flour if the dough feels sticky, but try to trust the process and the visual cues I mentioned earlier. Only add more flour when the dough really starts to stick (especially while rolling), and try to work quickly. Too much flour can lead to stiff, dry lavash, and we definitely don’t want that.

Keep it warm: Don’t skip setting up a spot to keep the cooked lavash warm. Otherwise, while you are busy cooking the rest, the earlier ones will cool down and lose their soft, pliable texture. And you don’t need anything fancy; a basket or a bowl lined with a clean kitchen towel works perfectly.

Work faster with a buddy: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is rolling and cooking the lavash. But it goes a lot quicker (and is honestly more fun) if you have someone helping out. I usually rope my husband in. He is in charge of the skillets and cooks two at a time while I roll out the dough. Teamwork makes it so much easier.

Stay close while it cooks: These flatbreads cook fast, so it is important to keep a close eye on them, even while you are multitasking. I know you’ll likely be rolling out the next one while one is cooking (I do the same), but try not to turn your back on the skillet. It gets very hot, and things move quickly, so just stay aware, especially if you have young kids around.

Troubleshooting Common Lavash Baking Issues

While this lavash flatbread recipe is pretty straightforward, I ran into a few hiccups during testing, so I wanted to share some tips in case you experience the same. Here are a few common issues and what might be causing them:

Dough isn’t rising: After the first 20-minute rest, your dough should be slightly larger and less sticky. If that is not happening, chances are your yeast was not properly activated. This usually comes down to the water being too cold or too hot. If you don’t see bubbles on top during the blooming stage, it is best not to add that mixture to the flour and just start fresh with a new batch.

Dough is too sticky or too dry: Before the first rise, the dough will be sticky, and that is completely normal. After it rests and you begin kneading, it should smooth out and become easier to handle. 

A little flour on the counter is fine if it is sticking too much, but try not to overdo it. Too much flour can dry the dough and make the lavash stiff.

Lavash isn’t bubbling in the skillet: If you are not seeing bubbles after placing the dough in the pan, there are usually two possible reasons: either the skillet isn’t hot enough, or the dough was rolled too thick.

Serving Suggestions:

If you’re wondering how to use lavash, the short answer is anywhere you’d use your favorite flatbread. But like most bread recipes, there are so many other ways to enjoy it. Below are a few of my favorite recipes to pair with lavash:

Adana kebab rolled in lavash bread.

Kebabs: The most traditional way to serve lavash is as a wrap for kebabs, like my Turkish Adana Kebab and Homemade Doner Kebab. Its thin, soft texture makes it perfect for rolling, and it does a great job soaking up all the delicious juices from the meat. That said, you don’t have to stop at kebabs. Any grilled meat, like my Shish Tawook,  works beautifully wrapped in lavash.

Shawarma: Beyond kebabs, homemade lavash is the perfect wrap for your favorite shawarma recipes, such as my Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma. Just roll up the meat with your favorite toppings for a delicious, handheld meal.

Scooping Mezes and Dips: While pita is often the go-to for serving with meze like baba ganoush, hummus, or muhammara, warm lavash is just as good, if not better. Tear off a piece and use it to scoop up the dips right off the plate. No spoon needed.

Breakfast: Lavash is also fantastic with a simple Turkish breakfast spread. I love serving it alongside cheeses, olives, Turkish eggs, and freshly sliced tomatoes and cucumbers. And if I feel like treating myself a bit, I sometimes even brush it with some melted butter while it is still warm.

Other versatile uses: Lavash is one of those breads you can serve with just about anything. Use it to dip into soups and stews, wrap up leftovers, or even turn it into a quick wrap. Any time you find yourself reaching for bread, lavash will do the job beautifully.

​​How to Store, Freeze and Reheat Lavash

I’ll be honest, lavash is best on the day that it is made while it is still warm. As it cools, it tends to lose its softness. That said, if you store it properly, it is still great the next day. Here’s how I do it:

Storage: Let the lavash cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container or sealable zip-top bag. Keep it in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days.

Freezing: Once cooled, place the lavash in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag with sheets of parchment paper between each piece. Try to remove as much air as possible before sealing. It will keep in the freezer for up to a month. When you’re ready to use it, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: You have two options here:

  • In the oven: Preheat the oven to 325°F. Lightly spray the lavash with water, place it on a baking sheet, and warm for 8 to 10 minutes or until heated through. You can reheat multiple pieces using this method.
  • In the microwave (my favorite method): Lightly wet two sheets of paper towel and wrap the lavash in between. Microwave for 30 seconds, then carefully remove the towels. If it needs a bit more time, repeat for another 10 to 15 seconds. When using this method, it is best to reheat your lavash one piece at a time.

Frequently Asked Questions

What’s the difference between lavash and pita?

Lavash and pita are both Middle Eastern flatbreads, but they’re not quite the same. Pita is usually thicker and bakes up with a pocket in the center, which makes it great for stuffing. Lavash, on the other hand, is thinner, softer, and more flexible, making it easier to use as a wrap.
Additionally, pita is usually cooked in a very hot oven, whereas lavash bread is often cooked on a skillet, griddle, or traditionally (especially in Armenia) in a tonir (or tandoor) oven.

Can I make lavash without yeast?

Yes, you can. I like to use yeast because I find yeasted dough to be easier to work with, but you can make lavash using only flour, salt, and oil.

Can I make lavash on a griddle?

Yes, you can. A griddle works just as well as a skillet, especially if you want to cook more than one lavash at a time. Some people even prefer to roll the dough into an oval shape to fit better on a rectangular griddle.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Bread Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of lavash, chances are you love Middle Eastern breads just as much as I do. Here are a few more recipes from the archives:

  • Stop buying pita at the store and try making your own. It’s easier than you think. Check out my post on how to make pita bread, complete with foolproof tips perfect for beginners.
  • If you’ve ever had a traditional Turkish breakfast, you’ve probably had simit. Some people call it Turkish bagels, and once you try it, you’ll understand why it’s such a favorite. This one’s worth your time.
  • No sourdough starter? No problem. My no-knead olive bread is one of the easiest, most hands-off bread recipes you can make. Just mix, let it rest, and bake.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Lavash bread in a basket from the top view.
Print

Lavash Bread Recipe

This easy lavash bread recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand and cooked on the stovetop until soft and lightly puffed. Perfect for wrapping kebabs, scooping dips, or serving with your favorite Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Bread
Cuisine Middle Eastern, Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Rolling and resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 10 servings
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • ¾ cup warm water at 110 °F degrees
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast aka quick rise yeast – (5g)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ cup whole milk at room temperature
  • 3 ¼ cups all purpose flour plus more for rolling (423 g)
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt 8g

Instructions

  • Place ¾ cup of warm water and 1 teaspoon of honey in a measuring cup. Stir to ensure that the honey is fully dissolved.
    The yeast activated and mixed with olive oil in a bowl.
  • Add the yeast and stir until it is well combined. Let it rest for 5 minutes. It will have a thick layer of bubbles on top.
  • In the same measuring cup, add ¼ cup olive oil and ½ cup milk. Give it a good stir. Set it aside.
  • Combine 3 ¼ cups all-purpose flour and 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt in a large bowl.
    Dry ingredients are being mixed with the wet to make lavash dough.
  • Add the yeast mixture and knead for 5 minutes, first mixing the dough until no flour remains and then turning it into a ball. In the end, it will be a very sticky dough, and that is normal.
  • Cover the dough with a clean kitchen towel and let it rest in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. It will get slightly larger in size.
    The dough is placed in a bowl to rise and a person is kneading it.
  • Transfer the now-rested dough to a lightly floured surface.
  • To knead the dough, press it with the heel of your hand, then push it away, fold it back over, and rotate it 45 degrees. Repeat this process for 5 minutes or until the dough is smooth. If it’s too sticky to work with, sprinkle in a bit more flour, 1 tablespoon at a time.
  • Shape the dough into a log and divide it into 10 equal pieces.
    The dough is cut into smaller pieces.
  • Roll each piece into a ball, dust it with flour, and transfer it onto a plate. Loosely cover the plate with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 20 minutes.
  • When you’re ready to cook, heat a large (12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat for 5 minutes. The pan needs to be very hot to keep the dough from sticking. To test, flick a few drops of water into the skillet. If they sizzle and disappear right away, it’s ready.
  • While the pan heats up, roll out one dough ball into a 10-inch circle using a rolling pin and more flour as needed. As you roll, it might be tricky to keep a perfect circle, and that’s totally fine. Just do your best.
    Lavash dough rolled out with a rolling pin.
  • Carefully transfer the rolled dough to the hot skillet. Cook for 10 seconds (you’ll see bubbles forming), then flip. Cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. Repeat for a total of 3-4 flips or until it looks fully cooked and has golden spots.
    Lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.
  • As soon as it’s done, wrap the warm lavash in a clean kitchen towel and place it in a basket to keep warm. Continue adding each cooked piece to the basket, keeping them wrapped so they stay soft and warm while you finish the rest.
  • Repeat the same rolling and cooking process with the remaining dough balls.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 10 lavash, each approximately 9 to 10 inches in diameter. The nutritional values below are per piece.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover bread to room temperature and store in an airtight container (or a Ziploc bag) for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat in a low-heat oven (325°F) for 8-10 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Or you can wrap it in a lightly wetted paper towel and microwave for 30 seconds. 
  • A word on the yeast: I used instant rapid yeast as I find that it blooms faster but active dry yeast can also be used.
  • This recipe was adapted from Betul Tunc’s cookbook Turkuaz Kitchen’s lavash recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/feed/ 8
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:24:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in…]]>

Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in your back pocket. Summers get so hot that refreshing, no-cook dishes like this are a staple on every table.

Versions of this salad show up all across the Mediterranean, from Italy to Greece and beyond. The ingredients may vary slightly, but the combination of juicy watermelon, crisp cucumbers, briny feta cheese, and fresh herbs is a classic in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Every year, as soon as watermelons showed up at the market, my mom would start making it on repeat. With the sweet juiciness of watermelon, the crunch of cold cucumbers, and the creamy-salty bite of feta, it’s the kind of dish that doesn’t need much fuss to shine.

This is what summer tastes like where I’m from: easy, filling, and somehow always the first thing to disappear from the table.

Watermelon Feta Mint Salad Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. You can find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to consider when shopping for this refreshing salad.

The ingredients for watermelon cucumber salad from the top view.

For the Salad Dressing:

I use my honey-lime dressing in this watermelon mint feta salad because the sweet, floral brightness of lime and honey pairs beautifully with the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Olive Oil: Choose a light and balanced extra virgin olive oil that isn’t overly peppery or grassy. You want something that supports the salad without overpowering the other ingredients. My current favorite single-source olive oil brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link.)

Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice is best, but bottled works in a pinch. If you don’t have lime, freshly squeezed lemon juice is an acceptable substitute. It will taste slightly different but still refreshing. You can also add a little lime zest (about ¼ teaspoon) to enhance the citrus notes. Just be sure to zest the lime before juicing it.

Honey: A floral local honey works especially well here, but maple syrup or agave are good alternatives if that’s what you have. Just know they’ll shift the flavor slightly.

For the Salad:

Watermelon: You’ll need 8 cups of watermelon cut into small 1-inch cubes. Seedless watermelon is the easiest option, but if you’re using regular watermelon, try cutting along the natural lines of the seeds to remove them more easily.

Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers offer great crunch, but regular English cucumbers also work well. I usually peel mine, especially if the skin tastes bitter, which can happen if the fruit has been sitting for a while. Removing the seeds is optional.

Fresh Herbs: The classic combo is watermelon, feta, and mint, but I like to add a little torn fresh basil for even more freshness. I don’t recommend using dried herbs here, as their flavors tend to overpower the dish.

Feta Cheese: I recommend buying a block of feta and crumbling it yourself. It’s creamier, fresher, and gives you more control over the size and texture of the crumbles. If you’re looking for alternatives, mild cheeses like goat cheese or queso fresco would also work well.

How to Make Watermelon Cucumber Salad (Easy Step-by-Step Instructions)

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in just 15 minutes from start to finish. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images shwowing the dressing for watermelon cucumber salad and the ingredients in a bowl.

Step 1- Make the Dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, combine the olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk well until the mixture is fully emulsified and appears creamy and cohesive, with no oil separation. If you’d like to save even more time, you can make the dressing in advance and store it in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Step 2 – Assemble the Salad: Grab a large bowl (one that gives you plenty of room to toss later without squishing anything) and add the diced watermelon, sliced cucumber, and fresh mint and basil. I recommend tearing the herbs by hand instead of chopping them with a knife. This helps preserve the delicate texture of the basil and prevents it from bruising or darkening.

A collage of images showing Mediterranean watermelon salad being drizzled with the dressing.

Step 3 – Add the Dressing: Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss with a large spoon (or two spoons, for an even gentler touch), taking care not to mash/bruise the watermelon cubes.

Step 4 – Finish with Feta: Top the salad with crumbled feta cheese just before serving. If you’d like, finish with a pinch of flaky sea salt to bring out the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Variations & Easy Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this watermelon cucumber mint salad recipe your own? Below are a few easy ways to switch things up using ingredients you may already have at home. These are optional, but they’re great if you want to build on the base recipe.

Change up the dressing: When I want a different twist, I swap the honey-lime dressing with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as bright and tangy. You can also finish the salad with a drizzle of balsamic reduction right before serving for a deeper, more concentrated flavor.

Make it heartier: If you’re making this watermelon feta salad as part of your meal prep, stir in a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, bulgur, or wild rice to make it more filling. For a more traditional green salad base, add a handful of salad greens or baby spinach.

Add Summer tomatoes:  Juicy sliced summer tomatoes (I like heirlooms for salads like these) add another layer of flavor and make the salad even more seasonal and vibrant.

Add Onion: A little onion can bring a nice savory bite. You can use thinly sliced red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. For a milder option, chopped scallions work well too.

Make it vegan: To make this a vegan-friendly salad, simply omit the cheese or use a store-bought or homemade vegan feta. And don’t forget to swap the honey in the dressing for maple syrup or agave.

Foolproof Tips for the Best Watermelon Cucumber Salad

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is simple, but here are a few tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Be gentle when mixing: Use a light hand when tossing the salad to keep the delicate ingredients from breaking apart. A large spoon or your hands work best for gently combining everything.

Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that feels heavy for its size and has a large yellow field spot. That spot means it had time to ripen on the vine, which usually means better taste and juiciness.

Cut your watermelon and cucumber evenlyDice the watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller for a more decorative look. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend slicing it thinly or cutting it into evenly sized cubes so you get both watermelon and cucumber in every bite.

Do not skip the salt: It may sound unusual, but adding a bit of salt to sweet watermelon makes a big difference. It brings out the natural sweetness and enhances the flavors of both the watermelon and cucumber.

Serve it chilled: This watermelon salad tastes best when it is nice and cold. I like to refrigerate the watermelon, cucumber, and feta before prepping so that everything is cool and refreshing when it is time to serve.

Assemble at the last minute: For the best texture, combine the watermelon, cucumber, herbs, and dressing just before serving. This keeps the watermelon and cucumber from getting soggy.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

Make Ahead: To save valuable time when you’re ready to serve, you can prep the components ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in a separate container with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble your feta watermelon cucumber salad right before serving to ensure the best texture and prevent sogginess.

Storage: Leftover salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

A close up of watermelon salad with feta and mint in a bowl.

What to Serve with Watermelon Cucumber Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Grilled Protein: Enjoy it as a light lunch or dinner, and serve it as a side dish to hearty grilled meat and seafood like Grilled Pork Chops, Shrimp Kebobs, Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shish Tawook, or Greek Yogurt Chicken.

Vegetarian Dinners: Keep the entire meal plant-forward and serve it as a wonderful addition to vegetarian main meals like Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, Baked Eggplant Ziti or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.

Picnic & Potluck Dishes: This salad is always a hit at summer BBQs, picnics, and potlucks. Pair it with other crowd-pleasers like my No Mayo Coleslaw or Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, or Caper Potato Salad.

Quick Answers to Common Questions (FAQs)

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do I pick a ripe watermelon quickly?

Look for one with a creamy yellow field spot, a dull rind (not shiny), and that feels heavy for its size. When you give it a gentle tap, it should sound deep and hollow.

What if I don’t have fresh mint?

Fresh mint adds a lot to this recipe, but if you do not have any on hand, you can simply leave it out. The salad will still be delicious, just a little less aromatic.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you love sweet and savory salads, you are in the right place. Here are a few other fruit-forward recipes you might want to try:

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon ~ 5 to 6 lbs – cut into 1-inch cubes (preferably seedless)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (or goat cheese)
  • Pinch sea salt optional

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
    Watermelon salad dressing and the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Alternatively, you can sprinkle it with a pinch of sea salt. Serve cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more of the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/#comments Fri, 23 May 2025 22:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13979 Banana and Strawberry Smoothie Ingredients You’ll need only four basic ingredients to make this banana strawberry smoothie recipe. I have…]]>

Banana and Strawberry Smoothie Ingredients

You’ll need only four basic ingredients to make this banana strawberry smoothie recipe. I have listed all the ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are some helpful notes to make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Fresh strawberries: When they’re in season, I always go for fresh strawberries. They are naturally sweet, and I never feel the need to add extra sugar. If you’re making this in the off-season, frozen strawberries work too. Just be aware that your smoothie will be thicker, and you might need to add more milk to adjust the consistency.

Banana: Using a frozen banana gives this smoothie a creamy texture and chills it without needing ice. If you only have a fresh banana, that’s fine too. I usually go for a ripe, soft banana since it’s sweeter and helps avoid adding any sweeteners.

Yogurt: Any type of yogurt will work here. I usually use plain or vanilla yogurt that I make from plain yogurt. Plain Greek yogurt is a good option if you like a thicker smoothie, though you may need to add a little extra milk. For a dairy-free or vegan smoothie, plant-based yogurts like cashew or almond yogurt are great. Personally, I like cashew yogurt because it has a more neutral taste that doesn’t overpower the fruit.

Milk: You can use regular or any plant-based/dairy-free milk you have on hand. Almond milk, oat milk, or soy milk are all good choices and blend well with the other ingredients.

Optional Add-Ins

This strawberry banana smoothie recipe is simple and satisfying as is, but it’s also easy to customize. Here are a few optional add-ins you can try to make it your own:

Sweeteners: I find the smoothie sweet enough with just fresh fruit, but if you want a little extra, a drizzle of honey or maple syrup works well. I often use local honey, especially during allergy season.

Protein: If you want to turn this smoothie into a more filling breakfast or post-workout snack, adding protein is a great option. A scoop of your favorite protein powder blends in easily, or you can use a tablespoon of peanut butter (or almond butter) for extra creaminess and a touch of nutty taste.

Superfoods: While optional, adding a spoonful of chia seeds, ground flax seeds, or hemp seeds is an easy way to include a bit more fiber and protein. The good news is that they mix in well and do not change the taste much.

Greens: A small handful of spinach or baby kale blends in well and is an easy way to add more vegetables to your day. The fresh fruit does a great job masking the taste, especially if you’re making this for picky eaters (or trying to sneak in some greens yourself).

Flavor boosters: For an extra layer of warmth and sweetness, a tiny splash of vanilla extract can truly elevate this smoothie. It’s my secret touch that makes it taste a bit more gourmet without any extra effort.

How To Make a Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt?

Making this smoothie is as simple as it gets. It comes together in just a few minutes, and cleanup is minimal—perfect for busy mornings or a quick afternoon pick-me-up.

Grab your blender: If you have a high-powered blender like a Vitamix, this is a great time to use it. That said, a standard blender will work just fine for this banana and strawberry smoothie.

A collage of images showing how to make banana strawberry smoothie recipe.

Add ingredients: For best results, start with the softer ingredients. Add your liquids and softer ingredients, meaning your yogurt, milk, and fresh strawberries (and of course any of the optional add-ins, if using). Then top it with the frozen banana. This layering helps the blades move freely without getting stuck and blend everything more easily. This is especially helpful if you do not have a high-powered blender because “the vortex” that the softer ingredients create helps break the fruit more efficiently without overworking your blender.

Blend: Start on a low speed to help break down the fruit gradually and avoid splashes, then increase to high and blend until everything is thoroughly combined and smooth to your liking. If you like your smoothie thinner, add a splash more milk and blend again. 

Taste and adjust: Give it a quick taste. If you want more strawberry or banana flavor, feel free to toss in a little extra and blend again. Smoothies are wonderfully flexible, so make it your own according to your taste.

Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass garnished with a strawberry.

Helpful Tips

Using ice: I avoid using ice in my smoothies to prevent diluting the rich fresh fruit flavors. That said, if you’re using fresh bananas, a small amount of ice can help chill the smoothie without changing its consistency too much.

Consistency and texture: This is where you have so much creative control. If you prefer your smoothie thick and creamy, blend less or add a bit more fruit. For a thinner, smoother texture, just add more milk or yogurt.

Quick blender clean up: This strawberry banana smoothie takes just 5 minutes to make, but let’s be honest, cleaning the blender often takes longer. Here’s my go-to trick: fill the empty blender with warm water and a drop of dish soap, blend for about 30 seconds, then rinse. That’s it. No scrubbing needed!

FAQs

How do you freeze bananas to make this smoothie?

Peel and slice a ripe banana and place the slices on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper in a single layer. Place in the freezer for at least 3 hours or overnight.

Can I use a fresh banana instead of frozen?

Yes, you can. However, keep in mind that using frozen bananas make the smoothie creamy without using ice. If using fresh, feel free to use a handful of ice to make it cold.

How can I make my smoothie thicker or thinner?

Add more fruit to make it thicker or more liquid to make it thinner.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Smoothie Recipes:

It is no secret that smoothies are wonderful when you need a quick breakfast or snack. Over the years I have shared many smoothie recipes. Below are a few of my favorites. If you enjoyed this strawberry banana smoothie you might also like them.

  • My go-to green smoothie 👉🏻 This Pineapple and Kale Smoothie is a green powerhouse. Similar to this strawberry banana recipe it is made without any added sugar.
  • Favorite turmeric smoothie 👉🏻 I make this Turmeric Ginger Smoothie made with carrots, fresh ginger and fresh turmeric is sunshine in a glass.
Person serving a strawberry smoothie in a glass.
Print

Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt Recipe

A quick and easy strawberry banana smoothie made with yogurt, milk, and no added sugar. Perfect for breakfast or a refreshing afternoon snack. Ready in just 5 minutes!
Course Smoothie
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 173kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups fresh strawberries hulled and cut in half – 275 g
  • ½ cup plain yogurt or vanilla yogurt or plant based yogurt
  • ½ cup milk regular or plant-based milk
  • 1 frozen banana sliced 125 g.

Optional Add ins:

  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
  • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place strawberries, yogurt, milk, and frozen banana slices in a blender.
  • Start blending at low speed and then up the speed and blend until smooth.
  • Serve right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of smoothie, ideal for 2 adult servings. The nutritional values below do not include calories from optional add-ins.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container or jar and keep in the fridge for up to 2 days. Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Freezing: For longer storage, you can freeze it in a freezer-safe container or popsicle molds for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Calories: 173kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 53mg | Potassium: 618mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 215IU | Vitamin C: 90mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/feed/ 6
Mediterranean Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/#comments Thu, 22 May 2025 12:56:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81553 Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing…]]>

Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing in the kitchen wondering, what should I bring? I mean, I know I have a blog full of recipes, but when you’re serving a crowd with so many preferences and diet restrictions, it’s always a hard decision to make.

My experience is that this Mediterranean macaroni salad seems to please most people. For one thing, most people love the familiar “Greek” flavors (i.e. cucumbers, olives, tomatoes, etc.) and it rarely needs an introduction. To me, it is like a bistro pasta salad that is the most popular dish on the menu.

Cold Mediterranean pasta salad in a bowl with wooden spoons from the top view.

Key Ingredients:

The good news is that once you understand the process and the flavor profile, it’s easy to make this Mediterranean pasta recipe your own. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful notes and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Pasta: I used farfalle (also known as bow tie pasta), but other shapes like rotini and fusilli would also work. I prefer these shapes as they hold on to the dressing, blend well with the rest of the ingredients, and are easy to scoop and eat cold. Of course, you can always use gluten-free pasta if preferred. 

Canned & fresh veggies: In my humble opinion, using a combination of canned and fresh vegetables is what makes this Mediterranean noodle salad a winner. And the best part is that if you do not have one ingredient (or you don’t care for it), you can use another. Here are a few optional add-ins and substitution ideas:

  • Onion: Use finely chopped red onion instead of scallions.
  • Tomatoes: If tomatoes are not in season, use finely chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano is the classic “Mediterranean” herb used in salads like this, but other herbs like fresh parsley, dill, and mint would all work.
  • Cheese: Not a fan of feta cheese? Use goat or no cheese if you prefer a vegan or dairy-free version of this pasta salad. 
  • Add protein: If you want to turn this into a more filling meal, feel free to bulk it up with a protein. Chickpeas are a great plant-based option and work beautifully with the Mediterranean flavors. You can also add grilled shrimp, chicken, or even canned tuna for a quick boost. Just be sure everything is cooled before mixing it in.
  • Pasta Salad Dressing: I used my go-to Mediterranean Vinaigrette, but my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette would also be a great dressing option.

How to Make Mediterranean Pasta Salad?

Once you have the ingredients ready, making this Mediterranean diet pasta salad is no more than a few easy steps. You can find the detailed recipe below, but here’s how I put it together:

A collage of images showing cooked pasta and making of the pasta salad dressing.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: I feel like most pasta salads either have too much pasta or too many “supporting” ingredients. For a salad with so many add-ins, I find that 8 ounces of pasta (which gives you about 4 cups cooked) is the right balance.

Cook it in well-salted boiling water until al dente, according to the package instructions. Then drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Pro tip: Let the pasta cool completely before adding the rest of the ingredients. If it’s too warm, it can wilt the veggies or melt the cheese. Plus, the dressing will soak in too quickly, leaving the salad a bit dry.

Step 2: Make the dressing: You can make the Mediterranean pasta salad dressing in a mason jar (great if you’re making it ahead) or a measuring cup, but if I’m making this for just us at home, I usually grab a large bowl and make it right there. 

That way, (1) I don’t have to wash another dish, and (2) I can start building the salad directly in the bowl.

No matter what vessel you’re using, start by adding the lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, salt, and pepper. Then, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while whisking. This helps emulsify the dressing, making it a little creamy and helping it cling to the pasta.

Photos showing how to assemble the Mediterranean noodle salad.

Step 3 – Assemble the salad: Grab a large salad bowl. And I do mean large because we’ve got a good amount of vegetables going in. Add the cooled pasta along with the rest of the ingredients. It’ll look like a pile at first, and that’s totally fine.

Step 4: Dress and serve: Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. It might get a little messy, but that’s part of the charm of this easy pasta salad. Use tongs or two large spoons, and be gentle (and patient) as you toss.

If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so the flavors can mingle.

Expert Tips:

Before you start cooking, here are a few tips to help you get the best results from this cold Mediterranean pasta salad. These small details can make a big difference in taste, texture, and presentation.

Drain the canned vegetables: One of the reasons this salad is so convenient is that it takes advantage of canned or jarred ingredients like artichoke hearts, roasted bell peppers, and olives. But if you don’t drain them properly, they can add too much moisture and water down the salad. Use a colander and drain each ingredient thoroughly before adding it to the bowl.

Taste for seasoning: Whenever I write a recipe with salty or briny ingredients like feta cheese and olives, I keep the added salt to a minimum. But let’s face it, not all feta or olives are created equal. Some are much saltier than others. So it’s always a good idea to taste those components first, then adjust the amount of salt in the dressing as needed.

Chop everything into similar sizes: For the best texture and an even bite, keep all the ingredients around the same size as the pasta. It’s a small thing, but it helps everything mix well and makes the salad easier to eat.

Serving Suggestions:

While this Mediterranean bow tie pasta salad can stand on its own, it also pairs well with a variety of main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted or grilled meat and seafood: This pasta salad is the ideal companion to a simply grilled salmonbaked chicken breast, or even lamb chops. The fresh, vibrant flavors of the salad beautifully cut through the richness of grilled proteins, making for a light yet satisfying meal.
  • Make it a Mediterranean weeknight dinner: Make a batch of my mom’s Chicken Kofta Recipe and serve it with your pasta for a true Mediterranean feast.
  • Bread: Serve it with a side of crusty bread (such as my Olive Bread) or warm pita bread to scoop up every last bit of that delicious dressing.
  • Fresh fruit: If all you need is a light and refreshing complement, serve it alongside a bowl of seasonal fresh fruit, such as watermelon, berries, or grapes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean cold pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mediterranean Pasta Salad is a vibrant, make-ahead dish that’s perfect for gatherings, lunches, or easy dinners. It travels well and tastes even better after a few hours.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 350kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad:

  • 8 oz dry pasta farfalle, fusilli or rotini
  • 3 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber – peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2/3 cup black olives such as Kalamata olives sliced or chopped – 3 oz.
  • 1 cup roasted red peppers sliced and drained (or cut into small strips) (I use jarred)
  • 1 cup marinated artichoke hearts quartered and drained (7 oz after drained)
  • 3 scallions thinly sliced
  • 2 cups arugula or baby spinach – washed and dried
  • 4 oz. feta cheese crumbled

For the Mediterranean Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ⅛ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta until it’s al dente, according to the package directions. Drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the cooked pasta and salad dressing for the recipe.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the dressing by whisking together 3 tablespoons lemon juice (or vinegar), 1 clove of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon chopped oregano, ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl. Slowly drizzle in ¼ cup of olive oil while whisking until fully emulsified.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, cucumber, tomatoes, olives, roasted red peppers, artichoke hearts, scallions, arugula, and feta cheese.
    Images showing how to assemble the Mediterranean macaroni salad.
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to ensure all ingredients are evenly coated with the dressing. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving.
    Pasta salad in a bowl with wooden utensils.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of pasta salad that is ideal for six (generous) servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Keep in mind that this salad gets better as it sits, so you can absolutely make it a day in advance. The only thing I recommend is holding off on adding the arugula or spinach until just before serving so the greens stay fresh and don’t wilt.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. It is normal to get a bit soggy as it sits. Be sure to give it a good toss and taste (and adjust) the seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1027IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/feed/ 4
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Wed, 14 May 2025 11:56:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s…]]>

If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s just not as popular as grains like brown rice or quinoa here in the U.S. But you’re in the right place. 

I grew up eating (and cooking) this ancient grain on the regular, and on this site, you’ll find plenty of approachable and flavorful recipes using bulgur wheat. Start with this Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe, and when you are ready for more, learn How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice or try my Chicken with Bulgur and Tabbouleh Salad recipes.

Turkish bulgur pilaf in a pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

What You Need To Know in a Nutshell

  • What is Bulgur Pilaf? Also referred to as bulgar pilaf, bulgur pilavi, or bulghur pilaf, this traditional dish is made by cooking bulgur with aromatic vegetables and spices. It’s a beloved staple across Mediterranean and Middle Eastern countries, especially in Turkish, Lebanese, and Armenian cuisines. Made with coarse bulgur, it has a chewy texture and a naturally nutty flavor that makes it both hearty and satisfying.
  • Two versions to choose from: Depending on the region (or your own preference), bulgur wheat pilaf can be made with vegetables like onions, tomatoes, and peppers, or kept more basic with toasted vermicelli. Both are equally simple to prepare and delicious in their own way.

How To Make Bulgur Pilaf?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe comes together in just a few steps with pantry staples. Here is how you cook it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients:  For the full list of ingredients, check out the recipe card below. Here are a few helpful notes and substitution ideas:
    • Bulgur: You’ll find several types of bulgur at the store, but for this recipe, coarse or extra coarse bulgur works best. I usually order mine online (affiliate link), but Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur is a good alternative and easy to find in most grocery stores.
    • Tomato: One large fresh tomato is all you need. If you do not have fresh tomatoes on hand, you can either omit it or add one more tablespoon of tomato paste.
    • Pepper: A small green bell pepper can be used instead of jalapenos.
    • Cooking liquid: For extra flavor, use vegetable stock or chicken stock instead of water.
    • Spices and herbs: Ground cumin and fresh parsley are classic choices, but feel free to experiment with other spices such as ground coriander and paprika. The same applies to fresh herbs.  If you have it on hand, a combination of fresh mint, dill, and parsley would be fantastic in this Mediterranean bulgur recipe.
A collage of images showing how to make bulgur pilaf with tomatoes and chickpeas.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add onion, ground cumin, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Stir in the minced garlic and tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or so.
  2. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in bulgur, chopped tomatoes, chickpeas, and your cooking liquid of choice. Season with salt and pepper, and stir to combine everything evenly.
A collage of images showing bulgur wheat pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  1. Let it cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and lower the heat. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

A lot of Turkish rice dishes include vermicelli, like the classic Vermicelli Rice Pilaf. So it’s no surprise that bulgur pilaf with vermicelli is also a popular variation. As a matter of fact, it was one of my mom’s signature recipes. 

Bulgur wheat pilaf with vermicelli from the top view.

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil, but as is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it on medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in ¼ cup of the vermicelli (or orzo) and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur wheat and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  5. Cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Expert Tips

  • Use the right bulgur grind: For the best texture, stick with coarse or extra coarse bulgur (sometimes sold as “pilavlik bulgur”). Finer (sold as fine bulgur) varieties tend to become mushy and won’t give you the signature chewy bite that it is known for. If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.
  • Should you rinse bulgur before cooking? It’s totally up to you. Rinsing isn’t required, especially if your bulgur is pre-packaged and clean. But if you’re buying from bulk bins, a quick rinse under cold water is a good idea.
  • Toast for extra flavor: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the bulgur briefly before adding the liquid. It might come as an extra step, but doing so deepens the nutty flavor and adds a subtle complexity to the overall dish.
  • Liquid-to-bulgur ratio: My go-to ratio for 1:2, meaning for every 1 cup of coarse bulgur, you will need 2 cups of liquid. That said, depending on the brand and grind of bulgur, you might need slightly more or less liquid. If the grains still feel firm after the liquid is absorbed, add a splash of hot water, cover, and let it sit a bit longer.
  • Do not skip the resting: Letting the pilaf rest covered after cooking helps the grains fully absorb any remaining moisture and gives you a fluffier final dish.
  • Adjust the seasoning after cooking: Taste your bulgur pilaf before serving and adjust the salt, pepper, or herbs to your liking. While it is optional, a squeeze of lemon juice just before serving can brighten the flavors beautifully.

Serving Suggestions

Traditionally, bulgur pilaf is served with chicken or beef recipes as a side dish. That being said, it can stand on its own as a vegetarian dish, especially if it is served with a side salad. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • Red meat: Bulgur pilaf pairs beautifully with hearty meat dishes, especially the ones with rich sauces that the pilaf can soak up. Try it with my eggplant beef stew or Ina’s pot roast to add a Mediterranean twist to your meal. And if you’re in the mood for something a little lighter, it goes perfectly with lamb meatballs.
  • Chicken: This pilaf is the perfect side dish for classic Middle Eastern chicken recipes. Serve it with juicy Shawarma Chicken or Shish Taouk for a meal that feels special but is super easy to pull together. 
  • Vegetarian: For a simple vegetarian meal, serve the pilaf with creamy cucumber and yogurt sauce (aka tzatziki), yogurt dressing, or a cold glass of ayran. Or, if you’re feeling a bit fancy, use it as a filling in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe—it’s a beautiful dish that looks impressive but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is one of the most popular Turkish recipes on Foolproof Living, and for good reason, it is absolutely delicious. If you try it, please leave a comment and rating below to let me know how it turned out. And don’t forget to tag your photos on Instagram with #foolproofeats so I can see and share your creations!

Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is a classic Middle Eastern/Mediterranean side dish made with simple pantry ingredients. Ready in about 20 minutes, it has a satisfying chewy texture and a subtle nutty taste, making it perfect to serve with meat, chicken, or as a light vegetarian meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp olive oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas 14 oz. can, drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water or vegetable broth
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, cumin and green pepper and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes.
    Person showing how to saute veggies to make bulgur wheat pilaf.
  • Stir in the minced garlic and sautee for 30 seconds. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in bulgur wheat, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season it with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
    Bulgur pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  • Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of bulgur pilaf, which serves four people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in a pot with a splash of water over medium heat until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, transfer to a freezer-safe container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • Bulgur and Vermicelli Pilaf: An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in 1/4 cup vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
    5. Rest & Serve: Let it rest (with the lid on) for 10 minutes and then fluff it with a fork before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 49
Roasted Whole Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/#comments Fri, 11 Apr 2025 19:33:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20085 How to Roast Whole Carrots? Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

  • Ideal temperature and time: My preferred temperature for roasting is 425°F (218°C), and the roasting time is usually around 20–25 minutes. That said, cooking carrots in the oven depends on their thickness—thinner carrots (like the young ones from the farmers market) tend to roast quickly, while thicker ones may need 10-15 more minutes, depending on their size.
  • Uniform size matters: When shopping for this recipe, try to pick carrots that are similar in size so they roast evenly. If some are much thicker than others, you can cut them lengthwise to even them out.
  • To peel or not to peel? It’s totally up to you! I usually peel mine, but if you’ve got fresh, young carrots from the market, a good scrub under cold water works just as well.
  • Don’t crowd the pan: Spread the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan. Overcrowding can lead to steaming instead of roasting.

How to Roast Whole Carrots?

Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for a weekday dinner or a special gathering, here’s how to make roasted carrots that are tender, flavorful, and beautifully caramelized.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few substitutions and optional add-ins:
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is what I use most often, but melted butter or avocado oil are great options, too.
    • Seasonings: Keep it simple with salt and pepper, or add spices like cumin, smoked paprika, garlic powder, or even a touch of cinnamon for warmth.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme is a favorite, but rosemary, oregano, or chopped parsley also work beautifully. Feel free to adjust the herbs based on what you’re serving—using the same or complementary herbs can help bring the whole meal together.
    • Sweeteners:  For holiday versions like honey-roasted carrots, try drizzling with a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup or sprinkling with a bit of brown sugar. If you’re after a more glazed finish, check out my Maple Roasted Carrots recipe for a richer, sweeter take.
  2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). I usually roast vegetables directly on the sheet pan because I find that the hot surface helps them caramelize better—especially when it comes to onions or root veggies. But if you prefer easier cleanup, feel free to line your pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
Steps showing how to season carrots to bake in the oven.
  1. Season the carrots: Place your carrots on the prepared sheet in a single layer. Drizzle with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Give them a good toss so they’re evenly coated.
  2. Roast the carrots: Pop the tray into the oven and roast carrots in oven for about 25 minutes, or until fork-tender. Test doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part—if it slides in easily, they’re ready.
  3. Serve and garnish: Transfer the baked whole carrots recipe to a platter and top with fresh parsley or your favorite herb for a little extra color and flavor.

Expert Tips

A few final tips to make your easy baked carrots even better:

  • Carrot tops: If your carrots have tops, you can trim them down but leave a little bit for a rustic look. And don’t toss those tops! They’re great for making a vibrant carrot top pesto—fresh, herby, and perfect for using up the whole vegetable.
  • For extra caramelization: Don’t flip the carrots during roasting—just let them roast cut-side down. This allows the natural sugars in the carrots to caramelize where they’re in contact with the hot surface, giving you those golden, slightly crisp edges that are so delicious.
  • Using baby carrots: While this recipe works well with any type of carrot, baby carrots tend to cook faster due to their smaller size. If you’re using this recipe to make roasted baby carrots, start checking for doneness around the 15-minute mark to avoid overcooking.
  • Cutting them in chunks: If you prefer, you can cut the carrots into 1½-inch pieces. Roasting them in chunks should take about the same amount of time, as long as they’re evenly sized.
Whole roasted carrots garnished with parsley from the top view.

Serving Suggestions

This simple carrot side dish pairs beautifully with so many mains. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted Chicken – You really can’t go wrong pairing these carrots with any kind of roasted chicken, but I especially love serving them alongside a whole roasted chicken or bone-in chicken breast. The flavors and textures just work so well together.
  • Prime Rib – These carrots are a great way to add a pop of color to your prime rib dinner, which I usually serve for Christmas. One of my favorite tricks is to roast the carrots while the meat is resting—everything comes together beautifully without any extra fuss.
  • Leg of Lamb – For a festive Easter meal (or any special occasion), serve these roasted carrots with roasted leg of lamb. The natural sweetness of the carrots is a great complement to the rich, savory lamb.

My Favorite Way to Serve Whole Roasted Carrots:

While this easy roasted carrots recipe is a delicious side dish straight from the oven, I love giving it a Mediterranean twist when I have a few extra minutes. The flavor profile in this version is inspired by my roasted carrot hummus recipe.

A woman is serving oven Baked Carrots Recipe on a sheet pan

I top the carrots with a cup of canned (and drained) chickpeas, a handful of crumbled feta cheese, fresh dill (or any other fresh herb I have on hand), and pomegranate seeds.

Then, I finish it off with a generous drizzle of my tahini lemon sauce.

It takes no more than 10 additional minutes, but it transforms this basic savory roasted carrots dish into a colorful, crowd-pleasing vegetable side dish that’s just a little extra special.

More Carrot Recipes You Might Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this roasted whole carrots recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Overn roasted carrots on a plate from the top view.
Print

Roasted Whole Carrots Recipe

This Roasted Whole Carrots recipe is all about simplicity and flavor. With just olive oil, salt, and pepper, the natural sweetness of the carrots shines through. It's a versatile side that fits seamlessly into everyday meals or special holiday spreads.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs whole carrots cleaned, stems cut, and peeled
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 °F (218 °C).
  • Place the carrots onto a large baking sheet* in a single layer.
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Toss to ensure all carrots are coated evenly with the oil and seasoning.
  • Roast in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork tender. You can check doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part of a carrot; if it comes in and out easily, it should be ready.
  • Transfer onto a serving platter and garnish with parsley before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: Two pounds of roasted carrots serve 6 as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Carrots: I used whole carrots that are sold with stems. They tend to be thinner than regular carrots sold in plastic bags. This recipe would work with any carrot, but please remember that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the carrots and cooking time. For best results, I recommend cutting larger carrots vertically to ensure they are equal in size for even roasting.
  • Lining the baking sheet: I usually roast carrots without lining the baking sheet with parchment paper, as roasting them directly on the hot surface caramelizes them better. However, you can line the baking sheet with parchment paper if preferred.
  • To Store: Let the roasted whole carrots cool, then transfer them to an airtight container. They’ll keep well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold, at room temperature, or reheated.
  • To Reheat: I prefer warming them up in a low-heat oven (around 300°F/150°C) for 10–12 minutes. This gentle method helps preserve their texture and prevents them from drying out. You can also reheat them in a covered skillet over low heat if you’re short on time.
    To Freeze: While you can freeze roasted carrots, the texture will be softer once they are thawed. If that’s okay with you (for soups or purees), place the cooled carrots in a freezer-safe bag or container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat it in the oven for best results.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 299mg | Potassium: 489mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 25316IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/feed/ 24
Goat Cheese Quiche https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-quiche-with-caramelized-onions-and-thyme/ https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-quiche-with-caramelized-onions-and-thyme/#comments Wed, 09 Apr 2025 16:12:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3098 If you’re a fan of cooking with goat cheese, this quiche is a great addition to your collection—right alongside some…]]>

If you’re a fan of cooking with goat cheese, this quiche is a great addition to your collection—right alongside some of my other favorite goat cheese recipes.

A slice of chevre quiche served with a green salad.

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell:

Here are the key things to keep in mind when making this spinach and goat cheese quiche:

  • Crust options: While I made my goat cheese quiche using a homemade pie crust, you can use a store-bought premade pie shell as well. If you choose to make your own, it can be made ahead and frozen. If preferred, you can use a gluten-free pie crust.
  • Creamy custard base: This isn’t your average quiche. Unlike most recipes that use milk, this goat cheese quiche recipe uses heavy cream to create a custard that’s extra rich and velvety. The result is a filling that’s exceptionally smooth and creamy.
  • Let it rest: The quiche might look a little soft in the center when it first comes out of the oven, but it firms up as it cools.

How To Make Goat Cheese Quiche?

This caramelized onion goat cheese quiche recipe comes together in a few easy steps. While it looks impressive, it’s quite approachable—especially if you prep the crust ahead. Let me walk you through how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are a few helpful notes:
    • Goat Cheese: Buy already crumbled goat cheese to save on time. Alternatively, you can also use herbed goat cheese that you can find in most supermarkets.
    • Pie Crust: If you’re making your own crust (which I highly recommend if you have the time), you can prep it a few days ahead, cover it tightly with stretch film, and keep it in the freezer until you’re ready to use it. Store-bought is perfectly fine too, especially when time is tight.
    • Fresh or frozen spinach: I used fresh spinach that was previously washed and spin-dried (a great time saver!). You can use an equal amount of frozen (and thawed) spinach, but make sure to remove the excess liquid before adding it into the filling. If preferred, you can omit using spinach and flavor the caramelized onion with a tablespoon of chopped fresh thyme.
    • Optional additions: While my recipe for my goat cheese quiche only uses a combination of caramelized onions and spinach, you can add ¼ cup of drained sun-dried tomatoes, sauteed or roasted mushrooms, or a handful of thinly sliced prosciutto into the mixture.
Pie crust dough in food processor.
  1. Make the pie dough: Start by mixing together the sour cream and ice water in a small bowl. In a food processor, combine the flour, sugar, and salt, then add cold butter. Pulse a few times until the butter is incorporated into the flour. Pour in the sour cream mixture and pulse again until the dough clumps together. 
Steps showing how to shape the pie crust.
  1. Let it rest: Turn it out, form it into a 4-inch disk, wrap it up with stretch film, and transfer it into the fridge for at least an hour—or overnight if that works better for you.
  2. Roll and shape the crust: When you’re ready to bake, let the dough sit out for 10 minutes so it’s easier to roll. Roll it into an 11-inch circle on a lightly floured surface, then carefully transfer it to a 9-inch glass tart pan, gently pressing it into the bottom and up the sides.. Tuck any excess dough under itself to create a neat edge. If preferred, using your thumb and index finger on one hand and the knuckle of your opposite index finger, gently pinch the edge to form a fluted pattern. This optional step is a small touch, but it gives the quiche a lovely, classic look. Cover it and place it in the freezer for about 15–20 minutes so it holds its shape when baking.
Pie crust with beans and onions in a pan.
  1. Blind bake the crust: While the crust is chilling, preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C). Once chilled, line the crust with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and fill it with pie weights (or you can use dried beans like I did). Bake for 30 minutes, then remove the weights and parchment and bake for another 5 minutes until the edges are lightly golden. Set it aside to cool a bit. (No need to turn off the oven.)
  2. Caramelize the onions: While the crust bakes, make caramelized onions—heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add your sliced onions and cook them slowly—this takes about 15–20 minutes, but it’s worth it for that deep caramelized flavor. 
Caramelized onion with spinach and the filling in a bowl.
  1. Add spinach: Add baby spinach leaves and cook just until wilted, about 5–6 minutes more. Let the mixture cool slightly before using.
  2. Mix the custard: While the quiche filling is cooking, whisk together the eggs, heavy cream, salt, and pepper in a medium bowl until fully incorporated. 
Steps showing how to assemble the goat cheese quiche with spinach and caramelized onions.
  1. Assemble the quiche: Layer the crumbled goat cheese evenly over the crust. Top with your onion and spinach mixture, then pour the custard over everything, ensuring it’s evenly distributed.
  2. Bake: Carefully transfer your chevre quiche to the oven and bake at 375°F (190°C) for 30–35 minutes. The edges should be set, and it’s totally okay if the center has a slight jiggle—it will finish setting as it cools.
  3. Cool and serve: Let your spinach goat cheese quiche sit on the counter for about 15 minutes before slicing. It will be easier to cut and serve, and the flavors will settle nicely. Enjoy it warm or at room temperature.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips:

While this goat cheese and spinach quiche recipe is pretty straightforward, I’d like to share a few tips that can help make the process even easier and ensure your quiche turns out perfectly every time:

  • Do not skip the blind baking: This step is essential for avoiding a soggy bottom. Make sure that the pie crust is fully baked before adding the filling.
  • Glass vs Metal Pie Plate: This recipe was tested using a glass 9-inch pie dish. If you are using a metal pie plate, check the doneness of the crust 5-10 minutes before the suggested baking time. Consider using some foil around the edges if the crust starts to brown too fast before the filling is set.
  • Using store-bought pie crust: If you opt for premade frozen pie crust, let it sit at room temperature for about 10–15 minutes, just until it’s soft enough and follow the baking instructions as written. You don’t want it to be too warm, or it may lose its shape.
  • If the center looks a little soft, that’s expected: When the quiche comes out of the oven, the middle may look slightly undercooked. That’s completely normal—it will continue to set as it cools on the counter. Just give it about 15 minutes before slicing.
Sliced quiche with goat cheese and caramelized onions in a pie plate.

What to Serve it With?

While this spinach and goat cheese quiche is perfect on its own, you can easily turn it into a brunch feast by pairing it with one of the dishes below:

Other Goat Cheese Recipes You Might Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

The “all butter pie crust” part of this quiche is adapted from Cook’s Illustrated Cookbook (affiliate link).

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Goat cheese quiche sliced in a pie pan from the top view.
Print

Goat Cheese Quiche with Caramelized Onions and Spinach

This Goat Cheese Quiche is a brunch favorite made with a flaky crust, creamy custard, caramelized onions, and spinach. Whether you're hosting for a holiday or enjoying a slow weekend morning, it’s an easy, elegant dish that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Brunch
Cuisine French
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Servings 8 slices
Calories 321kcal

Ingredients

For The Crust:

  • 4 teaspoons sour cream*
  • 4 tablespoons ice water
  • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour 177 g.
  • 1 ½ teaspoons sugar
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter cold – cut into small pieces, 114 g.

For The Filling:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 small onions sliced thinly into half-moon slices (400 gr)
  • 5 ounces baby spinach leaves rinsed and spin dried, 142 g.
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • 3 large eggs
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 4 oz. goat cheese crumbled, 113g

Instructions

  • To make the crust, mix 4 teaspoons of sour cream and 4 tablespoons of ice water in a bowl until combined. Set it aside.
    Steps showing how to make the pie crust.
  • Place 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour, 1 ½ teaspoons sugar, and ½ teaspoon kosher salt into a food processor. Pulse 3-4 times to combine.
  • Scatter the small pieces of butter on the flour mixture and process for 10 1-second pulses until the butter is incorporated into the flour with small pieces of butter still remaining.
    Butter scattered over the flour in a food processor.
  • Pour the sour cream mixture over the top and pulse 6 or 7 1-second pulses.
  • Stop the machine and pinch the dough with your fingers. If it holds together, you are done. If not, add 1 tablespoon of ice-cold water and pulse until dough forms large clumps and no dry flour remains, 3 to 5 pulses.
  • Transfer the dough onto your kitchen counter, turn it into a 4-inch disk, and wrap it tightly with stretch film. Refrigerate for at least an hour or overnight.
    Steps showing the pie crust before and after it is rolled out.
  • Before rolling it out, let it sit on the counter for 10 minutes.
  • When ready to bake, preheat the oven to 375 F Degrees (191 C).
  • Lightly flour your work surface and roll the dough into an 11-inch circle. Carefully transfer it over a 9-inch tart pan. Tuck the excess 1-inch pieces underneath to form a neat and even edge.
  • Cover it with plastic wrap and place it in the freezer for 15-20 minutes until thoroughly chilled and firm.
  • Take it out of the freezer. Place a sheet of parchment paper (or aluminum foil) over the dough and fill it with pie weights or a cup of dry beans.
    Pie crust with beans and onions in a pan.
  • Transfer it to the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes.
  • Remove the pie weights and the parchment paper, and bake for another 5 minutes until lightly browned. Take it out of the oven and set it aside. Do not turn the oven off.
  • To make the filling: While the crust is baking, heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add sliced onions, and, stirring often, cook for 15-20 minutes or until they turn golden brown.
    Vegetables cooked in a pan and quiche filling is being whipped.
  • Add baby spinach and cook until wilted, stirring often, about 5 minutes. Set aside aside to cool.
  • To make the filling, mix together the ½ cup heavy cream, 3 large eggs, ½ teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl.
  • To assemble the quiche, scatter 4 ounces of crumbled goat cheese pieces, caramelized onion, and spinach mixture over the pie crust.
    A collage of images showing how to assemble the goat cheese and spinach quiche.
  • Pour the heavy and egg mixture over it.
  • Bake for 30-35 minutes. When you first take it out of the oven, it may look like the middle part of the quiche is not fully cooked. This is normal. It will continue to cook as it cools on the kitchen counter.
  • Allow it to cool for 10-15 minutes, slice, and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This goat cheese quiche recipe makes a 9-inch quiche that yields 8 slices. The nutritional values below are per slice.
  • Using store-bought frozen crust: You can skip making your own and use a pre-made frozen pie crust instead. When shopping, look for one that is 9 inches wide and about 1¼ inches deep—this size works best with the amount of filling in this recipe. Anything smaller or larger might not hold the filling properly or bake evenly.
  • Using sour cream: It might seem like an unusual (and tiny) addition, but that little bit of sour cream is what makes this all-butter crust tender, flaky, and surprisingly easy to work with. It helps even beginner bakers get great results—no fuss, no cracking, just a beautifully baked crust. While I highly recommend sour cream, an equal amount of full-fat Greek yogurt would be a good substitute.
  • Make-Ahead Instructions: You can prep all the components—crust, caramelized onions, and filling—a day in advance. Wrap each tightly and store them in the fridge, then assemble the quiche just before baking.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat (300°F (148°C) oven for 10-15 minutes or until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: While I always prefer serving this quiche freshly baked—when the crust is crisp and the filling is at its creamiest—freezing is a great option if you need to make it ahead, especially when cooking for a crowd. To freeze, let the quiche cool completely to room temperature after baking. Then, wrap it tightly with stretch film or foil and freeze for up to one month. When you’re ready to serve, unwrap it and let it thaw on the kitchen counter for about 4 hours. Reheat in a 300°F (148°C) oven for 20–25 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 321kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 116mg | Sodium: 388mg | Potassium: 207mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 2479IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-quiche-with-caramelized-onions-and-thyme/feed/ 32
Cottage Cheese Flatbread https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/#comments Thu, 06 Mar 2025 14:31:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80245 If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback.…]]>

If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback. This viral cottage cheese flatbread recipe, created by Francesca Aralla of HealthyMumWay, is a perfect example of why—it’s simple, high in protein, and incredibly versatile.

Cottage cheese flatbread used as a wrap.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This recipe for cottage cheese flatbread calls for only 2 main ingredients—seriously, it’s that simple. A 2-ingredient recipe that takes only 5 minutes to prepare is a lifesaver for those who love to meal prep and for busy weeknight dinners. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Full-Fat Cottage Cheese: The full-fat 4% version of cottage cheese works best in this recipe, giving it the desired end texture. My favorite cottage cheese brands are Good Culture, Trader Joe’s, and Daisy. If you prefer to use 2%, Good Culture is a solid choice.
  • Eggs: I tested this recipe using large whole eggs, which is what I recommend. However, if you want to make cottage cheese flatbread with egg whites, you can do so—just be aware that your protein flatbread will end up being lighter in both color and flavor. 
  • Optional—Salt: I don’t include this as a main ingredient, as adding salt will be determined by the type of cottage cheese you end up using. Some types of cottage cheese are saltier than others, so be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding any additional salt. If you do, just a pinch will do. 
  • To Prep Pan—Cooking Spray: Have a can of cooking spray handy to ensure your baked cottage cheese flatbread doesn’t stick to the baking sheet. I prefer avocado oil spray. 

Optional Add-Ins

This simple cottage cheese flatbread recipe is endlessly customizable. Depending on which toppings, spices, sauces, and ingredients you choose to use, you can turn this into a wide variety of meals. 

A little tomato sauce, Italian seasoning, and cheese—you’ve got pizza. Choose hummus, cucumber, and red onion for a Mediterranean twist. You get the idea. Here are some of my optional add-in suggestions you can try:

  • Seasonings & Spices: Give your keto cottage cheese flatbread a bolder overall flavor by using garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, red pepper flakes, paprika or a seasoning blend like Italian seasoning. 
  • Fresh herbs: Chop up some fresh parsley or chives for a pop of color and taste. You can use fresh basil is you are using this flatbread as “pizza crust.”
  • Cheese: While this is already a high protein flatbread recipe, some additional cheese will up the overall grams of protein and add a rich flavor. Feel free to add two tablespoons of either grated Parmesan cheese or grated mozzarella. 
  • A Sweet version: While the viral recipe is served as a savory cottage cheese flatbread, I have also made a sweeter version by adding a pinch of cinnamon, a teaspoon of vanilla, and a touch of honey for a breakfast-style flatbread.

How to Make Cottage Cheese Flatbread?

It only takes a couple of simple steps to make this low carb cottage cheese flatbread. Here’s how:

  1. Prepare your baking sheet & oven: Preheat the oven to 350° degrees F. Next, line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½  by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Do not skip this step, as both of these elements make sure your high-protein flatbread will not stick to the pan. Without them, it would be hard to remove and keep them in one piece. Once ready, set it aside.
A collage of images showing how to make flatbread with cottage cheese and eggs.
  1. Blend your cottage cheese mixture: Place one cup of cottage cheese, two whole eggs, and a pinch of salt (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of your food processor. Pulse it 6-7 times in one-second intervals until it is fully incorporated but not pulverized; you do not want to liquify it. It is okay to have small pieces of cottage cheese remaining. If you do not have a food processor, you can use a hand mixer, a whisk or a blender.
  2. Spread your egg and cottage cheese flatbread: Pour the mixture onto the parchment-lined sheet pan and spread it into an even (ideally 8 by 11 inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon. An even thickness is essential for even cooking. 
  3. Bake it in the oven. Bake it in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown. Then remove it and let it cool for 5 minutes before carefully removing it from the pan. Serve it by itself, as a sandwich wrap, or as a pizza base, following the suggestions below.

How to Serve it?

This is the best cottage cheese flatbread recipe because—here’s the fun part—you get to use your creativity and choose how you want to serve it. Here are three options to get you started: 

Two ways to serve cottage cheese flatbread; as a wrap and as a pizza base.
  1. Enjoy it as is. It’s a delicious high-protein snack served plain.
  2. Make a Sandwich: Any of your favorite sandwich toppings will work here. I like to spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place three slices of provolone cheese, 2 slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite), some lettuce, and some sliced tomatoes. Gently roll the cottage cheese bread wrap around the ingredients, and then cut it in half before serving. You can also use a pre-made mix, such as chicken salad with mayo instead, which is popular on Instagram and TikTok.
  3. Make a Pizza: For a cottage cheese flatbread pizza recipe, here’s what to do: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and then spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce (or plain tomato sauce),  ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.

How to Store Cottage Cheese Flatbread

This cottage cheese flatbread recipe comes together so quickly that it’s easy to make fresh the day you plan to serve it. However, if you would like to make larger batches to meal prep, here’s how to store any extras you may have:

  • Storage: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. I recommend that you place parchment paper in between any stacks of flatbread that you have to prevent them from sticking together. 
  • Reheating: Leftover flatbread with cottage cheese can be enjoyed cold, at room temperature, or warm. If you wish to eat it warmed up, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5-7 minutes or until warmed all the way through. 

FAQs

How long to cook cottage cheese flatbread?

The overall cooking time really depends on the thickness of your cottage cheese mixture and what size pan you’re using. If you spread it out in an evenly thin layer about 8” by 11” in size as I did, it will take about 30-35 minutes to cook. If you decide to use a smaller pan and thus have a thicker layer of the mixture, your cooking time will need to be longer.

How long does it last?

If stored in an airtight container in the fridge, your flat bread with cottage cheese will last for up to 3 days. 

How many calories in cottage cheese flatbread?

One serving of this egg and cottage cheese flatbread recipe is 166 calories, with 17 grams of protein, 9 grams of fat, and 4 grams of carbohydrates. 

Can you freeze it?

Technically, yes, you can freeze it, though I prefer to serve it the same day it’s made. For the meal preppers making large batches who wish to freeze them, my main tip is to place parchment paper in between the layers of flatbread, then wrap them all in stretch film/plastic wrap to keep out moisture.

Expert Tips

While this is a very uncomplicated recipe, here are a few notes to help ensure your cottage cheese flatbread comes out as beautifully as it did in my test kitchen: 

  • Let it cool for a few minutes after it comes out of the oven. This will allow your flatbread to set and be easier to handle. Otherwise, it may stick to the paper and potentially tear when peeling it off.
  • Thickness and time of cooking time matters. If you follow this recipe’s instructions, you’ll be spreading your mixture out into roughly an 8”x11” rectangle on your quarter sheet pan. If you end up using a smaller pan, your flatbread will be thicker and require a longer baking time. 
  • Texture matters. When mixing your eggs and cottage cheese together, resist the urge to overmix them. You want the mixture to maintain a little thickness, which means some small chunks of cottage cheese are okay. You don’t want to completely puree and liquify the mixture in your Vitamix or blender. Just a few pulses of the blender, food processor, or immersion blender will suffice. 
  • How to make air fryer cottage cheese flatbread: If you’re not looking for perfection, feel free to make this recipe in your air fryer. Due to the smaller space inside the air fryer, you will want to make half a batch of this recipe at a time, so ½ cup of cottage cheese with only one whole egg. Cook it at 350 degrees F for 10 minutes. At that point, check on your flatbread, and if it isn’t cooked enough, give it another 15 minutes. When you take it out, allow it to cool before handling it and serve.
  • If you’re using egg whites, take note. Egg whites will result in a lighter flatbread. Both the color/appearance will be lighter than you see in the main recipe pictures (though the air fryer photos show an egg white version), and the flavor itself will be less robust. 
  • Be careful about adding salt. Many brands of cottage cheese are salty enough on their own and don’t require any additional salt. Taste your cottage cheese before you add any extra salt. In my recipe testing, both Good Culture and Trader Joe’s cottage cheese didn’t need any added sodium.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this flatbread with cottage cheese recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Cottage cheese flatbread topped off with deli meat, tomatoes and microgreens.
Print

Cottage Cheese Flatbread Recipe

If you’re looking for a simple, high-protein, and gluten-free flatbread alternative, this 2 ingredient Cottage Cheese Flatbread recipe is for you! Made with just two main ingredients—cottage cheese and eggs—this viral recipe is low-carb, keto-friendly, and packed with 17 grams of protein per serving. While it’s not a traditional bread, it is a great alternative as a satisfying base for wraps, sandwiches, and even pizza.
Course Breakfast, Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 166kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup whole milk cottage cheese 4%
  • 2 large eggs
  • Pinch of Salt* optional
  • cooking spray

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350°F and line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½ by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Set aside.
  • Place one cup of cottage cheese and two whole eggs (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of the food processor.
    The batter in a food processor before and after it is mixed.
  • Pulse 6-7 times in one-second intervals until thoroughly incorporated but not pulverized. We do not want it to be fully liquid; it is okay to have small chunks of cottage cheese.
  • Pour the mixture onto the prepared baking sheet and spread it in an even (ideally an 8-inch by 11-inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon.
    The batter spread on a sheet pan before and after it is baked.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes and carefully remove it from the pan.
  • To serve you have three options. You can:
    1. Enjoy it as is.
    2. Make a sandwich: Spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place any of your favorite sandwich toppings. I like to start with three slices of provolone cheese and then layer it with two slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite) and some lettuce and sliced tomatoes. Gently roll and then cut it in half before serving.
    3. Make a Pizza: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce, ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.
    A collage of images showing how to use cottage cheese flatbread as a sandwich wrap and pizza base.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one flatbread that is about 8 by 11 inches, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional facts below include the 2 ingredients listed in the recipe. They do not include the optional wrap or pizza ingredients.
  • Adding salt: Be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding salt in the mixture. Most cottage cheese is already salty. 
  • Storing leftovers: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. If you make a few batches, I recommend placing a sheet of parchment paper between stacks of your flatbread to prevent them from sticking together. 
  • Reheating: You can serve this flatbread warm or cold. If you prefer to serve it warm, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5 minutes or until warmed all through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 166kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 182mg | Sodium: 393mg | Potassium: 170mg | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 385IU | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/feed/ 4
Asparagus Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/#comments Tue, 04 Mar 2025 23:34:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36068 For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally…]]>

For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally arrived. After months of cold and hearty winter meals, those vibrant green spears feel like a promise of warmer days ahead.

And with asparagus in season, I’m always looking for new ways to enjoy it. This simple asparagus salad is one of my go-to recipes—it’s fresh, easy to make, and perfect for meal prep. And if you’re looking for more salad recipes with asparagus, my Butter Lettuce Salad is another great option to try.

Asparagus Salad with Feta, Tomatoes and fresh basil in a large salad bowl from the top view.

Key Ingredients and Substitutions:

This simple asparagus salad is packed with everyday ingredients that come together to create a refreshing and satisfying dish. The good news, you ask? You can easily customize it to your taste or use what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need, along with ingredient substitutions, so you can make it your own with what you have on hand.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out
  • Fresh asparagus: During asparagus season, you’ll often find different varieties at the store—thin or thick, and sometimes even in shades of green, purple, or white, depending on where you live. Any of these will work beautifully in this recipe! Just be sure to trim off the tough woody ends for the best texture. And if you’re not using them the same day you buy them, don’t worry—I’ve written a whole guide on how to store asparagus to keep it fresh for longer.
  • Tomatoes: I opted for cherry tomatoes that I sliced in half but you can use any tomatoes you have on hand. Just slice them in bite sized pieces.
  • Radishes: I love adding thinly sliced radishes for a pop of color and crunch.
  • Olives: Use any olive you have on hand. Kalamata olives, Castelvestrano olives, or green olives would all work. Not a fan of olives? Omit them. It will still be delicious.
  • Onions: I prefer the mild flavor of scallions but a thinly sliced red onion would also work.
  • Cheese: Adding cheese is optional. I opted for feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, but parmesan cheese, goat cheese, and shredded mozzarella would also work. And if you need a dairy-free salad, omit cheese altogether.
  • Fresh herbs: The combination of fresh basil and asparagus is terrific, but fresh mint, dill, and parsley would also work beautifully in this fresh asparagus salad recipe.
  • The dressing: My go-to asparagus salad dressing is my homemade lemon vinaigrette. However, you can also use my avocado salad dressing, lemon balsamic vinaigrette in this asparagus salad recipe. Or you can also try my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette for more of a sweet and tangy salad.

Optional Add-ins:

What I love most about this spring asparagus salad is that you can keep it simple or jazz it up with these optional add-ins to make it your own. Here are a few ideas:

  • Add nuts: You can easily add in some crunch and extra protein by adding a handful of pecans, walnuts, or pine nuts.
  • Spring mix or Butter Lettuce: If you’d like to turn this into more of a green asparagus salad, toss in a handful of spring mix or butter lettuce leaves for extra freshness and texture.
  • Peas: A handful of blanched peas make a great addition to this salad. They add a subtle sweetness and a pop of color, making the dish even more vibrant and seasonal.

How To Cook Asparagus for A Salad?

Asparagus is one of those wonderfully versatile vegetables that can be enjoyed in so many ways, no matter the season.

However, if you’re making this salad during peak asparagus season and have access to freshly picked spears, you can even serve them raw following this recipe.

Raw asparagus salad offers a satisfying, crisp, and refreshing bite that is truly a treat.

However, I also encourage you to try other methods of cooking asparagus for this salad recipe. Whether you prefer oven baked asparagus, air fryer asparagus, steamed asparagus, or pan sautéed asparagus, this vibrant spring vegetable always makes for a quick and delicious addition to any salad recipe, and this one is no exception.

How To Make Asparagus Salad?

There’s something so satisfying about creating a beautiful salad with fresh, seasonal ingredients. And this asparagus salad is just that—a simple yet flavorful dish that highlights the best of spring. Here are the easy steps to follow:

Person cooking asparagus for salad in a baking sheet
  1. Cook the asparagus: As mentioned earlier, if you’re making this salad during the asparagus season, you can serve it raw for a crisp, fresh bite. However, I personally love roasting it—drizzling the spears with olive oil, seasoning with salt and pepper, and letting the heat bring out their natural sweetness. The slightly smoky, caramelized flavors are just so delicious and addictive.
    Alternatively, you can blanch the asparagus for a few seconds to keep it tender-crisp while maintaining its vibrant green color. The instructions below are for medium size asparagus. For thick asparagus, I recommend increasing the cooking time by 1-2 minutes.
Person making lemon vinaigrette from the top view
  1. Make the lemon vinaigrette: I make a batch of this dressing during the weekend and keep it in a jar in the fridge. To make it, whisk together extra-virgin olive oil, fresh lemon juice, garlic, dijon mustard, salt, and pepper in a small mixing bowl until emulsified.
Cold asparagus salad with all ingredients placed in a salad bowl top view
  1. Assemble the salad: Once you have your asparagus ready, all you have to do is to chop the rest of the ingredients. Then, go ahead and place chopped asparagus, cherry tomatoes, sliced radishes, chopped green onion, and kalamata olives in a large bowl and drizzle it with the lemon vinaigrette. Grab two large spoons or tongs and give it a gentle toss, making sure that all the veggies are coated with the dressing.
  2. Garnish and Serve: If preferred, top your asparagus salad with feta cheese and a handful of freshly torn basil leaves. Serve immediately or cover with stretch film and refrigerate.
Cold asparagus salad recipe placed in a bowl with lemon dressing on the side

How To Store Leftovers & Make Ahead Instructions

One of the great things about using asparagus in salad is that it holds up well, even after a day or two in the fridge. Whether you’re making it ahead for meal prep or saving leftovers, here’s how to keep it fresh and delicious.

  • To Store Leftovers: The best part about this spring asparagus salad is that it holds up well. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • To make it ahead of time: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end, right before serving.

Serving Suggestions:

While this asparagus salad with lemon vinaigrette is perfect when served by itself, you can turn it into a whole meal with other recipes like:

Expert Tips

  • Trim the woody ends: Asparagus spears have tough, fibrous ends that aren’t pleasant to eat. Be sure to snap or trim them off using a sharp knife before cooking.
  • Skip the frozen asparagus: While you can use thawed asparagus, it won’t have the same crisp, fresh bite that makes this salad so delicious. Fresh asparagus is best for both texture and flavor.
  • Serve it warm or cold – This salad is delicious both ways! Serve it warm right after roasting the asparagus for a cozy side dish, or let it chill in the fridge for a refreshing, make-ahead option.
  • Use good quality ingredients: Since this salad is made with just a few simple ingredients, each one really shines. Opt for fresh, in-season asparagus, juicy cherry tomatoes, and good-quality olive oil for the best flavor.

You Might Also Like:

If fresh veggie-packed salads are your jam, here are a few more you might like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Asparagus Salad recipe, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Asparagus salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Asparagus Salad Recipe

A simple Asparagus Salad drizzled with homemade lemon vinaigrette and topped with feta, tomatoes, and olives. Light, crunchy, and perfect as a side dish, light lunch, or meal prep option. Gluten-free and vegetarian.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 17 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 229kcal

Ingredients

To roast the asparagus:

  • 1 bunch asparagus spears rinsed and the woody ends cut
  • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the lemon vinaigrette:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For the salad:

  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • ½ cup radishes thinly sliced
  • 3 scallions stalks – chopped
  • ½ cup kalamata olives optional
  • ½ cup feta cheese cut into cubes or crumbled or grated parmesan cheese (optional)
  • ½ cup basil leaves loosely packed and torn (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Place asparagus on a sheet pan in one layer. Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Give it a toss, making sure that all the spears are coated with the oil and seasoning.
  • Roast for 12 minutes or until the asparagus is cooked*. Transfer onto a plate and let asparagus cool. When cooled, cut the asparagus into 2-inch pieces. Place into a salad bowl.
  • While the asparagus is roasting make the lemon vinaigrette by mixing together 1/4 cup olive oil, 3 tablespoons of lemon juice, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1/2 teaspoon of dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper.
  • To assemble the asparagus salad: Place tomatoes, radishes, scallions, olive into the bowl with the asparagus. Drizzle with the dressing.
  • Stir in the feta cheese (if using) and basil leaves. Give it a gentle toss. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups (loosely packed) salads that serves four adults as a side dish. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Raw asparagus: During the spring, when asparagus is in season, you can use raw asparagus to make this salad, especially if you can get your hands on freshly picked asparagus. Some people like to shave it (using a vegetable peeler), which will work, but I also like to cut it into bite-size pieces for a fresh and crispy spring salad.
  • Blanched Asparagus: Alternatively, you can blanch asparagus to make this recipe. To do so, bring a pot of salted water to a boil. Add the asparagus spears and cook them for 4-5 minutes or until fork tender. Meanwhile, prepare the ice bath by placing some ice cubes and cold tap water in a bowl. Remove the asparagus using a slotted spoon and place it in the bowl of ice water (to stop the cooking process). Drain and cut it into smaller pieces.
  • How To Store Leftovers? The best part about this spring asparagus salad that it holds up well. Store it in an airing container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Instructions to Make It Ahead: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end right before serving.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1363mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 606IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/feed/ 13
Turkish Eggs Recipe (Cilbir) https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/#comments Thu, 06 Feb 2025 14:24:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80042 Growing up in Turkey, çilbir aka Turkish poached eggs, was a breakfast staple. As you have seen in so many…]]>

Growing up in Turkey, çilbir aka Turkish poached eggs, was a breakfast staple. As you have seen in so many of our Turkish cuisine recipes, our culture is big on using strained yogurt (commonly referred to as Greek yogurt) as a complement to our savory dishes. Thus, for me as a Turkish child, Greek yogurt and eggs for breakfast were frequent delights—and ones I still crave regularly as an adult in the US.

Turkish eggs placed on a plate with yogurt and spicy butter sauce and garnished with herbs.

What Are Turkish Eggs (Cilbir)?

Cilbir eggs (pronounced “chull-burr”) are essentially eggs and yogurt for breakfast. To make this Turkish eggs recipe, you prepare a garlic yogurt sauce and a chili butter sauce for your plate’s base, then you poach your eggs to place on top, and use crusty bread as your serving spoon to swirl the velvety combo together.

The tang of the yogurt and the zing of the chili sauce give the Turkish-style eggs a surprising pop that will leave you licking the plate. The best part is that while it looks like something you’d be served at a top-tier brunch restaurant, it comes together quickly and without fuss in your own kitchen.

Ingredients and Substitutions

A short list of ingredients and four simple components make this Turkish breakfast recipe something that is 100% achievable on both weekday and weekend mornings in under 25 minutes. Here’s what you’ll need to prepare this Turkish yogurt and eggs recipe:

The ingredients for cilbir from the top view.
  • For the Garlic Yogurt Sauce:
    • Plain Greek yogurt: Since this is a savory dish, it is important to select plain, unsweetened yogurt. Strained, as known as Greek yogurt, works best, but if all you have is regular yogurt, you can use that as well. If you have the time, you can place it over a cheesecloth-lined strainer and let it drip for a few hours to have a similar, thick consistency to Greek yogurt.
    • Fresh garlic clove: We only use 1 clove in our Turkish çılbır recipe, but you’re welcome to add more if you want a more intense garlic flavor. 
    • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed from 1 lemon works best—just be sure to avoid dropping in any seeds. 
    • Kosher salt and black pepper
  • For the Poached Eggs:
    • Distilled white vinegar: We use a small amount in this Turkish egg dish as a tool to help our eggs coagulate more quickly during the poaching process. Not to worry—you won’t notice much of a vinegar flavor in the final dish. While distilled white vinegar is the traditional ingredient here, you’re also welcome to substitute in apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar for the same effect. 
    • Eggs: We used large eggs, but extra large eggs would also work just fine.
  • For the Spicy Butter Sauce:
    • Unsalted butter: If you’d prefer to use salted butter instead, please be sure to adjust the additional salt to taste. We think this yogurt eggs recipe is best made with butter, but if you’d rather use oil, you may swap in olive oil or a combination of the two. 
    • Turkish red pepper flakes: We recommend that you use Urfa chili pepper or Aleppo pepper, which is also known as “pul biber.” If you can’t get your hands on it, you can use any chili flakes you have in your spice drawer. Also, if you are serving Turkish eggs and yogurt to children or those who cannot handle spicy foods, you can use paprika only. 
    • Sweet paprika: We prefer sweet paprika but smoked paprika can also be used.
    • Kosher salt
  • For Serving:
    • Fresh herbs: Depending on your palate, you can finish this dish off with a sprinkling of either fresh dill, parsley, or mint. Sumac is also an excellent Turkish seasoning to garnish this dish. 
    • Crusty bread: Your bread is used as a vehicle for scooping up the ultra-creamy Turkish eggs with yogurt. It is usually served with crusty bread such as our  No Knead Olive Bread, No Knead Artisan Bread, or if you want to do it as we do it in Turkiye, you can serve it with Simit or Pita Bread to scoop up the smooth, savory fusion of eggs and yogurt. Once you try it, you will know why it is one of the most popular Turkish egg recipes!

How to Make Turkish Eggs?

Yogurt and eggs for breakfast come together in a few simple steps. If you follow these step by step instructions, you’ll end up with a delectable way to start your day, Mediterranean-style.

Steps showing how to make Turkish eggs in a collage of photos.
  1. Yogurt with eggs starts with the yogurt sauce! In this first step, you’ll whisk together the yogurt, fresh garlic, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a bowl. Then, simply cover it and set it aside so it can come to room temperature while you prepare your eggs. 
  2. Poaching the eggs is next, but don’t be intimidated—it’s easier than you think. Fill a medium saucepan with water that’s at least 4 inches deep and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it come to a simmer. This is when you stir in the vinegar, which is crucial for perfectly poached eggs.
  3. Draining the raw eggs first is important. While you are waiting for the water to come to a boil, place a fine-mesh strainer over a small bowl and crack an egg into it. Be very gentle at this step—you want to keep your yolk fully intact. Allow the excess watery egg whites to drop through the strainer, then transfer it into a ramekin. Repeat the same process for the rest of the eggs.
  4. Place a sheet of paper towel on a large plate and set it aside. (You’re going to use this to dry off your cooked eggs!)
  5. When you’re ready to poach your eggs, we recommend that you cook no more than two at a time, otherwise it can get overwhelming. First, stir the simmering water to create a vortex in the middle, carefully drop the egg in the middle, and then cook for 3 to 3 ½ minutes until the whites are firm and the yolk is set but still soft and runny. 
  6. Dry the cooked eggs as they come out of the water. Carefully remove the egg using a slotted spoon (draining the excess water) and then transfer it to the paper-towel-lined plate. Repeat the same process with the rest of the eggs, cooking each set two at a time.
  7. Immediately before serving, melt the butter in a small pan or skillet. This step comes together quickly, so we find it easiest to work with butter cut into smaller pieces. Next, add the Urfa chili pepper (or any red pepper flakes) and salt to your melted butter. Allow the combo to cook for 15-20 seconds, or until the butter starts to foam and sizzle. Do not let it brown!
  8. Plate your eggs with yogurt. Using the back of a large spoon, spread half of the yogurt sauce on a plate. Then, add two poached eggs on top of the yogurt sauce. Finally, drizzle it all with the sizzling chili butter sauce.
  9. Garnish your dish. Using the fresh herbs of your choice—parsley, dill, or mint—sprinkle them over the top along with a pinch of salt and pepper, to taste. Here is where you could also use sumac, if you’re interested. Repeat the same process for the second serving in its own dish. Serve immediately while still warm.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The truth is, this is a dish that is meant to be made and enjoyed at the moment. Turkish eggs breakfast is simple though, so there’s not too much prep that needs to be done ahead of time—it’s already a streamlined recipe.

  • To Make Ahead: If you’d like, the component that you can make in advance is the garlic yogurt sauce. Simply mix it together and place it in the fridge. We recommend you allow it to come to room temperature before serving. 
  • To Store: Unfortunately, there’s really no good way to store poached eggs and yogurt that’s already been warmed, so eat up! 
Turkish eggs with greek yogurt on a plate served with toast on the side.

Expert Tips

If you’re looking for Turkish egg breakfast perfection, it’s definitely within reach if you take note of this insider advice:

  • Start with room-temperature eggs eggs. It is best to take your eggs out of the fridge 15-20 minutes before you are ready to poach them, as cold eggs straight from the fridge can lower the water temperature too much, which can lead to uneven cooking and a looser white.
  • Get yourself some fresh eggs for the best results. In his article on poaching eggs, my favorite food scientist/teacher, Kenji Lopez-Alt, says, “Fresh eggs have tighter whites and yolks that help them retain their shape better as they cook.” So, using fresh eggs, you will end up with perfectly poached eggs without those whispy white floaters.
  • Do not skip straining your raw eggs. Straining the egg before poaching helps remove the thin, watery part of the egg white, which is what tends to create those wispy strands in the water. By removing this excess liquid, you’re left with a firmer white that wraps neatly around the yolk, resulting in a more compact, poached egg.
  • Only poach two eggs at a time. The poaching process moves more quickly than you think, so sticking to two eggs at a time prevents you from getting overwhelmed and damaging the eggs due to rushing and overcrowding in the pan. 
  • Bring your yogurt to room temperature before plating. You do not want your hot eggs and hot chili butter sauce interacting with cold yogurt. That is why we recommend making the garlic yogurt sauce first so that it can come to room temperature while you are poaching the eggs.
  • Watch your butter—it burns easily. Your chili butter sauce is the final step because it is practically done instantaneously. Do not step away or leave it in the pan too long, as it will brown and burn, thus becoming unappetizing. 
  • Check your eggs for doneness. While this is more of a personal preference, runny yolks are one of the characteristics of this egg yogurt recipe. You will want to watch your eggs and remove them when they have reached the level of runniness you desire in your yolks. While it’s not traditional, soft fried eggs are acceptable if you don’t enjoy poached eggs. 
  • Presentation matters. This is an Instagram-worthy recipe. To achieve a finished dish like the one in our photos, be sure to plate as instructed by swirling the yogurt on the plate, then placing the eggs on top, then drizzling your chili butter sauce. The fresh herb topping gives a green flash of color that you won’t want to skip. 
  • Serve immediately. This is not the type of dish that you want to leave sitting around. Poached eggs are meant to be served right away, particularly here since you’ve just topped them with hot chili butter sauce.

FAQs

Where did Turkish eggs come from?

Turkish eggs originated during the Ottoman Empire, first appearing as a recipe in a book in 1876. While there have been a few variations on the dish over the centuries (cinnamon, onions, and tomato have made appearances), this Turkish eggs with Greek yogurt recipe has mostly stood the test of time as it is outlined here.

How do you pronounce çılbır?

The cilbir pronunciation isn’t as tricky as it looks. The ç character is pronounced like the English letter combination of “ch”. Then, the full word sounds like, chull-burr.

If you make your own Turkish Eggs Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Turkish Recipes You Might Like

Turkish eggs recipe on a plate with bread on the side from the top view.
Print

Turkish Eggs Recipe (Cilbir)

Turkish eggs are a visually stunning dish that brings the bold flavors of the Mediterranean to your breakfast table. A low-carb, high-protein recipe, it is made by placing poached eggs on a bed of creamy, garlicky yogurt and drizzling it with a rich, spiced butter sauce. Served with crusty bread for scooping, every bite offers a perfect balance of textures and flavors—making it a standout in any Turkish breakfast spread.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 346kcal

Ingredients

For the Garlic Yogurt Sauce:

  • 1 cup unsweetened plain Greek yogurt room temperature
  • 1 clove fresh garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Poached Eggs:

  • 1 tablespoon white vinegar
  • 4 large eggs

For the Chili Butter Sauce:

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter* cut into pieces
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper any red pepper flakes you have on hand
  • ½ teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving:

  • 1 tablespoon of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and/or mint
  • Sliced bread or toast

Instructions

  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together the yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a bowl, cover it, and set it aside. I intentionally do this first so that it can come to room temperature while I poach the eggs.
  • To poach the eggs, fill a medium saucepan with water (it should be at least 4 inches deep) and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it come to a simmer. Stir in the vinegar.
  • While you are waiting for the water to come to a boil, place a fine mesh strainer over a small bowl and crack an egg while being super gentle to make sure not to disturb the yolk. Let the excess loose (watery) egg whites drop through and then transfer it into a ramekin. Repeat the same process for the rest of the eggs.
  • Place a sheet of paper towel on a large plate and set it aside.
  • When ready to poach the eggs, stir the simmering water to create a vortex in the middle, carefully drop the egg in the middle, and cook for 3 to 3 ½ minutes until the whites are firm and the yolk is set but still soft and runny.
  • Carefully remove the egg using a slotted spoon and then transfer it to the paper-towel lined plate. Repeat the same process with the rest of the eggs*.
  • Right before serving, melt the butter in a small skillet. Add the Urfa chili pepper (or any red pepper flakes) and salt. Let it cook, stirring gently with a wooden spoon, for 15-20 seconds until the butter starts to foam and sizzle and the color turns to a hazelnutty brown.
  • To assemble: Using the back of a large spoon, spread half of the yogurt sauce on a plate. Add two poached eggs on top and drizzle them with the sizzling chili butter sauce.
  • Garnish with fresh parsley or chopped dill; sprinkle it with a pinch of salt and pepper to taste. Repeat the same process for the second serving. Serve immediately while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 2 people with each portion serving two eggs. The nutritional values below do not include the optional serving of bread/toast.
  • Butter: You can use salted butter, but if you do, omit the additional salt.
  • Cooking eggs: We recommend poaching no more than two eggs at a time for the best results.
  • Eggs: While this Turkish egg recipe is traditionally made with poached eggs, you can serve it with fried eggs or soft-boiled eggs as well. 
  • Make Ahead & Storage: You can make the garlic yogurt sauce a day in advance and store in an airtight container in the fridge. While technically you can store the leftovers in an airtight container, we highly recommend consuming this dish as soon as possible while it is still warm and fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 346kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 378mg | Sodium: 1053mg | Potassium: 311mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1548IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/feed/ 2
Broccoli Feta Soup https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/#comments Wed, 08 Jan 2025 15:02:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11028 This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli and Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.]]>

Nothing says fall and winter more than soup season. And this hearty and creamy broccoli feta soup recipe is surely a winner. So, make a big batch, enjoy leftovers throughout the week, or freeze them for more extended storage.

And if you enjoy this dish, be sure to check out our Sweet Potato Soup, Turkish Lentil Soup, French Lentil Soup, Pumpkin Ginger Soup, and Carrot Ginger Soup recipes.

Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with croutons.

Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredient list for this healthy broccoli soup consists of olive oil, onions, celery, garlic cloves, Kosher salt, cracked pepper, large Yukon gold potato, vegetable broth, broccoli crowns, fresh parsley, and feta cheese.

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Chicken Stock: Swap out vegetable broth for Homemade Chicken Broth if you are okay with it not being a vegetarian soup.
  • Fresh Herbs: Compliment the broccoli and feta with a small handful of fresh mint or fresh dill instead of parsley.
  • Make it more green and nutritious by adding a cup of baby spinach in the last 10 minutes before pureeing the soup.
  • Cheese: Top it with your favorite cheese, like mozzarella, cheddar, or freshly grated Parmesan cheese.
  • Seasoning: Finish with a sprinkle of red pepper flakes, sumac, a squeeze of lemon juice, or a drizzle of olive oil or heavy cream.
  • Vegan: Omit the feta cheese or swap it out for vegan feta.

How to Make This Broccoli and Feta Soup?

Broccoli feta cheese soup comes together in less than 30 minutes after a quick and gentle simmer on the stove. Puree right in the same pot, or use a countertop blender to blend in batches. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make cream of broccoli soup.
  1. Saute aromatics: Warm olive oil over medium heat in a Dutch oven or large pot. Add onion and celery, and cook until translucent, about 5-7 minutes. Stir in the cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  2. Add potatoes: Add potatoes and salt and pepper. Pour in vegetable stock. 
  3. Simmer: Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer and allow it to cook for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  4. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly for 8-10 minutes over medium heat.
Person pureeing and mixing soup in a collage of two images.
  1. Puree: Add the parsley. Then, using an immersion blender, puree the soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender.
  2. Garnish and serve: When ready to serve, ladle into bowls, and garnish with feta crumbles and more parsley.

What To Serve it With?

While you can enjoy this cream of broccoli soup all on its own, there are a few ways to jazz it up. You can try:

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw and Reheat?

What I love the most about this vegetable soup with feta is the fact that it stores well, so you can enjoy the leftovers in the following days. Here is how I store it:

  • Storage: You can store leftovers of this broccoli soup with feta in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan to freeze this soup, I recommend not adding the feta to the soup, as dairy doesn’t freeze well.  Follow the recipe as written, cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broccoli soup overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles.
Bowls of healthy broccoli soup garnished with parsley and croutons from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Use an immersion blender. This way, you can puree this feta cheese soup in the same pot with no extra dishes. This Kitchen Aid stick blender (affiliate link)  is the one I own and recommend.
  • If you do not own an immersion blender, you can blend the soup in a blender or food processor. However, whichever gadget you use, fill it about halfway full and be extra careful when blending hot liquids.
  • Puree to desired consistency. Keep a few chunks of broccoli intact or puree until silky smooth.
  • Mash with a potato masher. Rather than blending, mash the soup with a potato masher to keep it chunky.

FAQs

Can broccoli cheese soup be frozen?

Yes, this soup freezes well. Omit the feta cheese before freezing, and top with the cheese once thawed, reheated, and ready to serve.

Can you put feta in soup?

Yes, you can, but putting it at the end is recommended.

Other Broccoli Recipes You Might Like:

This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Emilie Raffa’s The Clever Cookbook.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Broccoli and Feta Soup recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with feta and parsley.
Print

Broccoli Feta Soup Recipe

This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.
Course Soup
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 cups
Calories 135kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 large Yukon Gold Potato peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 4 cups low-sodium vegetable stock plus more as needed
  • 6 cups broccoli florets rinsed and drained
  • 1/3 cup Italian parsley rinsed and chopped coarsely – plus more as garnish
  • 1/3 cup feta cheese crumbled – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven (or any large, heavy bottom pot would work). Add in the onion and celery. Cook until they are soft, 5-7 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Stir in the potatoes, salt, and black pepper. Pour in the vegetable stock. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly, 8-10 minutes, over medium heat.
  • Right before you are ready to puree the soup, add in the chopped parsley.
  • Using a hand blender, puree soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender. I prefer my soup rustic-style with chunks of broccoli, but if you prefer it to have a smooth texture, then puree it until it has a silky texture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning* if necessary.
  • When ready to serve, ladle some into bowls and garnish with feta crumbles and parsley leaves.

Video

Notes

  • *While we want the soup to be properly seasoned, be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more.
  • It is optional, but you can finish it with a drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac if you have it.
  • Storage of leftovers: Bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Follow the recipe as written (except omit using crumbled feta in the end), cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles and garnish with fresh parsley right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 135kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 949mg | Potassium: 458mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1217IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/feed/ 20
Baked Goat Cheese Balls https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/#comments Sun, 29 Dec 2024 17:08:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15644 Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on…]]>

Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside? I think not. I also think that goat cheese makes some of the most flavorful dishes, so make sure to try any of our Goat Cheese Recipes if you are a fan as well. 

On a side note, if you’ve ever been to Lisa Vanderpump’s restaurant, Sur, then you know all about their famous fried goat cheese balls. I know people who visit the restaurant just to order them! The good news? With our recipe, you can now recreate a baked version of the goat cheese balls at Sur right at home. They’re just as delicious but a bit lighter and perfect for any occasion.

Baked Goat Cheese Balls served on a plate by a person.

Ingredients

This baked goat cheese ball recipe is made with just a handful of simple ingredients readily available in any grocery store. We will need:

  • Fresh herbs: I love the savory mix of fresh thyme and parsley. Other herbs that would be delicious include fresh rosemary or basil.
  • Panko bread crumbs: We love the extra crisp bite of plain panko breadcrumbs, but this is your chance to have fun with the coating. While it’s not traditional, you can use Italian-seasoned breadcrumbs, Melba toast crumbs, or even swap out half the breadcrumbs for crushed pecans or walnuts. For a gluten-free option, try almond flour crackers. Simply use your food processor to break them down into fine crumbs, making it easy to coat your goat cheese balls to perfection.
  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a nice savory bite to the breadcrumb mixture. Toss in some lemon zest for a bright citrus flavor.
  • Egg: One large egg is needed to coat the goat cheese before dipping it into the breadcrumbs.
  • Dijon mustard: A hint of Dijon mustard adds a unique flavor to the egg mixture.
  • Seasonings: All you need is a sprinkle of Kosher salt and black pepper for each layer of the dipping station.
  • Goat cheese: We recommend buying a whole goat cheese log instead of goat cheese crumbles. You can buy them in 4 oz portions or a large 12 oz log.

How to Make Goat Cheese Balls?

Goat cheese bites are a quick and easy recipe that requires a quick setup of your breading station and a chill in the freezer. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Prep baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet (small enough to fit in your freezer) with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare dipping station: In a small shallow bowl, mix the fresh thyme and parsley. In another small bowl, whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and pepper. Third, toss the panko breadcrumbs and garlic powder in another small bowl.
  3. Cut goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife, we prefer unscented dental floss to cut the goat cheese into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut yourself a long (about 20 inches long) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  4. Coat goat cheese balls: Start by dipping each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture. Then, roll them in the egg mixture and allow the excess liquid to drip off. Then, gently press them into the panko mixture to ensure they are fully coated.
  5. Freeze goat cheese balls: Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Freeze for 30 minutes.
  6. Bake: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Bake the goat cheese balls for 8-10 minutes, or until golden brown.
  7. Serve: Cool slightly, drizzle with honey, and serve warm.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Talk about a goat cheese appetizer that’s a true make-ahead marvel. The best part? You can prepare these ahead of time, freeze them, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and absolutely impressive.

  • Make Ahead and freezing instructions: Follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a ziplock freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.
  • Storage: While these goat cheese bites are best served the day they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the balls of goat cheese in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5 minutes.

Expert Tips

Here are some of my helpful tips for the best baked goat cheese balls recipe:

  • Cutting the goat cheese: The goat cheese is easiest to cut when it is cold. The best method is with unflavored dental floss. However, you can use a sharp knife, but make sure to wipe the knife clean with a paper towel after each slice.
  • Set your dipping station up before starting: It’s best to prep your ingredients before starting since the process happens quickly.
  • Dredge quickly: Go through the breading station quickly and thoroughly, then pop them right into the freezer.
  • Ensure they are cold before placing them in the oven: Even though it sounds like an extra step to freeze them before baking, it helps to make the outside crispy while the inside stays soft and creamy.
  • Fried goat cheese balls: While we love the baked version, you can certainly fry goat cheese balls for a crisp, golden treat. Heat 1–2 inches of vegetable oil in a shallow skillet over medium heat until it shimmers. Fry the goat cheese balls in batches (preferably two) for 1–2 minutes, turning frequently to ensure they cook evenly and achieve a beautiful golden-brown crust on all sides.
  • Double the recipe: This recipe makes 12 individual balls—double or triple the recipe, depending on the number of people you serve. Or, make them mini by cutting the goat cheese rounds in half and reducing the baking time to 5-6 minutes.
  • Bake them right before serving: If you’re serving these goat cheese balls as an appetizer, we highly recommend serving them warm for the best experience. We like to pop them in the oven just before our guests arrive so they’re greeted with the irresistible aroma of golden, creamy goat cheese oozing with tangy, melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

Serving Suggestions

When it comes to serving baked goat cheese balls, the possibilities are as delightful as the dish itself! Whether you are planning an elegant appetizer, a show-stopping salad, or just looking to add a little magic to your meal, these versatile bites have you covered. 

Goat cheese appetizer balls served as a holiday cheese spread.
  • Appetizer: Serve them with a drizzle of honey or extra virgin olive oil. Or, add them to your Meat and Cheese Platter for a little pizzazz.
  • Salad: Enjoy a French classic and turn it into a Baked Goat Cheese Salad. This also does double duty as a delicious holiday appetizer salad or elegant weeknight dinner at home.
  • Croutons: Turn them into cheesy croutons to top off a warm, comforting bowl of soup, like creamy Butternut Squash Soup or velvety Zucchini Soup.
  • Pasta & grain bowls: Crumble them over pasta or add them to your favorite grain bowls for a tangy goat cheese twist that adds creamy texture and bold flavor.

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Baked goat cheese balls served on a plate by a person.
Print

Baked Goat Cheese Balls Recipe

These Baked Goat Cheese balls are coated with herbs, dipped in an egg-mustard mixture, and then rolled in breadcrumbs. You can prep these ahead of time and freeze them until you are ready to serve. They make the perfect appetizer for any cheese board setup and usually disappear a few minutes after they come out of the oven.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Cooling time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 Goat Cheese Balls
Calories 122kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
  • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 12-ounce log goat cheese
  • 2 tablespoons honey for drizzling (optional)

Instructions

  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh thyme and parsley in a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
  • Cut the goat cheese into 12 pieces. You can slice them using (unscented) dental floss (see notes for more*) or a knife. Roll each piece into a small ball.
  • Dip each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), then press the panko mixture gently to ensure it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
  • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until golden brown on top.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, drizzle it with honey, if preferred, and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 baked goat cheese balls, ideal for 6 servings (2 per person). The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Slicing the goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife to slice the cheese, we find it easier to use an unscented dental floss to cut it into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut a long (about 20 inches) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  • Make Ahead and freezing: The best part of this recipe is that you can prepare these ahead of time, freeze, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and impressive. To freeze, follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a freezer bag (or a freezer safe airtight container), label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.

Nutrition

Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/feed/ 2
Easy Cranberry Apple Cake https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/#comments Sat, 21 Dec 2024 15:27:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1865 Bright red cranberries and tart apples capture the essence of cozy, cold-weather cooking, bringing a festive warmth to your table.…]]>

Bright red cranberries and tart apples capture the essence of cozy, cold-weather cooking, bringing a festive warmth to your table. This apple cranberry cake is the perfect centerpiece for a holiday gathering, whether celebrating with family or hosting friends. 

And if you find yourself with extra cranberries, don’t let them go to waste—transform them into a stunning Cranberry Almond Tart or a versatile Cranberry Maple Sauce to complement your holiday spread.

Cranberry and apple cake being sliced by a person.

Ingredients and Substitutions:

This apple and cranberry cake is made with a list of simple ingredients. Here’s more detail about what we need from the grocery store:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Cranberries: You can use fresh or frozen cranberries. Take the advice of the Barefoot Contessa herself and buy a few extra bags of fresh cranberries when they are widely available in the fall and freeze the extra. Also, sort through the cranberries and pick out any stems.
  • Apples: I recommend a Granny Smith apple since it is tart and balances the sweetness. With that said, you can use any variety of apples you prefer, like Gala, Pink Lady, or Jonagold.
  • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps the filling naturally sweetened, but you can use light brown sugar instead.
  • Orange Zest: Be sure to zest the orange before squeezing it.
  • Orange Juice: Freshly squeezed orange juice from a fresh orange will provide the best flavor.
  • Ground Cinnamon
  • Large Eggs: Ina uses extra large eggs in her original recipe, but I can never get my hands on them. Large eggs work just fine.
  • Cane Sugar: I like to use organic cane sugar for the cake recipe, but you can use granulated sugar if that is all you have. Make sure to save some extra for sprinkling on top just before baking.
  • Unsalted Butter: Unsalted butter controls the salt in the recipe. If you only have salted butter, omit the salt in the recipe. It is essential to let it cool before mixing it with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Vanilla Extract: A hint of pure vanilla extract rounds out the flavors.
  • Sour Cream: Full-fat sour cream provides the best texture and tang. Creme fraiche would be a wonderful substitute, or full-fat Greek yogurt, too.
  • All-Purpose Flour: Regular all-purpose flour creates a cohesive cake batter. If you want to make this gluten-free, use 1:1 gluten-free baking flour.
  • Kosher Salt

How to Make Ina’s Cranberry Apple Cake Recipe?

There is nothing to it. This apple cranberry pie recipe is so easy to make, it will become a new holiday staple. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 C. Grease a 10-inch glass pie plate with butter or cooking spray. 
A collage of images showing how to make the batter for this cranberry and apple cake.
  1. Mix fruit filling: Add fresh cranberries, apple, coconut sugar, orange zest, orange juice, and ground cinnamon to a large bowl. Mix to combine.
  2. Whip eggs: Using a hand mixer, beat the eggs on medium-high speed until thickened, about 2 minutes.
  3. Add wet ingredients: Add the cup of cane (or granulated) sugar, cooled butter, vanilla extract, and sour cream and mix on low speed until combined.
  4. Add dry ingredients: With the mixer still running, add the flour and salt. Mix until just combined. Do not overmix.
A collage of images showing the steps to baking this cake.
  1. Fold in fruit mixture: Fold in the cranberry apple mix with a rubber spatula.
  2. Transfer to baking pan: Pour the cake batter into the prepared baking dish. Sprinkle the top with the remaining tablespoon of sugar.
  3. Bake: Bake for 60-65 minutes, until lightly golden brown. The cake is done when the middle of the cake is pierced with a toothpick, and it comes out clean. Cool for 15 minutes before serving.

What to Serve It With?

It’s important to note, that the flavor of this cake is more sour than sweet, which is why I love to serve it with a creamy component to balance the sourness. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

  • Ice Cream: Serve it with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or our Vanilla Honey Ice Cream if you want to try something new.
  • Whipped Cream: A dollop of whipped cream would be extra delicious, like our Maple Whipped Cream.
  • Creme Fraiche: Creme fraiche is another rich, tangy counterpoint that makes it elegant and divine.
  • Yogurt: Another good idea is Vanilla Yogurt if you don’t have any other toppings on hand.
Freshly baked cake from the top view.

How to Store Leftovers?

This cranberry apple dessert is best served the day it is made, but it can be stored for later with fantastic results. Here are my best storage and reheating tips:

  • Storage: The cake is very moist because of the fresh fruit. For this reason, I allow it to come to room temperature and then store it in an airtight container in the fridge. The cake will last for 3 days.
  • Reheat: While you can enjoy the cake cold, if you prefer it warm, reheat in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5-10 minutes, depending on the size of your slice.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Easy Cranberry Apple Cake recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe is adapted from Ina Garten’s cookbook Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That?

Cranberry and apple cake is being sliced from the top view.
Print

Easy Cranberry Apple Cake Recipe

An easy to make and quick to put together Cranberry Apple Cake recipe right out of Barefoot Contessa's cookbook. A recipe that I make every year as soon as the fresh cranberries are available in the market.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 389kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 ounces fresh cranberries rinsed and picked over to remove stems (frozen cranberries can also be used)
  • 1 Granny Smith apple peeled, cored and diced into 1-inch cubes
  • ½ cup coconut sugar or light brown sugar
  • 1 tablespoon orange zest grated zest from 1 orange
  • ¼ cup orange juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 cup cane sugar plus 1 tablespoon to garnish or granulated sugar
  • ¼ pound unsalted butter melted, cooled slightly plus more for greasing the pie plate
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ cup sour cream full fat
  • 1 cup all-purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 C. Grease a 10-inch pie plate with butter or cooking spray and set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, add cranberries, diced apple, ½ cup coconut (or brown) sugar, orange zest, orange juice, and ground cinnamon. Mix to combine. Set aside.
  • Using a hand mixer, beat the eggs until frothy, approximately 2 minutes.
  • Add 1 cup of cane (or granulated) sugar, melted and cooled butter, vanilla extract, and sour cream. Beat on low until thoroughly combined.
  • While the mixer is on low, add flour and salt. Mix just until combined. Do not overmix.
  • Fold the batter into the fruit mixture, ensuring that the fruit and batter are evenly distributed and mixed.
  • Pour the mixture into the 10-inch pie place. Sprinkle with the additional tablespoon of cane sugar.
  • Place in the oven and bake for 60-65 minutes* until lightly brown. To test for doneness, insert the cake with a toothpick or sharp knife. It should come out clean when removed.
  • Let cool for 15 minutes and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a 10-inch cake that serves 8 slices. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Baking dish: You must use a 10-inch baking dish. We tested it with a 9-inch pie pan and the cake batter overflowed. However, if you only have a 9-inch baking dish, place it on a baking sheet before baking it in the oven. The baking sheet will catch any cake batter if the cake starts to overflow.
  • Bake time*: While Ina Garten’s recipe calls for a baking time of 55 – 60 minutes, we found it took longer for us. I recommend you start checking it with the toothpick test at the 55-minute mark. Then, bake in additional 5-minute increments if it is not ready.

Nutrition

Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 87g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 133mg | Potassium: 182mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 64g | Vitamin A: 210IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/feed/ 20
Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/#comments Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:51:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79352 I think we can all agree that no holiday meal is complete without everyone’s favorite, creamy mashed potatoes. And no…]]>

I think we can all agree that no holiday meal is complete without everyone’s favorite, creamy mashed potatoes. And no mashed potato recipe turns out as silky as one made with Yukon Golds. 

The reason is simple. They have just the right amount of starch and a naturally buttery flavor that creates the smoothest, creamiest texture without needing a ton of added fat.

Yes, my version uses a bit of butter, sour cream, and milk, but I’ll also share ways to make it your own, whether that means swapping in Greek yogurt, keeping it extra rich, or making it vegan without losing that velvety texture. 

Plus, I’ll walk you through everything you need to know, from whether to peel them to how to season them so they taste restaurant-worthy, and how to make them ahead for your holiday table.

Mashed golden potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and chives.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This recipe for mashed potatoes with Yukon gold is remarkably simple. The adaptability and ease of this recipe are what make it such a classic. It comes together with a few basic ingredients that you can find at any grocery store. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Yukon gold potatoes: At the supermarket, you may also see these referred to as yellow potatoes, golden potatoes, baby gold potatoes, petite gold potatoes, or even Yukon golden potatoes. While the smaller “baby” potatoes will work for this recipe, I prefer the standard size for ease of peeling. 

Whole milk: Mashed yellow potatoes are intended to be rich and creamy in consistency and that requires a full-fat milk. You could also achieve the same result using half and half. If you prefer to use a vegan milk such as oat milk or almond milk, just be sure you select one that is unsweetened and unflavored. 

Fresh garlic: The real secret to the best gold mashed potatoes is garlic. The infusion of fresh garlic complements the yellow potatoes in such a decadent way. If you’d like an extra intensity here, I recommend that you use roasted garlic, which can easily be prepped in the oven or even in the air fryer!

Unsalted butter: While you can use salted butter, it is harder to control the overall saltiness of the dish this way; using unsalted butter gives you more control to make adjustments later. If you prefer, vegan butter can be swapped in. 

Sour cream: Traditional mashed baby gold potatoes always call for sour cream, as it adds a welcome tang to the side dish. But if you aren’t a fan of sour cream, feel free to substitute in either whole milk plain yogurt (or Greek yogurt) or cream cheese.

Salt & Pepper: I used Kosher salt and black pepper. If you’d prefer a more even color for your Yukon whipped potatoes, you may switch to white pepper instead.

Cheese (optional): I didn’t include cheese to keep it light, but for a cheesy twist, you can fold in a cup of shredded cheddar, Parmesan, or Gruyère just before serving. The heat from the potatoes will gently melt the cheese, adding a richer, more indulgent taste. Alternatively, you can also sprinkle a handful of shredded cheese on top before serving.

Additional toppings (optional): What to add to mashed potatoes for flavor, you ask? There are lots of options that pair well with this pliable mashed yellow potatoes recipe. Some of my favorite toppings include fresh herbs, green onions, and turkey bacon. A true Epicurean upgrade: drizzle some truffle oil on top before serving!

How to Make Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes?

The steps to prepare my signature creamy Yukon gold mashed potatoes are quite straightforward. I have tested this recipe more times than I can count.

So, if you follow along below, you’ll end up with golden mashed potatoes that disappear faster than any other side dish on the table.

A collage of images showing how to make mashed potatoes with gold potatoes.

Step 1 – Boil the cubed yellow potatoes: Fill a large pan with cubed potatoes and enough cold water to cover them by about an inch. Stir in 1 tablespoon of kosher salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat.

Starting with cold water helps the potatoes cook evenly from the inside out.

Step 2 – Cook the potatoes until fork tender: In my testing, I found that it took about 15-20 minutes to reach the desired consistency when the potatoes were cut into even 1-inch cubes.

You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, the golden potatoes are done.

Step 3 – Drain the potatoes: Then return the warm potatoes to the pot.

Step 4 – Warm your milk and butter: While the gold potatoes are cooking, place your milk, fresh (or roasted) garlic, and butter in a saucepan and heat on medium-low heat until the butter is melted and the milk is warmed. There is no need to bring it to a boil; you just don’t want to be using cold ingredients.

A collage of photos showing how to mash yellow potatoes after they are cooked.

Step 5 – Add the warmed milk mixture to the pan: Combine the milk mixture with the drained potatoes and lightly mash to combine. You want to move fast here so you can take advantage of the residual heat from potatoes to help you mash easily and reach to that creamy consistency.

Step 6 – Add the sour cream and season: Then continue mashing to your desired consistency. Season your mashed gold potatoes with a sprinkle of kosher salt and pepper to your desired taste.

Transfer it into a serving bowl and add more butter on top, if preferred. 

How To Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, and Freeze Leftovers

Do you have a lot to do for an upcoming brunch or a holiday dinner and would like to make ahead Yukon gold mashed potatoes to save time on the big day? Here are the instructions to do so: 

  • Make Ahead: I recommend making these potatoes no more than a day in advance for optimal freshness. Simply make a batch, bring to room temperature, and store in an airtight container in the fridge.
  • Storage Instructions: To store, let the golden mashed potatoes cool to room temperature, place them in an oven-safe baking dish (for easy reheating) or airtight container, cover them with stretch film, and place them in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
  • Freezing & Thawing Instructions: I don’t recommend that you freeze any leftovers, as freezing fundamentally changes the consistency and flavor. If you have leftovers, I recommend that you refrigerate them and then form them into potato “pancakes” to fry in the skillet for a creative brunch the following day. 
  • Reheating: You can reheat your yellow mashed potatoes in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes (or until warmed thoroughly), making sure to stir them a few times for even reheating. If you’re making this recipe for a holiday dinner, pop them in the oven after your turkey or ham comes out to take advantage of an already-warm oven. 
Mashed Yukon gold potatoes in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes Recipe

These Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes are easy to make, unbelievably creamy and fluffy, and ready in 30 minutes. A timeless American side dish, whipped Yukon gold potatoes literally go with anything, making them an all-around crowd-pleaser for all year round.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds Yukon gold potatoes peeled* and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 tablespoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ¾ cup whole milk or half and half or heavy cream
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup sour cream or Greek yogurt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper or white pepper
  • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs such as chives or parsley chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Fill a large pan with cold water and add the cubed potatoes, making sure the potatoes are fully submerged. Stir in 1 tablespoon kosher salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender, 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, they are ready to go. Drain the potatoes and return them to the pot.
  • While the potatoes are cooking, place milk, garlic, and butter in a saucepan and heat on medium-low until the butter is melted and the milk is warmed—there is no need to bring it to a boil.
  • Add the warmed milk mixture into the pan containing the now drained potatoes and lightly mash* to combine.
  • Add the sour cream and mash all of it to your desired consistency.
  • Season with salt and pepper to your desired taste.
  • Transfer into a serving bowl, sprinkle with fresh herbs and add more butter on top, if preferred. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 1/2 to 3 cups of mashed potatoes, ideal for serving six as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can double the recipe.
  • Should I peel the potatoes? When it comes to peeling, Yukon Gold mashed potatoes offer flexibility. Unlike Russet potatoes, golden potatoes can be used with or without their skin. For the creamiest texture, peel the potatoes before mashing. If you prefer a more rustic flavor or are using baby potatoes, leaving the skin on works perfectly, too. Just note that it will add a slightly earthier texture and taste.
  • Tools: I recommend using a hand masher for mashing potatoes, but a food mill or potato ricer can also be used. I do not recommend using a food processor or blender for mashing as you’ll end up with a gooey texture.
  • Make ahead, storage and reheating: This recipe can be made a day ahead. To store, let it cool down, place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 10 minutes or until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 1188mg | Potassium: 705mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 464IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQs

How long do you boil Yukon gold potatoes for mashed potatoes?

If you boil cubed potatoes, it should take about 15-20 minutes for them to cook. If you would rather boil the gold potatoes whole, then expect them to take around 25-30 minutes to reach doneness.

Do you peel Yukon gold potatoes for mashed potatoes?

Whether or not you go for skin-on Yukon gold mashed potatoes is a personal preference. Choosing not to peel your potatoes will give them an earthier vibe, in both consistency and appearance. Peeling simply makes for a smoother end product, creamy in both color and texture.

How to season mashed potatoes?

If you’re looking to elevate this recipe, then selecting the right mashed potato seasoning beyond the basic salt, pepper, and butter will do the trick. Some ideas include: Fresh herbs such as rosemary and sage; dried herbs like nutmeg; Dijon mustard for some tanginess; truffle oil or olive oil for a more gourmet feel; or even cheese (Parmesan, cheddar, or cream cheese) to bring out the richness of the potatoes.

Why are my mashed potatoes gummy & how to fix it?

If you have ended up with mashed potatoes that are gluey or gummy in texture, it simply means that the starch has gotten overworked or your ingredients were too cold. I recommend that you try folding in a little warm milk, cream, or melted butter to loosen them.

What can I do with leftover mashed potatoes?

You can use them to top a shepherd’s pie, stir them into soups to make them creamier, or even freeze them for later. For a quick meal, reheat them and serve with roasted vegetables or a fried egg on top.

Expert Tips for Mashed Golden Potatoes

This recipe is intentionally uncomplicated and will be accessible for any home cook. Here are a few additional tips to ensure this Yukon gold mashed potatoes recipe comes out perfectly for you, every time you make it:

  • Check the doneness of your potatoes before draining them: You want to make sure that they are cooked throughout and not still hard at their center. When you think they may be done, insert a sharp knife in their center. If it slides in easily, they are done and ready to be drained from the boiling water.
  • Make sure you have the best tools for mashing: How much you mash your yellow potatoes depends on the consistency you prefer. You don’t want to use a food processor or a blender, as that will result in overworking the starch, which leads to gummy mashed potatoes. My favorite tool is a potato masher, but a food mill or a potato ricer would also work well to achieve a creamy, smooth texture.
  • Warm your milk and butter mixture before adding them: We aren’t cooking these ingredients, but rather warming them. This step is essential because using cold milk and butter can lead to a gummy texture. Warming the mixture will give you creamy, smooth Yukon gold potato puree.
  • Drain well: No one wants watery mashed potatoes, and usually, the leftover excess water from boiling is the reason why this happens. Therefore, it is imperative to drain them well. I also let the potatoes sit in the hot pot for a minute after draining to let the remaining water evaporate.

What To Serve the Best Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes With?

This recipe is so adaptable—it tastes great with just about everything! In fact, it is among my top Thanksgiving veggie sides, year after year. Here are a couple of ideas to assist you as you plan your upcoming meals, whether it’s for the holidays, a weeknight dinner, or some other special feast:

  • Meat: Is there any comfort food combo more well-known than meat and potatoes? If you’d like to complement your next meat main with this easy potato recipe, I recommend you check out my Pot Roast recipe, my Reverse Sear Prime Rib, or my Filet Mignon
  • Turkey: No Thanksgiving meal is complete without turkey and mashed potatoes, right? If you’re cooking for the big holiday, this recipe will be divine with my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, if you’re looking for a weeknight dinner throughout the rest of the year, I recommend that you pair it with my Turkey Meatloaf recipe
  • Chicken: Serve it with my Marry Me Chicken or Chicken Fricassee for an easy yet simple weeknight dinner.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

Over the years of writing this blog, I have shared many potato dishes, from holiday-worthy potato recipes to easy weeknight mashed potatoes, so if you love potatoes as much as I do below are a few others I hand-picked for you:

  • If you want something still as creamy but with a herby touch, my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a bit more elevated, while just as fluffy and creamy.
  • My Muffin Tin Potatoes turn simple ingredients like Russet potatoes, garlic, and Parmesan into mini potato stacks that bake up golden and crisp on the edges. 
  • If you love crispy and golden potatoes, try my Smashed Fingerling Potatoes. They have the crunchiest exterior and buttery, melt-in-your-mouth center. 
  • And if you are a fan of the classics, my Red Skin Potato Salad is creamy, tangy, and full of bacon bits, dill, and pickles. A go-to side for summer BBQs and picnics.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/feed/ 2
Mont Blanc Dessert https://foolproofliving.com/mont-blanc-dessert/ https://foolproofliving.com/mont-blanc-dessert/#respond Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:54:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79170 If you’ve been looking for ideas for what to do with all of those chestnuts you’ve been roasting this holiday…]]>

If you’ve been looking for ideas for what to do with all of those chestnuts you’ve been roasting this holiday season (or boiling, fire-roasting, or air frying, for that matter!), then this Mont Blanc recipe is your elegant, decadent answer to what to do with chestnuts.

While it is a slightly more hands-on recipe than you may be used to here on Foolproof Living, we believe the finished chestnut mont blanc is well worth the effort. The combination of crisp meringue, sweetened cream, and the nutty notes in the chestnut puree is divine! 

Chestnut mont blanc on a plate from the front view.

Below, you will find everything you need to know, including step-by-step photos, equipment to use, and some time-saving tips to help make this Mont Blanc dessert recipe approachable and accessible for you to master as an at-home baker.

What is Mont Blanc dessert made of? 

Our recipe for Mont Blanc is split into three separate components. We’ve listed the ingredients needed for each part of the recipe below—each requires a short list of easy-to-find ingredients.

Mont Blanc Meringue Ingredients:

Ingredients from the top view.
  • Egg whites: You’ll need two large egg whites to make enough for ten individual servings of this French Mont Blanc dessert. It is best to separate the egg whites from the yolks when the eggs are cold—this will help you keep them out of whites, which is essential for a proper meringue. 
  • Cane sugar: We used natural cane sugar in this recipe, but you can also swap in coconut sugar or granulated sugar. 
  • White vinegar and cream of tartar: Both of these ingredients add acidity, which helps aerate the meringue structure quicker and greatly improves the structure. 
  • Vanilla extract: Just a touch adds sweetness and flavor to the meringue discs.

Mont Blanc Chestnut Puree Ingredients:

  • Chestnuts: We’re using store-bought peeled and cooked chestnuts (affiliate link), which are readily available and reduce the preparation time by skipping the roasting and peeling of the chestnuts. But if you’d like to cook the chestnuts yourself, you can follow my recipes for roasted chestnuts in the oven, boiled chestnuts, air fried chestnuts, or roasting chestnuts on an open fire.
  • Milk: We used whole milk in this recipe and recommend sticking to full-fat dairy here rather than skim milk.
  • Kosher salt: Kosher’s granule size is key here, so we recommend not swapping in table salt. 
  • Cane sugar: We used natural cane sugar in this recipe, but you can also use coconut sugar or granulated sugar. 
  • Vanilla extract: If you’d like a richer flavor than extract, feel free to swap in half of a whole vanilla bean with the seeds scraped out. 

Mont Blanc Whipped Cream Ingredients:

Ingredients for the whipped cream from the top view.
  • Heavy cream: Both heavy cream and whipping cream can be used in this recipe. The cream must be cold to whip successfully, so we recommend removing it from the fridge right before using it.
  • Maple syrup: Two tablespoons is enough to sweeten the cream. Make sure to use proper maple syrup rather than maple flavoring—the taste is far superior and perfectly complements the chestnut flavors.
  • Vanilla extract and kosher salt: These two ingredients add flavor and balance to the whipped cream. 

Mont Blanc Dessert Finishing Decor Ingredients (Optional):

  • Powdered (confectioners) sugar: Traditionally, Mont Blanc cake is dusted in powdered sugar over the top of the domed chestnut puree strands. The confectioner’s sugar adds sweetness, making this dessert resemble the highest snowy mountains in the Alps.
  • Edible gold leaf: It is optional, but if you’d like to add a pop of color to this decadent dessert, you can decorate the finished dessert with pieces of gold leaf (affiliate link).

How To Make Mont Blanc Dessert?

While the process below might look intimidating, we covered all the detailed steps to walk you through. After all, this is one of the most iconic chestnut desserts of all time, and we hope that after reviewing each component covered below, you will see that it is actually not that difficult.

Make The Meringue

Start by making mont blanc with the meringue as it takes the most amount of time. Below are the steps to making the meringue:

  1. Get your oven ready: Preheat your oven to 200 degrees F. (93 degrees C.) Line your baking sheet with parchment paper. 
A collage of images showing how to make meringue for this chestnut dessert.
  1. Create a bain-marie: A bain-marie is essentially a double boiler, so if you have one, feel free to use it here. Otherwise, place a bowl over a pan of simmering water—just make sure the pan doesn’t touch the water. 
  2. Dissolve the sugar in warmed egg whites: Add the egg whites and sugar to the bowl and stir continuously with a rubber spatula. Scrape down the sides as you go to ensure all of the sugar is blended into the mixture. Keep stirring until the sugar has completely dissolved and no grains are left. You can test this by rubbing some mixture between your fingers, or when the mixture has reached 160 degrees F. (71 degrees C).
  3. Whisk the egg mixture: Add the egg white mixture to a stand mixer’s bowl and whisk until aerated. Then add the vanilla extract, cream of tartar, and vinegar. 
  4. Whip into peaks: Turn the speed up and whip the mixture until it’s cooled, voluminous, and glossy. When the whisk is lifted out, the mixture should stand in stiff peaks. 
Person showing how to pipe meringue.
  1. Pipe the meringue: Spoon the meringue into a piping bag fitted with a large round tip (affiliate link). You can also cut the end off a ziplock bag, leaving a roughly 1” diameter hole—pipe ten meringue rounds onto a parchment paper-lined baking sheet. The discs should have a dome and be 2 inches or so in diameter. Use the back of a spoon to clean them up if necessary.
  2. Bake the meringues: Transfer the tray to the oven and bake for one and a half hours. Do not open the door at any point. When done, turn the oven off and let the meringues cool in the oven for a couple of hours. In the end, they should be fully cooled and crisp to the touch. 

Make The Chesnut Puree

It is best to make the chestnut puree while the meringues are baking. Below are the basic steps of making chestnut puree (also called chestnut vermicelli). You can learn more about it in our chestnut puree recipe if you need further information.

  1. Soften the chestnuts: Add chestnuts, milk, sugar, vanilla extract, and salt to a saucepan set over medium-high heat on the stovetop. Cook for 20-30 minutes or until the milk has reduced by half. Keep a close eye on it and stir it frequently. 
  2. Strain: Pass the mixture through a strainer, reserving the reduced milk mixture. Let the chestnuts and milk cool for 10 minutes. 
Steps showing how to make chestnut cream in a food processor.
  1. Puree the chestnuts: Add the softened chestnuts to the bowl of a food processor along with ½ cup of the reserved milk mixture. Blend until a smooth puree is formed. Add more milk, if necessary, in one tablespoon increments until you have a perfectly smooth, pipeable consistency. 
  2. Pass the puree through a sieve: Since we’ll pass the puree through the piping tip to turn it into “vermicelli”, it is imperative that the puree have no lumps. Therefore, while it might come as an extra step, pressing it through a fine mesh sieve is best to produce a beautifully smooth chestnut puree. We’ll then cover it and let it rest at room temperature to cool completely.

Make The Whipped Cream:

While it is not traditional, we use our maple whipped cream for this chestnut Mont Blanc dessert recipe. That being said, if you want, you can use more of a traditional whipped cream made with confectioner sugar instead.

A collage of images showing how to make whipped cream.
  1. Gather the ingredients: Add heavy cream, maple syrup, and salt to the bowl of your electric mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. 
  2. Whip the cream to firm peaks: Start whisking on low until the cream has soft peaks. Then, turn the mixer up to medium and continue to whisk until the cream forms a firm peak and holds its shape. 
  3. Cool: Refrigerate until ready to assemble your Mont Blanc.

The Assembly

A collage of images showing how to assemble French mont blanc dessert.
  1. Pipe cream onto meringues: Place the meringues onto a serving platter. Spoon the maple whipped cream into a piping bag fitted with a medium piping tip. Pipe dollops of cream onto the meringue. The shape of the meringue with cream on top should resemble a mountain’s peak. 
  2. Pipe on chestnut puree: Spoon the chestnut paste dessert into a piping bag fitted with a small piping tip (affiliate link) and pipe the puree around the whipped cream until the cream is completely covered. This is called chestnut vermicelli; how thin your piping tip is will determine the thickness of the strands. Don’t worry about them being perfect. Do your best to create the highest mountain you can. It is totally fine for it to look rustic.
  3. Decorate: Dust the top of the meringue liberally with powdered sugar (for white mountains) and decorate it with flakes of edible gold leaf, if preferred. Alternatively, sprinkle broken-up meringue (or grated chocolate) over the top. Serve immediately. 

How To Make Ahead & Store?

This is one of those recipes that definitely benefits from some pre-planning. Here are some helpful tips on how to prep & store the various elements.

  • Make Ahead: All three elements can be made a day before serving. Simply make the meringues the night before and let them cool in the oven overnight. You can make the chestnut puree and whipped cream a day in advance and store them in the refrigerator until you are ready to assemble this chestnut dessert. However, we recommend removing the chestnut puree and letting it come to room temperature before piping.
  • Storage: We recommend assembling your Mont Blanc desserts right before serving, as the meringue will soften and lose its crisp exterior quickly. If you’d like, you can store the separate components individually, though the completed dessert will not hold up.

Expert Tips

As far as dessert recipes with chestnuts go, this one is quite involved. However, if you’re excited to undertake this impressive French delicacy, then these Mont Blanc dessert tips and tricks will help you achieve a gorgeous final product:  

  • Use clean and dry equipment: This is one of the most important factors when making meringue. Your bowl, whisk, and utensils should be clean, dry, and grease-free. Any residue can inhibit the egg whites from whipping to the necessary voluminous peaks.
  • Go low and slow when baking meringue: Don’t be tempted to turn the oven up to speed up the process. The meringue will only brown and have a burnt taste. Baking them in a low-heat oven helps dry out the egg whites, resulting in the signature crisp shell meringues known for.
  • Process your puree for long enough: The chestnut puree must be smooth. Blend it in the food processor thoroughly, scraping the sides and base periodically. The piping tip used to create the chestnut vermicelli is so small that any lumps in the puree will get stuck in the tip when piping around the cream—a smooth, blended texture will avoid this frustration.
  • Chestnut Cream: While testing this recipe, we noticed that some versions incorporate store-bought chestnut cream (a popular brand is Clement Faugier) to thin out the puree. However, since chestnut cream can be hard to find in the US, we opted to make our own puree from scratch using only chestnuts.
  • Be patient when piping: Don’t rush the piping stage. Piping the chestnut puree is the main wow factor of this dessert. Start from the bottom and patiently go around the dome until fully covered. Also, remember that there’s no such thing as too messy. Snow-capped mountains are rustic!
  • Assemble the individual Mont Blanc desserts right before serving: This recipe is best eaten on the day it’s served. The meringue will soften from the moisture of the cream if left for too long. 
  • Turn it into a Mont Blanc cake (aka Gateau Mont Blanc): As we worked on this recipe, we found variations where bakers turned this chestnut paste dessert into individual cakes by placing the meringue, cream, and chestnut vermicelli over a sponge cake. If you want to go in that direction, bake a sponge cake, bring it to room temperature, and cut rounds using a round cookie cutter (no larger than the diameter of your meringue). To assemble, place the meringue, and whipped cream on top and then pipe the chestnut puree over, starting from the bottom and going around until you reach the top and the whole thing is covered with chestnut vermicelli.
French chestnut dessert on a plate decorated with powdered sugar and edible gold leaf.

FAQs

What is a Mont Blanc dessert?

Mont Blanc is a French dessert created in the 19th century in Paris. It’s made by layering a disc of meringue with a dome of cream. Strands of sweet chestnut puree encase the outside of the cream and are dusted in powdered sugar to create the visual effects of mountain peaks.

What is the difference between Mont Blanc and Monte Bianco?

Monte Bianco dessert is the Italian variation of Mont Blanc with a few minor differences. While both versions featured sweetened chestnut puree, the Italian version usually includes the addition of rum (or other liqueurs) and cocoa powder. 

What does Mont Blanc taste like?

Mont Blanch has a rich flavor profile, predominantly characterized by the earthy taste of sweetened chestnuts with a slightly buttery and nutty undertone. It is balanced with the mildly sweetened whipped cream and the crispy sweet meringue. The overall flavor is mildly sweet and luxurious chestnut dessert that celebrates the harmony of creamy textures and earthy autumnal flavors.

Other Chestnut Recipes

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Mont blanc dessert on a small plate.
Print

Mont Blanc Dessert Recipe

Chestnuts are the essence of holiday indulgence, and the Gateau Mont Blanc recipe is the perfect way to showcase their rich, nutty flavor. This elegant dessert features a crisp baked meringue base, topped with airy whipped cream and a delicate swirl of sweetened chestnut puree, finished with a dusting of powdered sugar.
Course Dessert
Cuisine French
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Chill time 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 45 minutes
Servings 10 servings
Calories 210kcal

Ingredients

For The Meringue

  • 2 large egg whites at room temperature
  • 6 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated sugar
  • ½ tsp vanilla extract
  • ¼ tsp cream of tartar
  • ¼ tsp white distilled vinegar or lemon juice

For The Chestnut Puree

  • 1 ½ cups chestnuts cooked peeled – storebought, or roast your own
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk
  • 2 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated or coconut sugar
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Pinch kosher salt

For The Maple Whipped Cream

  • 1 cup heavy cream cold
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract or ½ vanilla bean (seeds scraped)
  • 1/8 teaspoon kosher salt

To Decorate

  • ¼ cup powdered sugar
  • Edible gold leaf optional

Instructions

To Make The Meringue:

  • Preheat the oven to 200F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • On the stovetop, bring a saucepan with a few inches of water to a simmer. Add the egg whites and sugar into a clean metal or glass bowl and place it over the pan of water to make a double boiler. Be careful that the water does not touch the base of the bowl.
  • Using a rubber spatula, gently and continuously stir the egg whites and sugar mixture, scraping down the sides and bottom of the bowl. Stir until the egg whites are warmed throughly and the sugar crystals have dissolved. This takes about 4 to 6 minutes. Test this by rubbing some of the mixture between your thumb and forefinger. The mixture should be warm to the touch, and you should not feel any sugar grains. If you do, it needs a little longer. Alternatively, a temperature probe should read 160F (70C) for a more accurate reading.
  • Remove the bowl from the heat and pour the mixture into the clean bowl of a stand mixer fitted with a whisk attachment. Alternatively, use a handheld electric whisk. Whisk on medium to low until the egg whites are foamy. Add in the vanilla extract, cream of tartar, and vinegar.
  • Increase the speed to medium-high and whisk until the mixture has cooled significantly. The meringue should be voluminous and glossy, and when the whisk is removed, you should get stiff peaks.
  • Spoon the meringue into a piping bag fitted with a large plain piping tip, and pipe ten 2-inch round meringues* in a swirling motion so they end up approximately 1.5 inches tall on the tray in a cone shape. Once piped, you can use an offset spatula to clean them up, if necessary. With any remaining meringue, pipe little meringues that can be used as decoration or enjoyed separately.
  • Bake the meringues for 1 ½ hours or until they are crisp. Remove the tray from the oven and leave to cool thoroughly. Or, if you have the time, leave it in the oven to cool thoroughly.

To Make The Chestnut Puree:

  • Add chestnuts, milk, sugar, vanilla extract, and salt to a saucepan set over medium-high heat on the stovetop.
  • Bring liquid to a boil, reduce heat, and simmer on medium to low heat, stirring occasionally, for 20-30 minutes or until the milk has reduced to 2/3 cup and the chestnuts are tender. Towards the end, stir more frequently to prevent the liquid from scorching on the base and to break up the chestnuts.
  • Place a mesh strainer over a bowl and strain the chestnuts from the liquid, keeping it for later. Allow the chestnuts and liquid to cool for ten minutes or so.
  • Transfer the semi-cooled chestnuts to the bowl of a food processor, adding ½ cup of the reserved liquid. Process until pureed, stopping and scraping down the base and sides a few times.
  • If necessary, add more of the reserved liquid (in one-tablespoon increments) until a smooth, pipeable consistency is achieved that will hold its shape.
  • Press the chestnut puree through a fine mesh sieve to remove any remaining lumps and ensure the puree is extra smooth. Cover until ready to assemble.

To Make the Maple Whipped Cream:

  • Add all of the ingredients to the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with a whisk attachment. Whisk at medium-low speed until it reaches soft peaks, about 1 minute.
  • Increase the speed to medium and whip until firm peaks form. Cover and refrigerate until you are ready to assemble.

To Assemble:

  • Arrange meringues onto a serving platter.
  • Spoon the chestnut puree into a piping bag fitted with a small plain piping tip. Set it aside.
  • Spoon whipped cream into a piping bag fitted with a medium plain piping tip.
  • Pipe whipped cream onto the meringue in a cone shape. Smooth the cream with a spatula, if necessary.
  • Pipe the chestnut puree around the whipped cream in overlapping circles, starting from the bottom and going around until the entire cone is covered.
  • When ready to serve, dust with powdered sugar and decorate with edible gold leaf, if preferred.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 10 chestnut mont blancs. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *Helpful guide: If you are new to making meringue, you can use a small glass or bowl 2 inches in diameter and draw around it on the parchment paper to guide you through. Just be sure to flip the paper over before piping. You should see the circles through the paper as you pipe the meringue.
  • Whipped Cream: We used our maple whipped cream to make sure that this recipe is naturally sweetened, but you can use any whipped cream recipe you like.
  • To Make Ahead: You can make all components of this recipe a day or two in advance, store them individually and assemble them right before serving.
  • Storing Leftovers: This is one dessert that doesn’t store well. Therefore, we recommend storing each component separately and assembling it right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 61mg | Potassium: 215mg | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 415IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mont-blanc-dessert/feed/ 0
Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/#comments Mon, 28 Oct 2024 16:10:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78662 Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got…]]>

Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got me wondering: Can you put cottage cheese in mac and cheese? Great news: Not only can you add protein to mac and cheese with cottage cheese, the actual cottage cheese cheese sauce comes together quickly in a blender and is ready in less than 30 minutes.

While the main instructions you’ll find below are for a stovetop version of this recipe, this cottage cheese macaroni and cheese can also be prepped ahead of time to be baked later in a casserole dish if you’d like to add it to your holiday menu. Not to worry—the baked version of this recipe is also included below.

Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This homemade mac and cheese with cottage cheese has an impressive depth of flavor for a dish with just a few simple ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Pasta: For our version of macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, we selected the fun & familiar macaroni noodle that we all grew up eating. However, all pasta shapes are welcome as long as they’ll hold the sauce. And, if you have specific dietary needs/preferences, feel free to substitute gluten-free pasta (GF), chickpea pasta, or whole wheat pasta—they all adapt well to this recipe.
  • Cottage cheese: When adding cottage cheese to mac and cheese, I recommend that you go with the full 4% milkfat version. You can use a lower-fat version, but if you are like us and prefer a creamier dish, go for the 4% version.
  • Milk: The same goes here with the milk—I recommend choosing full fat regular milk for a luscious finished pasta. However, an equal amount of alternative dairy-free milk, like almond milk, can also be used.
  • Cheddar cheese: We used sharp cheddar cheese when testing this recipe. If you’d prefer a milder cheese flavor for your cottage mac and cheese, feel free to swap in gouda cheese in its place. 
  • Parmesan cheese: Take it from me—shredded parmesan cheese is essential to this cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe. Without it, the mac and cheese sauce with cottage cheese tasted a bit bland. The parmesan gives it the umami punch that will keep everyone reaching for second helpings.
  • Cornstarch: This helps to thicken your cottage cheese sauce. If you prefer arrowroot powder, you can swap that in instead.
  • Garlic: Garlic powder blends into the sauce evenly, which is what we used in our recipe trials. If you prefer the more intense flavor of fresh or roasted garlic, just be sure to mince or press it well before adding it to your blender. While it is not traditional, ½ teaspoon of onion powder can also be added if preferred.
  • Spices: Our cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe gets its traditional flavor with these three classic mac and cheese spices—paprika, nutmeg, and a touch of cayenne pepper. 
  • Veggies (optional): If you’d like to elevate your cottage cheese mac and cheese, feel free to mix in some cooked vegetables once the dish is complete, such as steamed broccoli, peas, or a handful of fresh baby spinach leaves.

How to Make Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese?

This mac and cheese recipe with cottage cheese comes together in three simple steps: First, you cook the pasta. Then, you make your high-protein cheese sauce with cottage cheese. Finally, you mix the two components together. And, voilà! It’s just that easy in under 30 minutes. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Steps showing how to cook pasta and make the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce in a blender.
  1. Cook the pasta: Fill a medium saucepan with water and season generously with salt. Bring it to a boil and add the pasta to the boiling water. Cook until your noodles are al dente, following the timing on the package’s directions.
  2. Drain the water: First, reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta into a strainer and set aside. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
  3. Blend your cheese mixture: Next, blend cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a high-speed blender or a food processor until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
A collage of images showing how to cook mac n cheese with cottage cheese sauce.
  1. Cook your cottage cheese cheese sauce: Pour the blended sauce into the pot over medium-low heat. Using a wooden spoon, stir your sauce until it is slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½  minutes. You will know that it’s ready when it coats the back of a spoon. Taste for seasoning, adding more flavor if you desire it. 
  2. Combine your pasta and sauce: Add the drained pasta back into the pot with the cottage cheese cheese sauce and stir to combine. Cook until the pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture. Serve while still warm.

How to Bake it?

If you’re looking for a baked mac and cheese with cottage cheese recipe, then look no further. The baked version is a crowd-pleasing side dish for Thanksgiving, Christmas, or really any holiday potluck that you’re invited to. It can easily be adjusted as a baked version, and I’m going to show you how:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C. 
  2. Prepare your baking dish: Brush an 8X8 baking dish with 1 TBSP of butter.
A collage of images showing how to make baked mac and cheese cottage cheese.
  1. Pour in your cooked cottage cheese mac n cheese: Put the cooked pasta and sauce mixture into the buttered 8×8 baking dish. Add an extra 3 tablespoons of pasta water into the mix.
  2. Top your pasta: Sprinkle the top of the cottage cheese macaroni with an additional ½ cup of parmesan cheese first, then ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs (or regular bread crumbs).
  3. Bake: Put the baking dish in the oven for 15 minutes, or until the breadcrumbs have toasted. 
  4. Brown the top, if preferred: If you’d like the top of your baked pasta to have a crunchier texture, switch the oven to broil and leave in the oven for an additional two minutes.
Mac n cheese with cottage cheese in the pot being stirred by a person from the top view.

How To Make Ahead and Store and Reheat Leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: If you’re looking to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version that you see above. Just pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, allow it to cool to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking. 
  • Storage: If you made the stovetop version of this mac & cheese recipe with cottage cheese, you can store any leftovers in an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: To reheat macaroni and cottage cheese leftovers, place the pasta in a saucepan and warm it on low heat on the stovetop. If the sauce is too thick, you may have to add some water to get it back to its creamy texture.

What to Serve This Recipe?

Our mac n cheese recipe with cottage cheese is adaptable and satisfying as either a side dish or vegetarian main dish: 

Expert Tips

Thankfully, the process of making this high protein cottage cheese macaroni and cheese recipe is a straightforward one without much room for error. However, there are a few things that I’d like to mention for the best results:

  • Don’t leave the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce unattended while it’s cooking: The sauce comes together quickly—truly, within minutes. Once your pasta is cooked and you start to warm your sauce, it will thicken and be ready for the macaroni to be stirred in shortly.
  • Use full-fat dairy products: For the ultimate creamy, dreamy, high-protein mac n cheese, you’ll need to use full-fat regular milk and 4% cottage cheese. Trust me on this one. Skim just doesn’t cut it in this recipe. 
  • Cooking the cottage cheese cheese sauce in the saucepan before adding the pasta is very important: Because the cottage cheese mixture contains cornstarch as a thickening agent, it needs a few minutes to cook so that it blends in, thickens, and becomes “invisible,” flavor-wise. You don’t want to be able to taste the cornstarch!
  • Use water to adjust your sauce’s texture: If your blended cottage cheese mac and cheese is too thick, adding a small bit of the reserved pasta water to the mix will thin it out. 
  • Mind your salt: Because we are adding salt to our pasta water and using salty cheeses such as sharp cheddar and parmesan, you will notice that we did not include any additional salt in the recipe for our homemade protein mac and cheese. Please adjust and add salt according to your own taste.
  • Broiling browns the top of the baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese: We noticed in our testing of the baked version of this recipe that simply baking didn’t brown the breadcrumbs sufficiently. If you’d like that crunchy, browned top, be sure to broil it for 1 minute once it has finished baking.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a pot from the top view.
Print

Cottage Cheese Macaroni and Cheese Recipe

This Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese Recipe is our guilt-free alternative to traditional mac and cheese that is lower in calories, higher in protein, and doesn’t sacrifice the signature creamy deliciousness of the original dish. The cottage cheese sauce comes together easily in a blender and the whole dish is ready in less than 30 minutes. This recipe can be made on the stovetop, or as a baked version by following a few additional instructions below.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 461kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces pasta elbow macaroni
  • 1 cup cottage cheese 4% milk fat
  • ½ cup regular whole milk
  • 4 ounces sharp cheddar cheese shredded
  • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese shredded
  • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • pinch nutmeg
  • pinch cayenne pepper optional

Instructions

  • Bring a pot of generously salted water to a boil in a medium-sized pot. Add the pasta and cook according to package directions until al dente. Reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
  • Meanwhile, place the cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a blender or a food processor. Blend until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
  • Pour the cottage cheese mixture into the pot and turn the heat to medium-low. Using a wooden spoon, stir until slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½ minutes. It should be ready if it coats the back of a spoon. The sauce thickens very fast so do not leave it unattended. If it thickens too much you can thin it out using the reserved pasta water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if needed.
  • Add the now-drained pasta into the pot and stir to combine. Cook until pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture.
  • Serve while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 cups of macaroni and cottage cheese ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values are per serving.
  • Baked Version: To make baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, you will need 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, 1/2 cup of panko breadcrumbs, and 1/2 cup (additional) shredded parmesan cheese. Below are the step by step instructions:
    • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C.
    • Brush a 8X8 baking dish with butter.
    • Follow the recipe as written. Instead of serving, incorporate three tablespoons of the pasta water into the mac and cheese mixture.
    • Place the cottage cheese mac and cheese into the buttered dish.
    • Sprinkle with parmesan cheese and then panko breadcrumbs. Bake for 15 minutes or until breadcrumbs have toasted.
  • Make Ahead: If you’re planning to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version. Simply pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, bring it to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking as written above.
  • Storage and reheating instructions for the stovetop version: Any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat in a sauce pan with a splash of water over medium-low heat until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 593mg | Potassium: 271mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 580IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 462mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/feed/ 2
Butternut Squash Bruschetta https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/#comments Fri, 25 Oct 2024 15:11:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8033 The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up…]]>

The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up beautifully, leaving you with sweet, caramelized bits of squash. Layer that on top of a toasted baguette slice slathered with herbed goat cheese and cranberry sauce, and you will have a butternut squash crostini worthy of an elegant dinner party or casual finger food.

If you are like us, a big fan of butternut squash appetizers, be sure to check out our Butternut Squash Salad and Butternut Squash Soup, as well.

Thanksgiving bruschetta with butternut squash and cranberry sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

This easy butternut squash appetizer is easy to make with a few simple ingredients from the grocery store. We will need the following ingredients:

  • Butternut squash: Look for a medium-sized whole butternut squash heavy for its size. I prefer cutting butternut squash at home into small cubes rather than buying the precut packages. Alternatively, acorn squash, delicata squash, or any pumpkin variety can also be used in this recipe.
  • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the fruity flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Ground cinnamon powder adds an extra background warmth.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances all those butternut squash flavors.
  • Goat cheese: I love creamy goat cheese here (check out any of my Goat Cheese Recipes), but you could also use Ricotta Cheese, cream cheese, or mascarpone cheese.
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream adds extra richness and loosens the goat cheese to a spreadable consistency. Whole milk is a good substitute.
  • Scallions: Green onions add extra color and a mild onion flavor.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives us that punchy bite.
  • Fresh herbs: I love fresh parsley, but fresh thyme is a great option.
  • Crusty Bread: Hearty, thick slices of sourdough bread are divine, but you can also make No Knead Artisan Bread if you have the time or use slices of baguette for smaller bruschetta.
  • Cranberry sauce: I love to use my Maple Cranberry Sauce, which I always have in the fridge this time of year, but any leftover cranberry sauce will work.
  • Nuts: Toasted sliced almonds or walnuts add a layer of crunch and texture.
  • Honey: Floral honey elevates the butternut and cranberry with sweetness, but it is optional. Maple syrup can also be used.
  • Toppings: Feel free to add toppings such as flaky sea salt, red pepper flakes, chopped sage leaves, or rosemary for extra flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

There are several additions to this butternut appetizer, such as:

  • Balsamic glaze: Omit the honey and finish it with a tangy and sweet balsamic glaze instead.
  • Caramelized onions: Give the butternut squash an extra layer of savory flavor with rich and delicious Caramelized Onions.
  • Apple: Butternut squash and apples go so well together, so roasting some cubed apples with the squash is a delicious addition. Good apples for cooking include Fuji, Granny Smith, Pink Lady, and Gala.
  • Pomegranate seeds: Sprinkle on some pomegranate seeds for additional color and sweet, tart flavor.

How to Make Bruschetta with Butternut Squash?

This autumn bruschetta is easy to make. I like to mix the goat cheese while the butternut squash is roasting in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to roast butternut squash and prepare goat cheese mixture.
  1. Season butternut squash: Add the small chunks of butternut squash cubes to the prepared sheet pan. Toss the butternut with olive oil, cinnamon, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and black pepper and redistribute into a single layer.
  2. Roast squash cubes: Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, until fork tender and golden brown. Toss them halfway through for even browning.
  3. Whip goat cheese: In a small bowl, whisk together the goat cheese and heavy cream until smooth. Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  4. Toast bread: Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
A collage of images showing how to assemble butternut squash bruschetta recipe.
  1. Assemble bruschetta: Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture on each slice of bread, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  2. Add roasted squash: Add the butternut squash mixture and sliced almonds or walnuts. Drizzle with honey, sea salt, and fresh sage, if using.

Make Ahead and Storage

Following the right storage instructions allows you to make this butternut crostini ahead of time. This allows you to get one step ahead if serving it as a party appetizer or as part of your Thanksgiving spread.

  • Make Ahead: Roast the squash and prepare the goat cheese mixture. Store each component separately in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
  • Storage: The assembled butternut squash bruschettas will keep for one day. After that, the bread becomes soggy and soaks up too much moisture.
Butternut bruschetta being drizzled with honey.

If you try this Butternut Squash Bruschetta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Butternut squash bruschetta with goat cheese from the top view.
Print

Butternut Squash Bruschetta Recipe

A festive and colorful butternut squash bruschetta recipe featuring cinnamon-spiced roasted squash cubes atop layers of sourdough bread, goat cheese, and cranberry sauce. This is the perfect recipe to serve as an appetizer or use up the leftovers the day after Thanksgiving.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 466kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Butternut Squash

  • 1 medium sized butternut squash peeled, deseeded, and cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Goat Cheese Spread

  • 8 ounces goat cheese at room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 3 stalks scallions chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped or pressed
  • ¼ cup parsley chopped

For The Bruschetta

  • 6 slices sourdough bread or any other crusty bread
  • 1 cup maple cranberry sauce
  • ½ cup sliced almonds or chopped walnuts
  • 1 tbs Honey (or more) optional drizzle
  • Sea salt optional sprinkle to finish
  • Handful of sage leaves chopped (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread the butternut squash cubes on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with the ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, turning halfway through until tender. Remove from the oven and set it aside to cool.
  • Place the goat cheese and heavy cream in a bowl. Using a fork, stir and “whip” until smooth.
  • Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  • Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
  • Spread the bread with 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  • Add some roasted squash cubes and sprinkle each slice with almonds or walnuts.
  • Drizzle with honey, a pinch of sea salt, and chopped sage, if using.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 bruschettas, which is ideal for 6 servings. We roasted the butternut squash but you can use leftover squash as well. 
  • Enjoy warm or cold: You can enjoy the roasted squash bruschetta warm, just as all the components come out of the oven, or chilled if the squash and goat cheese have been made ahead. If you prefer it warm, rewarm leftover squash on a baking sheet in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes, until warm.
  • Smear garlic on bread: For that traditional bruschetta approach, you have two options. You can smear a raw garlic clove over the surface of the toasted bread slices, or make a paste with roasted garlic and spread it on instead.
  • Storage: While you can store the leftovers in an airtight container for one day, we think this bruschetta tastes best on the day it is made.

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 1306mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/feed/ 10
Sweet Potato Stacks https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/#comments Thu, 03 Oct 2024 12:26:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78286 Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to…]]>

Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to serve alongside just about any main dish. A great alternative to classic sweet potato casserole, this recipe takes about 20 minutes of prep time when you follow the uncomplicated step-by-step instructions below.

After you give these crispy sweet potato stacks a try, we also have a Bacon Potato Roses and Sweet Potato Souffle recipe both of which are family favorites during the holiday season. And our Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes are a fun spin on traditional mashed potatoes.

Sweet potato stacks on a plate from the front view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While these sweet potato stacks look like an elevated showstopper, this is truly a simple side dish—they’re essentially sliced sweet potatoes in a muffin pan. The rest of the ingredients may already be in your fridge and pantry. Otherwise, they can be easily obtained at your local grocer. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Sweet potatoes: We used the traditional orange sweet potatoes in this recipe. They’re the most common type of sweet potato that you can find in stores and hold their shape beautifully when sliced. Seek out relatively narrow potatoes of similar diameter so they will fit into the muffin tin cups uniformly.
  • Fresh thyme leaves: We prepared our sweet potato stacks recipe with fresh thyme, though dried thyme will work, if that’s what you have on hand. Just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried. You can also swap in other fresh herbs, such as fresh rosemary and sage, if you prefer. But remember: small amounts go a long way!
  • Unsalted butter: If you only have salted butter in hand, that will work too. However, be sure to adjust the amount of additional salt you use in the seasoning step. While we love the flavor combination of butter and sweet potatoes, you can use an equal amount of olive oil or ghee for a dairy-free alternative.
  • Garlic: We tested this recipe with both fresh garlic and granulated garlic. We found that while both options are acceptable, the granulated garlic dispersed more evenly amongst the stacks, and we preferred the milder flavor overall. 
  • Seasonings: The naturally sweet flavor of the sweet potatoes doesn’t require much else by way of seasonings. And thus, we use an elegantly simple blend of Kosher salt and black pepper only. 
  • Maple Syrup (optional): If you’d like to lean into more of a sweet flavor profile, a drizzle of maple syrup adds a delicious touch. Alternatively, you can also make these sweet potato stacks with brown sugar.
  • Ground cinnamon (optional): If you’re adding maple syrup, ground cinnamon pairs well. Again, just remember that a little of this spice goes a long way.
  • Shredded Parmesan cheese (optional): If you’d like to make these sweet potato stackers more on the savory side, a ½ cup of grated parmesan cheese (or gruyere cheese) does the trick. Crispy parmesan sweet potato stacks are always a favorite when served with beef stew and pot roast.

How To Make Sweet Potato Stacks in A Muffin Tin?

Consider this recipe a grown-up version of a layered sweet potato bake. By finely slicing our sweet potatoes in muffin tins, we end up with lovely little stacks of potatoes that are crispy on the outside and buttery soft on the inside. 

  1. Preheat your oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. 
A collage of images showing how to prepare sweet potatoes to bake in a muffin pan.
  1. Grease your muffin tin: Using a pastry brush and 1 tablespoon of butter, apply a thin layer of coating to the inside of each individual muffin cup. Set the pan aside. 
  2. Slice your sweet potatoes: Using a mandolin or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly and evenly as possible. Transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  3. Prepare your potatoes: In the bowl of sweet potatoes, add the rest of the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If you’re going with the maple syrup and cinnamon, add them at this step. Or, alternatively, if you’re using Parmesan for a savory touch, add the grated cheese at this step.
  4. Coat your sweet potatoes: Using tongs (or your clean hands work fine too!), toss the sweet potatoes to ensure that all of the slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl. 
A collage of images showing how to make sweet potato stackers recipe.
  1. Assemble your sweet potato stacks: Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 (yes, 30!) ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes in the batches pictured here.
  2. Bake: Bake your garlic butter sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
  3. Cool and serve: Remove the muffin tin from the oven and allow your sweet potato stacks to cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Then, delicately remove them from each muffin cup using an offset spatula (or a butter knife) and transfer them onto a serving platter. Garnish each stack with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

If you plan on doing some advance meal preparations whether it be for a dinner party or holiday event, these muffin-tin sweet potatoes are the perfect flexible and easy side dish.

  • Make Ahead: These crispy sweet potato stacks can be prepped 1 day before you plan on serving them. Simply follow the instructions through Step 6, where you’ve assembled the stackers in the muffin tin, then wrap them tightly with aluminum foil and refrigerate. The next day, remove them from the refrigerator to bring to room temperature about 30 minutes before you plan on baking them, then bake as directed. 
  • Storage: If you have leftover sweet potato stackers, they will keep in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Be sure to bring them to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container.
  • Reheating: To reheat your leftover sweet potato stacks, place them on a baking sheet (there’s no need to grease it this time). Warm your stackers in a 350-degree F oven for 5-7 minutes, or until heated through.

If you make your own Sweet Potato Stacks following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

Sweet potatoes cooked in a muffin tin on a plate.
Print

Sweet Potato Stacks Recipe

Sweet potato stacks with crispy edges and tender centers, baked to perfection with butter and thyme—a showstopping side dish perfect for any time of the year, but especially for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinners when you want to impress.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 12 stacks
Calories 98kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 – 4 sweet potatoes peeled (approximately 2 ½ pounds)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme minced – plus more as garnish (or 1 teaspoon dried thyme)
  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter + 1 tablespoon for greasing the muffin tin (melted and cooled divided)
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons maple syrup optional
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. Brush each muffin cup of a 12-cup muffin tin using 1 tablespoon of butter (for the whole muffin tin). Set it aside.
  • Using a mandolin slicer or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly (and evenly) as possible. Transfer the sliced potatoes to a large mixing bowl.
  • In the bowl, add the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If using, add the maple syrup, and ground cinnamon.
  • Using tongs or clean hands, toss to ensure that all of the potato slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl.
  • Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes.
  • Bake sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven, let cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Using a butter knife or an offset spatula, carefully remove them from the muffin tray and transfer them onto a serving platter.
  • Garnish with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 roasted sweet potato stacks. The nutritional values below are per stack.
  • The size of the potatoes: When shopping for this recipe, pick out potatoes that are similar in size and large enough to fit in a muffin cup. 
  • Evenly sliced sweet potatoes are essential: The most crucial aspect of this recipe is that your sweet potato slices are thin and uniform in thickness (otherwise, baking times will be inconsistent). Using a mandoline slicer makes this task foolproof. If you don’t have one, then the next best option is a very sharp knife. Slicing them thinly with a knife requires a bit more patience, but it is doable.  Do your best to slice them as thinly (and evenly) as possible.
  • Greased muffin cups are the key to crispy sweet potato stacks: When testing this recipe, we tried lining the muffin cups with parchment paper, but the potatoes wouldn’t crisp. Don’t be shy when greasing your muffin cups – use plenty of butter. 
  • Layer plenty of sweet potatoes in your stacks: The sliced sweet potatoes in your muffin pan will compress while baking, so be sure to fill your muffin cups just slightly above the rim to get the most height out of your stackers. We used 30 slices of sweet potatoes in each muffin tin. You might consider it a lot, but it will shrink after it is baked.
  • There is no need to cover it with foil: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover the sweet potato stack with aluminum foil during the baking process. 
  • Make ahead: You can prep everything a day before, cover it tightly with foil, and store it in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, remove it from the oven 30 minutes before you plan to bake it and bake it as directed in the recipe.
  • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8160IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/feed/ 2
Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/#comments Thu, 26 Sep 2024 12:31:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11121 Pumpkin season is here, and today’s recipe, pumpkin oat muffins, is exactly what you need. Not only do they not…]]>

Pumpkin season is here, and today’s recipe, pumpkin oat muffins, is exactly what you need. Not only do they not require much effort in the kitchen, but they also make your whole house smell like pumpkin season. 

Like our Easy Pumpkin Bread and Almond Flour Pumpkin Bread, these muffins are a quick breakfast perfect for busy mornings throughout the fall season and best enjoyed with your morning coffee.

Pumpkin oat muffins on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This pumpkin oatmeal muffins recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Coconut Oil: I used melted and cooled coconut oil, but you can also use avocado oil, olive oil, or unsalted butter (though it won’t be dairy-free) if preferred.
  • Sweetener: One of my favorite natural sweeteners is pure maple syrup, but you can also use honey. I would not swap the liquid sweetener out for a dry granulated sweetener (like coconut sugar or brown sugar) because this will affect the moisture content.
  • Eggs: Use two large eggs at room temperature. For a vegan pumpkin and oats muffins recipe, use flax eggs. To make flax eggs that is equal to two eggs, mix two tablespoons of ground flaxseeds (aka flaxseed meal) with 5 tablespoons of water. Let the mixture sit for 10 minutes until it has a gel-like consistency. Use it in the recipe in place of eggs as written.
  • Pumpkin: Make sure to use pure pumpkin puree and not pumpkin pie filling. If you prefer fresh pumpkin puree, you can make yours following this Homemade Pumpkin Puree recipe.
  • Milk: I used unsweetened almond milk, but other options include full-fat coconut milk, cashew milk, or oat milk. You can also use regular whole milk instead.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Whole Wheat Flour: Whole wheat flour keeps adds extra fiber but regular all-purpose flour can be used instead.
  • Kosher Salt: Salt enhances all those oatmeal and pumpkin flavors.
  • Baking Soda: Baking soda helps the muffins rise and promotes a golden brown color.
  • Pumpkin Pie Spice
  • Old-Fashioned Oats: The types of oats you use will determine the final texture of your muffins. I prefer Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats because they are chewier and more substantial. Quick oats make the muffins too mushy, so I do not recommend using them.
  • Raisins: I highly recommend the raisins because they add the right amount of sweetness. Dried cranberries (apple juice sweetened preferred) are a good substitute.

Optional Add-Ins

Here are some additional mix-ins you can add to these healthy oat pumpkin muffins to make it your own:

  • Pumpkin Seeds: Sprinkle the tops of the muffins with pumpkin seeds (pepitas).
  • Chocolate Chips: To give it that pumpkin-and-chocolate vibe, sprinkle with dark chocolate chips (affiliate link) or white chocolate chips.
  • Nuts: Toss in some toasted and chopped pecans or walnuts for crunch.

How to Make Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins?

These oatmeal pumpkin muffins come together in a flash; the hardest part is waiting for them to bake in the oven. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to make this healthy breakfast pumpkin muffin recipe.
  1. Prep muffin pan: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 degrees C. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment paper liners. If you do not have liners, generously coat the muffin cups with coconut oil, butter, or cooking spray.
  2. Whisk wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk the melted coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, pumpkin puree, almond milk, and vanilla extract until smooth.
  3. Mix the dry ingredients: In a separate medium bowl, mix the whole wheat flour, Kosher salt, baking soda, pumpkin pie spice, and oats until combined.
  4. Make the muffin batter: Add the dry ingredients to the bowl of wet ingredients. Mix until just combined—do not overmix. Fold in the raisins.
Person portioning the muffin batter in a muffin tin and then topping each cup with chocolate chips.
  1. Fill muffin pan: Scoop the batter into each cup, about ⅔ full. Top with pumpkin seeds or chocolate chips if using.
  2. Bake: Bake for 25-27 minutes until a toothpick inserted into the center of a muffin comes out clean. 
  3. Cool: Allow to cool in the pan for 10 minutes before removing. Transfer the muffins to a wire rack to cool completely. Enjoy plain, with a drizzle of almond butter or a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

If I have the extra time, I usually bake a double batch of these oatmeal pumpkin spice muffins as they make the best snack or quick breakfast. You can easily grab one and go because they store well. Here are my best storage tips to keep these muffins fresh and moist as long as possible:

  • Storage: Store muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for 3-4 days. The cold moisture in the fridge will draw out some of the moisture.
  • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer to a freezer-safe container or freezer bag, squeezing out all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight or right on the kitchen counter to room temperature.
  • Reheat: Pop one in the microwave for 10-15 seconds or reheat in an oven or toaster oven until warm, about 5 minutes.
Healthy pumpkin oatmeal muffins fresh out of the oven in a muffin tin.

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward for any home baker, there are a few things worth mentioning to help you succeed on your first try. Here are a few helpful tips for the best oatmeal pumpkin muffin recipe:

  • Use parchment liners: The parchment paper liners make for easy removal and no messy clean-up. I love these Parchment Liners (affiliate link).
  • Do not overmix: The key to light and fluffy pumpkin muffins with oatmeal is not to overmix. This will prevent too much gluten from forming in the batter.
  • Make your own pumpkin spice: If you can’t find it at the grocery store or prefer to make your own, mix 3 tablespoons ground cinnamon, 2 teaspoons ground ginger, 2 teaspoons nutmeg, 1 teaspoon allspice, and 1 teaspoon ground cloves. Stir to combine. This makes 5 tablespoons of pumpkin spice, you can use some of it in this muffin recipe and store the remainder in an airtight container in a cool place for up to 6 months.

FAQs

Why are my pumpkin muffins gummy?

Pumpkin muffins become gummy when you overmix the batter. This means that too much gluten was developed during the mixing process, making tough, dense muffins.

If you try this Healthy Pumpkin Muffins recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Other Pumpkin Recipes You Might Like

Healthy oatmeal pumpkin muffins from the top view.
Print

Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins Recipe

Easy and healthy Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins are made with whole wheat flour and rolled oats and are minimally sweetened with maple syrup. They are the perfect grab-and-go breakfast or an afternoon snack when craving something sweet.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 12 muffins
Calories 220kcal

Ingredients

  • cup coconut oil melted and cooled
  • ¾ cup maple syrup
  • 2 large eggs at room temperature (or flax eggs)
  • 1 cup pumpkin puree (unsweetened) (not pumpkin pie filling)
  • ¼ cup unsweetened almond milk or regular milk
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 ¾ cup whole wheat flour 8.9 oz./266g
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda 5g
  • 2 teaspoons pumpkin pie spice
  • cup old-fashioned oats 40g
  • ½ cup raisins roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds as garnish (optional)
  • ¼ cup chocolate chips as topping (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 degrees C. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment liners. If you do not have parchment liners, generously coat the cups with oil.
  • To prepare the wet ingredients, place coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, pumpkin puree, almond milk, and vanilla extract in a large bowl. Whisk until thoroughly combined. Set aside.
  • To prepare the dry ingredients, whisk together whole wheat flour, kosher salt, baking soda, pumpkin pie spice and oats in a separate large mixing bowl until fully incorporated.
  • Fold the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and mix just until combined. Do not overmix.
  • Fold in the raisins.
  • Scoop the batter into each muffin cup, about ⅔ full. If preferred, top with the pumpkin seeds or chocolate chips.
  • Bake for 25-27 minutes until a toothpick, when inserted, comes out clean.
  • Let cool for 10 minutes before removing from the pan onto a wire rack to cool.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 muffins. The nutritional values below are per muffin.
  • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store in an airtight container for upto 4 days.
  • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer your muffins to a freezer bag, squeezing out all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Flax eggs: If you prefer a vegan pumpkin oatmeal muffins recipe, use flax eggs instead. Mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal) with 5 tablespoons of water to make flax eggs. Let it sit for 5-10 minutes or until it reaches a gel-like consistency. Use it in the recipe in place of eggs.

Nutrition

Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 27mg | Sodium: 308mg | Potassium: 235mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 3220IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/feed/ 47
Muffin Tin Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/#comments Sun, 25 Aug 2024 21:31:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1836 If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes…]]>

If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes like Smashed Fingerlings—crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and perfect for dipping—or our creamy and comforting Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes. These dishes are just as delicious and easy to prepare as this muffin tin potatoes gratin recipe, offering more ways to enjoy this versatile vegetable!

Scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin baked until golden brown on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Muffin Pan Potatoes

Baking potatoes in a muffin pan is easy and quick. Plus, this recipe is made with a short list of simple ingredients readily available at the grocery store. We will need the following:

Ingredients to make scalloped potatoes in muffin pan.
  • Potatoes: You can use a few types of white potatoes to cook in muffin cups. Go for Russet potatoes if you prefer a fluffy and light texture (similar to french fries) or use yellow potatoes, like Yukon gold potatoes, for a creamy, tender bite. If both are unavailable, red potatoes are the next best substitute.
  • Butter: We need unsalted butter to grease the muffin tins, but olive oil or avocado oil cooking spray can also be used.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic offers a delicious savory punch, but garlic powder is a good substitute for a milder garlic taste.
  • Cheese: Parmesan cheese has a rich, slightly nutty flavor that works beautifully with scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. Gruyere cheese or cheddar cheese would be just as delicious.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the cheesy potatoes to shine. But depending on your preference and serving accompaniments, you can try additional seasonings, such as chili powder, ground cumin, or Italian seasoning.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme offers a delicate and subtle earthy flavor, but you can substitute with dried thyme if fresh isn’t available, using about 1 teaspoon. Alternatively, you can other herbs like fresh rosemary, fresh parsley, dill, or chives, based on what you have on hand.
  • Cream: Heavy cream will provide a rich, buttery flavor, but whole milk can also be used.

How to Make Muffin Tin Potatoes?

Making scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin is straightforward and rewarding. The potato mixture can be prepped and ready in 15 minutes, with the oven doing the rest. Follow the below step-by-step instructions to create delicious, individual muffin tin potato stacks that are guaranteed to impress.

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin potatoes gratin.
  1. Prepare potato slices: Slice each into 1/4-inch thin slices using a mandolin slicer. If you do not own a mandoline, you can use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as possible.
  2. Grease muffin tray: Generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter using a pastry brush.
  3. Begin stacking potatoes: Stack 3-4 slices of potatoes in each muffin cup of the prepared muffin tin. Then, sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin scalloped potatoes.
  1. Add a second layer of potatoes: Top each stack with 3-4 more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle with more garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step until the muffin cup is fully filled with sliced potatoes. Continue to fill the rest of the muffin cups following the same order of ingredients.
  2. Add heavy cream: Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each potato stack.
  3. Bake: Transfer it to the preheated oven and bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender and golden brown.
  4. Cool and serve: Cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then run a knife around the edges, remove the potatoes, and serve. Garnish with fresh thyme leaves, if desired.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

While these muffin tin potatoes are best enjoyed fresh from the oven, they can be made ahead, stored, and reheated for later enjoyment. Here are some tips to help you make the most of these muffin tin potato stacks:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the scalloped potato cups as instructed, but do not bake. Cover tightly with foil and place in the fridge for up to 1 day. When ready to bake, remove it from the refrigerator 30 minutes before baking it in the oven. Bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Be sure to cool the potatoes completely before storing them. Warm potatoes will create excess moisture and condensation, making them soggy.
  • Reheat: Reheat the leftover mini potato gratin stacks in a preheated low-heat oven (300 degrees F) or toaster oven to ensure they stay crispy and delicious. 

What to Serve It With?

You can serve muffin pan scalloped potatoes as a side dish or an appetizer. They are perfect when served with eggs for breakfast or your favorite meat dishes. Some of my favorite dishes to serve them with are:

Potatoes cooked in muffin cups served with eggs for breakfast.
  • Meat: Whether serving these potatoes as part of a casual weeknight dinner or an elevated side dish for special occasions and Christmas dinners, meat and potatoes are a match made in heaven. The crispy cheesy potato stacks go especially well with Prime Rib or Beef Tenderloin and a fresh salad.
  • Turkey: You can’t have Thanksgiving without potatoes, and what better way to impress your guests than with a platter of scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. These are best served to a crowd with a classic Thanksgiving Turkey. Or, you could try Baked Turkey Wings or Baked Turkey Breasts when serving a small crowd.
  • Breakfast: Don’t save these potatoes just for the holidays. Think of them as a year-round recipe that can be served as part of your breakfast with eggs and bacon or alongside Feta and Spinach Frittata. If you are inspired, make cheesy bacon potato stacks by tossing in some cooked and crumbled bacon (or turkey bacon) between the slices.
  • Snack: There’s nothing more comforting than potatoes when you need something to munch on. Dollop the tops with sour cream or with Guacamole for a fun and delicious appetizer.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

While the recipe is straightforward, there are a few things to remember to succeed on your first try. Here are some of my expert tips for the best muffin tin potatoes recipe:

  • Check for doneness: The cooking time will vary depending on the thickness of the potato slices. If you can easily pierce the center of the potato stacks with a knife and they appear to have crispy edges, they are ready.
  • Pay attention to the size of the potatoes: No matter what potato you choose, muffin tin scalloped potatoes are best made with long and narrow-sized potatoes. As you shop for this recipe, take a few extra minutes to look for potatoes roughly the same size and diameter as your muffin tin.
  • Peel the potatoes: Peeling the potato skin is optional, but during our recipe testing, we found potatoes without the skins provided the best texture.
  • Mandoline will create the most uniform slices: A mandoline is a handy kitchen tool that will give you even slices. A sharp knife and a steady hand will suffice if you do not own a mandoline.
  • Brush the muffin cups generously with butter: Butter is potatoes’ best friend. We want to be generous when brushing the muffin tins with butter, as this will create crispier potatoes and easy removal. We do not recommend using parchment paper liners for this recipe.
  • Layer or toss with the seasonings: We found it easier to stack the potatoes, and then layer with the seasonings. However, you also have the option to toss the potato slices with the garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme in a large mixing bowl, then stack as directed.

More Potato Recipes

If you make this Muffin Tin Potatoes recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Muffin tin potatoes garnished with thyme.
Print

Muffin Tin Potatoes Recipe

Muffin Tin Potatoes is the easiest yet most delicious appetizer or side dish. Stacked potato slices layered with garlic, parmesan cheese, and fresh thyme baked in a muffin cup to perfection.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 114kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium russet potatoes peeled, about 1 ½ pounds
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed or 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme
  • 12 tablespoons heavy cream or whole milk

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
  • Slice each potato into 1/4-inch (or thinner) slices using a mandoline. If you do not have one, use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as you can.
  • Using the pastry brush, generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter.
  • Stack three slices of potatoes in each muffin cup. Lightly sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
  • Top each stack with three more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle a third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step again until you reach the top of the muffin tin cup.
  • Continue with the rest of the muffin cups, following the same steps.
  • Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each muffin cup.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender.
  • Let cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then gently remove from the pan and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, baked in a 12-cup standart muffin tin, make 12 stacked potatoes. The nutrition information below is per potato stack.
  • Generously butter the muffin tins with butter: Do not skip buttering the muffin tins generously with butter; otherwise, it’ll be hard to get the butter stacks after they are baked. We tested this recipe with parchment muffin liners and thought the stacked potatoes were not as crispy.
  • Number of potato slices per cup: The number of slices per cup depends on the thickness of your potato slices. Aim for filling them all the way to the top and pack as many as you can. They tend to shrink as they bake.
  • Thickness of the slices: While a mandoline does a beautiful job, a sharp knife is just as efficient. And if potato slices are a bit thicker, do not worry; it will still bake beautifully. You’ll see in the video below (that I made in 2017) even thicker potato slices bake beautifully.
  • Covering it with foil: During our recipe, we found some versions of this recipe that recommended covering it with aluminum foil while baking. We tried that and did not feel it was necessary.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover potato stacks to room temperature, place them in an airtight container, and store them in the refrigerator for up to three days. Reheat in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes or until they are warmed to your liking.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Muffin Pan Potato Gratins recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 114kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 174mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/feed/ 28
Almond Flour Banana Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/#comments Tue, 20 Aug 2024 15:22:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15318 This banana muffins with almond flour recipe is inspired by my Almond Flour Banana Bread. These muffins are a quick,…]]>

This banana muffins with almond flour recipe is inspired by my Almond Flour Banana Bread. These muffins are a quick, easy, portable alternative and add to my library of Recipes with Almond Flour.

If you love baking with almond flour, be sure to also check out my Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Carrot Almond Flour Muffins, Almond Flour Blueberry Muffins, and Zucchini Almond Flour Muffins.

Gluten free banana muffins with almond flour and chocolate chips on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

These banana almond muffins are made with simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry and fridge. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Almond Flour: Go for blanched almond flour for best results. You can either pick up a bag from the store or make your own DIY Almond Flour. Almond meal (ground almonds with the skins) can be used instead, but the muffins will turn out more dense.
  • Baking Powder
  • Baking Soda
  • Ground Cinnamon: A hint of cinnamon adds a delicate background warmth.
  • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt is needed to enhance that banana flavor.
  • Extra Ripe Bananas: For best results, use overripe bananas. Brown-speckled bananas provide natural sweetness and make super moist banana muffins.
  • Sweetener: My favorite sugar is coconut sugar, but using an equal amount of brown sugar or pure maple syrup would also work. Alternatively, your favorite keto sweeteners, like monk fruit or Erythritol (affiliate link) can be used as well. If you have less of a sweet tooth, omit the sugar for a no added sugar version.
  • Large Eggs: Eggs provide the right amount of lift and structure, especially for gluten-free almond flour. Bring the eggs to room temperature before mixing.
  • Vanilla Extract: A hint of warm vanilla adds just another level of flavor.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Dark Chocolate Chips: Toss in about ¼ cup chocolate chips (affiliate link) and have some extra on hand for sprinkling on top too.
  • Chopped Nuts: Give them a banana nut muffin vibe with ¼ cup chopped walnuts, almonds, or pecans.
  • Dried Fruits: Add a pop of sweetness with raisins, dried cranberries, or dried cherries.
  • Make it paleo friendly: For the paleo version, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.

How to Make Banana Muffins with Almond Flour?

Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make these gluten-free banana muffins:

A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Prep: Position the oven rack in the center of the oven. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Line a 12-cup muffin pan with parchment paper muffin liners.
  2. Mix dry ingredients: In a large bowl, mix together almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, ground cinnamon, and salt.
  3. Whisk wet ingredients: In another large mixing bowl, whisk mashed bananas, coconut sugar, eggs, and vanilla extract until thoroughly combined.
  4. Make muffin batter: Place the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir with a rubber spatula until just combined. Do not overmix.
Almond banana muffin batter in a muffin tin.
  1. Fill muffin cups: Divide the batter into each muffin cup, filling about ¾ way full. If preferred, sprinkle them with chocolate chips.
  2. Bake: Bake muffins for 25-30 minutes. The muffins are ready when a toothpick or cake tester inserted into the center of the muffin comes out clean.
  3. Cool: Cool in the muffin tin for 10-15 minutes. Then, place the muffins on a cooling rack to cool completely.

How to Store, Freeze, & Thaw?

What I love most about this almond flour banana muffin recipe is that you can make a batch and enjoy it throughout the week, as long as they are stored properly. Here are my best storage and freezing tips:

  • Storage: Store muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 days. For longer storage, store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Wrap each muffin in plastic wrap, then store it in a plastic freezer bag. Muffins can be frozen for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, or on the kitchen counter to room temperature.
  • Reheat: If you prefer your muffins warm, reheat in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes, or pop one in the microwave for 5-10 seconds, until warm.
Banana and almond flour muffins in a muffin tin right after they come out of the oven.

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy to make. There are a few things that I’d like to share to help you make the best almond flour banana nut muffins on your first try:

  • Ripe bananas: Use extra ripe bananas for natural fruity sweetness and a better texture. I’ve found the best way to mash bananas is either with a potato masher or the back of a fork. Since bananas vary so much in size, it’s best to weigh the bananas after mashing (rather than using a measuring cup) to ensure the most precise measurement and the best consistency. 
  • Do not overmix: Just like traditional muffins with regular flour, do not overmix the batter. Overmixing will make them dense, which will result in them loosing their fluffy texture.
  • Don’t overbake: Start checking the muffins with the toothpick test at the 25-minute mark. The muffins will look underbaked, but they continue to bake while cooling.
  • Make it vegan: Vegan almond flour banana muffins will not rise as much but taste good. For the best egg substitute, substitute the eggs with flax eggs (1 flax egg = 1 tablespoon flaxseed meal + 3 tablespoons water).
  • Use parchment liners: Parchment paper liners (affiliate link) are the best and most efficient way to bake almond flour muffins and prevent sticking.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe with coconut flour?

No. coconut flour is super absorbent and will alter the texture of the muffins dramatically. Stick to finely ground almond flour or almond meal.

Why did my almond flour muffins sink?

Muffins made with almond flour can sink if they are underbaked or overmixed, if there is too much moisture in the batter, if the oven temperature is lower than what is listed in the recipe, or if the leavening agents are not fresh.


If you try this Almond Banana Muffin recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Almond Flour Recipes You Might Like

Almond Flour Banana Muffins on a plate from the top view.
Print

Almond Flour Banana Muffins

Moist and fluffy Almond Flour Banana Muffins that are gluten-free, dairy-free and paleo-friendly. Quick and easy to make, these low-carb muffins can be served as a healthy breakfast or snack.
Course Naturally sweetened dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 12 muffins
Calories 213kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups almond flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 3 bananas overripe & mashed
  • ¼ cup coconut sugar or brown sugar or keto friendly sweetener of choice
  • 3 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ cup chocolate chips optional

Instructions

  • Place a rack in the center of the oven and preheat to 350 degrees F (180 C). Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchement paper liners. Set it aside.
  • Prepare the dry ingredients by placing almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, ground cinnamon, and salt in a large bowl. Whisk to combine all ingredients.
  • Prepare the wet ingredients by placing the mashed bananas, coconut sugar, eggs, and vanilla extract in a separate large bowl and whisking to combine thoroughly.
  • Place the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir until just combined. Do not over mix.
  • Divide the batter, using about 2.5 oz. of muffin batter per cup, into each muffin cup so that you have 12 muffins. If using, sprinkle the top of the muffins with chocolate chips.
  • Place in the oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. A toothpick or cake tester should come out clean when inserted into the center of the muffin. At first, muffins might look underdone, but they will continue to cook while cooling in the muffin tin.
  • Let it cool in the pan for 10-15 minutes before removing it and placing it on a wire rack for at least 1 hour before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 muffins. The nutritional values below are per muffin and do not include the calories from optional chocolate chips.
  • For paleo banana bread muffins: To make almond flour banana muffins that are paleo friendly, mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar and use it in place of baking powder.
  • Store: After they come to room temperature, leftover muffins can be stored in an airtight container. They will stay fresh for up to 5 days as long as they are stored in the fridge.
  • Freezing and thawing: Almond banana muffins can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months. To prevent freezer burn, place them in an airtight container and remove all the air. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 200mg | Potassium: 122mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 79IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 1mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/feed/ 44
Eggplant Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2024 11:59:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77481 It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh…]]>

It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh basil abundant in the garden, it is the easiest yet most delicious summer recipe. While I make my Burrata Caprese often, this summer, I have been loving this grilled eggplant caprese. 

If you are a fan of eggplant recipes, this easy recipe is a great way to use them in your daily cooking.

Eggplant Caprese on a plate garnished with basil leaves.

Ingredients

The list below includes two sets of items: what you’ll need to grill the eggplant and what you’ll need to make the eggplant Caprese salad.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.
  • Eggplant: The widely available globe eggplants work beautifully in this recipe. However, if you can get your hands on other eggplant varieties, like Italian Graffiti eggplants, you can use them as well. Keep in mind that each variety offers a slightly different flavor and texture, but all will work beautifully in this recipe. There is no need to peel the eggplant as the skin is edible. 
  • Olive Oil: This is used both for the marinade and the final drizzle. Choose an extra virgin olive oil that offers a rich but subtle flavor.
  • Balsamic Vinegar: We are using balsamic vinegar both in the marinade and in the assembled dish. I recommend a good-quality aged balsamic vinegar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite brands would work.
  • Garlic: Freshly minced or pressed garlic adds a pungent, savory depth to the marinade.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt (or flaky sea salt) and ground black pepper are all you need for seasoning this eggplant recipe.
  • Tomatoes: If you can find them, use sweet, ripe heirloom tomatoes. However, any type of tomato would work in this caprese salad with eggplant. For even layering, try to choose tomatoes that are similar in size.
  • Fresh mozzarella cheese: Sliced thickly, fresh mozzarella pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and eggplant. While it is not traditional, you can take things up a notch by using burrata instead.
  • Fresh Basil Leaves: Fresh basil is key for that authentic Caprese taste. We recommend tearing larger leaves by hand instead of chopping them with a knife, which will bruise them.
  • Balsamic Glaze – Optional: This is an optional ingredient, but if you have it on hand, drizzle it over the salad for a touch of sweetness and acidity.

How to make this recipe?

Creating this eggplant Caprese is simple and straightforward. It starts with grilling the eggplant and then assembling the salad. Below are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Fire up the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
Person showing how to prepare eggplant to make caprese with eggplant.
  1. Prepare the eggplant: Slice eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds and place them in a single layer on a baking sheet.
  2. Make the marinade: In a shallow baking dish, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
  3. Marinade the eggplant: Place the sliced eggplant in the marinade and make sure that they are coated on both sides. Let them rest for 10 minutes. 
  4. Grill: Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate for 4-5 minutes, flip, and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes just until tender to maintain its structure and avoid a mushy texture. 
A collage of images showing how to assemble the caprese with eggplant and tomatoes.
  1. Assemble: Arrange the grilled eggplant slices with sliced mozzarella, tomato slices, and fresh basil leaves on a large serving platter.
  2. Season and garnish: Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze) and sprinkle with salt and black pepper. Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve immediately.

How To Serve Caprese Eggplant?

The beauty of this Italian classic is that it can be served in many different ways, making it a versatile summer dish that you can prepare on a moment’s notice. Here are some serving suggestions:

  • A light meal or appetizer: Serve it with a loaf of crusty bread for an impressive summer appetizer that is great for serving a crowd.
  • A vegetarian dinner: Place eggplant caprese stacks on top of a bowl of a hearty grain like quinoa or wild rice for a complete vegetarian meal.
  • Side Dish with grilled meats and seafood: If you are wondering what to serve with eggplant caprese, know that any grilled protein would work. I especially like to pair it with my Grilled Wild Salmon and Shrimp and Vegetable Kabobs.
  • Make it a sandwich or a wrap: Use the eggplant mozzarella stacks to make a quick sandwich with Italian bread or a wrap with flour tortilla for a quick lunch.
Person serving eggplant Caprese salad along with wine.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

If you make your own Eggplant Caprese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Eggplant caprese on a plate from the top view.
Print

Eggplant Caprese Recipe

Grilled eggplant slices layered with mozzarella cheese and juicy tomatoes garnished with basil leaves. If you are a fan of the classic Italian Caprese, be sure to try this eggplant version.
Course Salad
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 279kcal

Ingredients

For The Eggplant

  • 1 large eggplant or two medium eggplant (approximately 1 lb)
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Caprese

  • 1 lb. fresh tomatoes any tomatoes would work (we prefer heirloom or cherry tomatoes) sliced 1/2 inch thick
  • 8 oz. fresh mozzarella sliced ½ inch thick
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze optional
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
  • Slice the eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds—place as a single layer on a baking sheet.
  • To make the marinade, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (9X13) until combined.
  • Place the eggplant slices in the marinade, coating them fully on both sides. Let them rest for 5-10 minutes. When ready to grill, remove them onto a platter shaking the excess marinade.
  • Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate and cook for 4-5 minutes until lightly golden brown. Using a spatula, flip and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes or until tender.
  • To assemble the eggplant caprese, arrange grilled eggplant, sliced juicy tomatoes, and mozzarella in an overlapping pattern on a large serving platter. Alternatively, you can layer them in stacks starting with eggplant slices followed by mozzarella cheese, sliced tomatoes and fresh basil leaves.
  • Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze, if using). Sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 7-8 (loose) cups of eggplant caprese, which is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cooking Eggplant: We made this recipe using grilled eggplant since it’s perfect for the summer months. However, you can enjoy this eggplant dish all year round. You don’t have to stick to grilling; try air-frying, sautéing in a skillet, or baking in the oven your eggplant for equally delicious results.
  • Crispy Eggplant: Another alternative to grilling eggplant could be my Baked Crispy Eggplant or Breaded Eggplant in Air Fryer. Coating sliced eggplant with a mixture of panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, and other seasonings adds yet another layer of flavor to the eggplant caprese.
  • Salting eggplant: It is not necessary to salt eggplant if you buy it from a supermarket during the summer months when it is in season. Thanks to the advancements in eggplant farming, farmers have bred out much of that signature bitterness, especially in the globe eggplants you find in US supermarkets. However, if you prefer to salt it, you can do so by following our guide on salting eggplant.
  • Serve at room temperature: While you can make this salad a few hours in advance, I find that it is best when served at room temperature. For the best results, simply take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 279kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 827mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 957IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 213mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/feed/ 0
Greek Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:36:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77332 This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting…]]>

This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting with summer’s bounty while staying traditional, I serve this salad throughout the warm weather season.

If you are a fan of fresh summer salads, make Tomato Cucumber Caprese Salad, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with Feta, and Strawberry Spinach Salad.

Tomato cucumber Greek salad in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients for Greek Tomato Cucumber Salad

You will need just a few simple ingredients to make this Greek tomato and cucumber salad with feta. Feel free to experiment with substitutions and tips provided to suit your taste and what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need:

The dressing Ingredients:

  • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a buttery, fruity and smooth flavor.
  • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice makes a light, bright dressing. If you prefer more acidity, you can also use red wine vinegar.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic gives us an extra punchy bite. If you do not have any fresh garlic cloves on hand, swap them out for ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder.
  • Oregano: Fresh oregano is deliciously aromatic and makes you feel like you’re on the cobblestone streets of the Mediterranean. If you grow oregano in your backyard, this is a great use for it. If you prefer a mild oregano taste, use half the amount of dried oregano.
  • Seasonings: An easy and simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances those fresh summer vegetables.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Salad Ingredients:

  • Fresh Cucumbers: I love Persian cucumbers for their delicate flavor, crunchy texture, and thinner skin. That being said, English cucumbers have fewer seeds and can also be used in this cucumber tomato feta cheese salad recipe. If you can’t find either one, regular cucumbers can also be used.
  • Fresh Tomatoes: This recipe would work with any type of tomato. During the summer months, I usually use cherry tomatoes, grape tomatoes, or colorful heirloom tomatoes. However, other tomatoes, such as vine-ripened or Roma tomatoes, would also work.
  • Onions: Thinly sliced red onion provides color and flavor. If you do not prefer the taste of raw onion, thinly slice one bunch of green onion for a milder onion flavor.
  • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives are a classic when making this Mediterranean cucumber tomato salad, but black olives are a great substitute. If you are not a fan, you can leave them out.
  • Fresh herbs: I kept it simple with fresh parsley, but you can toss in any fresh herb available in your kitchen, including fresh mint, fresh dill, or fresh basil.
  • Crumbled feta cheese: Tangy feta cheese is the crowning glory of this healthy feta salad and it adds a creamy, salty brininess. Fresh feta can be found in the cheese section of the grocery store. If you are not a fan of salads with feta cheese, you can leave it out.

Optional Add-Ins and Variations

As it is with any iconic recipe, the authentic Greek Salad everyone seems to love can be customized with various (optional) add-ins and substitutions. Below are a few that I tried and recommend:

  • Dressing: While my Greek cucumber salad dressing is pretty basic, you can take it up a notch by using my Lemon Salad Dressing (with Dijon mustard), Red Wine Vinaigrette, or Lemon Balsamic Dressing.
  • Sweetener: Adding a small amount of sugar helps with balancing out the acidity. I like adding a small amount of honey or maple syrup. If that sounds good to you, make this recipe with my Mediterranean Salad Dressing.
  • Bell pepper: Toss in thinly sliced green or red bell peppers, or roasted red peppers.
  • Capers/Pepperoncini: Toss in a handful of drained and rinsed capers or sliced pepperoncini.
  • Salad greens: While leafy greens are not traditionally added to classic Greek salad, you can certainly pile all the ingredients on top of your favorite salad greens, such as romaine lettuce, mixed greens, or baby spinach.

How to Make Greek Cucumber Salad?

I love making this Greek cucumber tomato feta salad because all it takes is a quick whisk of the easy homemade Greek salad dressing and a few minutes of chopping the fresh veggies. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to make the tomato cucumber Greek salad recipe.
  1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper until combined. Alternatively, you can place everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
  2. Assemble salad ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, place sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and crumbled feta cheese.
  3. Toss: Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  4. Serve: Enjoy immediately or cover and store in the fridge until ready to serve.

Make Ahead and Storage Instructions

This tomato cuke feta salad is great for making ahead as long as you store the ingredients properly. Prep the ingredients a couple of hours (or up to a day) ahead of time to maintain the integrity of the vegetables. Here’s how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: Dice the vegetables into bite-sized pieces, then store them separately in an airtight container in the fridge. Crumble or cube the feta and store it in a separate container in the refrigerator. Assemble the dressing and keep it refrigerated in a mason jar. When ready to serve, assemble the prepared veggies and cheese, give the dressing a good shake, toss, and enjoy.
  • Storage: Leftover dressed cucumber Greek salad can be stored for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

What to Serve with this Cucumber Tomato Greek Salad?

This is a great side dish to bring to all your summer barbecues, yet equally delicious to enjoy at home as a main course with grilled protein for a full meal. Some of my favorite ways to serve this cucumber tomato and feta salad include:

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy, I’d like to point out a few helpful tips for the best results on your first try:

  • Cut vegetables roughly the same size: Slicing and dicing the vegetables about the same size ensures you get each one of the vegetables in every bite.
  • Rest for 15 minutes: For the best flavor, let the cucumber and tomato salad rest for 15 minutes before enjoying it to allow the ingredients to meld together.
  • Pay attention to feta cheese and salt: Different brands of feta cheese will be saltier than others. I like to make the dressing, add the feta, toss it all together, then taste and add any additional salt, if necessary.
  • Tomatoes and cucumbers will release their juices: The water from the fresh tomatoes and cucumbers will naturally release when you add the dressing. If you prefer, you can serve the salad with a slotted spoon to hold back the excess water.

FAQs

What is the dressing made of in a traditional Greek salad?

The traditional Greek salad dressing is made with good-quality extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice (or red wine vinegar), fresh garlic, fresh oregano, salt, and black pepper.

What is the difference between Greek salad and Italian salad?

Greek salad focuses on simplicity, using fresh vegetables, a simple dressing, salty feta cheese, and olives. Italian salad is more herbaceous and savory, thanks to a wider variety of vegetables, a more complex dressing, and different cheese options.

Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

If you make this Easy Greek Cucumber Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Greek cucumber tomato salad in a bowl with serving spoons on the side.
Print

Greek Cucumber Salad Recipe

This vibrant Greek Cucumber salad recipe combines crunchy cucumbers, juicy tomatoes, and creamy feta cheese with a zesty dressing, perfect as a refreshing side or light meal.
Course Salad, Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 311kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced or pressed
  • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano or ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and diced or 1 English cucumber
  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes cut in half or 4-5 Roma tomatoes – 15 oz.
  • ¼ cup sliced red onion thinly sliced
  • 1 cup Kalamata olives pitted and sliced
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 cup feta cheese crumbled

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper in a small bowl until well combined. Alternatively, you can put everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
  • Place cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and feta cheese in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss to combine.
  • Serve right away or store in the fridge until ready to serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe (depending on the size of your vegetables) makes about 6-7 cups of cucumber and tomato salad, which is ideal for four servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more salt to the recipe. Some brands tend to be saltier than others, so it is best to give it a taste.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container for up to 2 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 1553mg | Potassium: 463mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1252IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 247mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/feed/ 1
Pesto Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 18:46:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=52273 Why Should You Make This Recipe? Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of.…]]>

Why Should You Make This Recipe?

Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes. 

  • This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients?
  • Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this herby and robust dressing. Whether you use pesto sauce for salad (or pasta salad!), to drizzle on pizza, or even to top grilled meat, your tastebuds will thank you.
Basil Pesto Salad dressing in a jar

Ingredients

For this pesto dressing recipe, you will need:

  • Fresh basil leaves: It goes without saying your basil should be fresh and free of any bruises. I used green basil here, but you can use purple basil if you prefer.
  • Pine nuts: If you have the time, toasting your pine nuts in an empty skillet for 3-4 minutes will produce a rich, earthy vinaigrette.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Acid: White wine vinegar and fresh lemon juice
  • Parmesan cheese
  • Kosher salt and black pepper
  • Extra virgin olive oil
Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette ingredients from the top view.

Substitutions & Variations

  • Nuts: Don’t have any pine nuts on hand? No problem! Swap out your pine nuts for almonds or walnuts for an easy substitution.
  • Vinegar: Give your pesto vinaigrette sweeter, sharper, or more robust undertones by swapping out which vinegar you use. Simply substitute your white wine vinegar with an equal amount of red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar for a delectable Pesto Balsamic Dressing.
  • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought or homemade pesto, white wine vinegar, and parmesan cheese. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
  • Copycat Sweetgreen Pesto recipe: If you have ever dined at one of the Sweetgreen restaurant locations, you probably already know about their pesto dressing. It seems like Sweetgreen’s Pesto Vinaigrette recipe is very similar to mine, except that they use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dDijon mustard to your basic lemon pesto dressing.
  • Make it vegan: To make a vegan version of this delicious recipe, all you need to do is use vegan parmesan. For a homemade substitution, I suggest using this recipe for vegan parmesan or an equal amount of nutritional yeast.
  • Sweetener: A teaspoon of honey or maple syrup can be added to balance out the acidity and earthy flavors coming from the vinegar and fresh basil leaves.

How to Make Pesto Vinaigrette

This 5-minute recipe for classic basil pesto dressing is as easy as it is fresh, and it comes together in just three steps.

a collage of photos showing how to make pesto vinaigrette
  1. Chop/Pulse the ingredients in a food processor: Place all the ingredients except the olive oil (i.e., fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper) into a food processor (or a blender). Pulse the mixture 4-5 times for a rough chop.
  2. Add the olive oil: Turn on the food processor and, while it runs, drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop the machine 1-2 times while mixing to scrape the bowl’s sides. Continue running your food processor until the salad dressing is creamy (approx. 45 seconds).
  3. Season and serve: Taste your pesto salad sauce and add any additional seasoning. Give the mixture one more pulse, and then serve.

How to Store

This pesto salad dressing recipe is a delicious addition to any meal. With these simple storage tips, you can keep your leftover vinaigrette fresh for days.

  • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the refrigirator. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
  • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

Recipe Ideas to Use

Basil pesto vinaigrette is a delicious dressing that goes with just about anything. This topping adds a sumptuous flavor to countless dishes, from leafy green salads to hearty mains.

pasta salad in bowl using this basil salad dressing

Expert Tips

  • Texture: Feel free to adjust the consistency and texture by processing (or blending) longer or shorter. I like it to have a pourable consistency, but you can always process it less if you prefer it to be more like a sauce.
  • Emulsify: You can process everything all at once, but taking the time to drizzle the olive oil over the tube after processing the rest of the ingredients will help the dressing blend well and result in a creamier vinaigrette.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to taste it before serving and adjust the amount of acid and seasoning as needed.

FAQs

Pesto vinaigrette dressing is easy enough for even beginner chefs to prepare. Still, you can become an expert saucier in no time with these helpful FAQs!

What is pesto vinaigrette?

Pesto vinaigrette is a dressing that combines the classic elements of a pesto recipe (e.g., fresh basil, pine nuts, and parmesan cheese) with vinegar and lemon juice.

How to turn pesto into salad dressing?

For an easy pesto vinaigrette salad dressing, mix ½ cup of leftover pesto, ¼ cup of white wine vinegar, and ¼ cup of parmesan cheese. It’s that easy!

What is in Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette?

Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette is made with apple cider vinegar, fresh basil, garlic, dijon mustard, parmesan cheese, pine nuts, and salt and pepper.

What is pesto dressing made of?

This basil pesto salad dressing recipe consists of fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, and olive oil.

Other Homemade Salad Dressing You Might Like:

If you try this Pesto Vinaigrette recipe or any other one of my homemade salad dressing recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Pesto Vinaigrette in a spoon
Print

Pesto Vinaigrette Recipe

Learn how to make pesto vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, sandwiches, and more. Made with basic pantry staples, this basil salad dressing is easy and quick to make.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 254kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups fresh basil leaves loosely packed
  • cup pine nuts or sliced almonds
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Place fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor*. Pulse 4-5 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Turn the machine on and while it is running drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop and scrape once or twice and continue running the machine until the salad dressing is creamy, 45 seconds or so.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Give it one more pulse and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 2/3 cup pesto salad dressing that is ideal for 4 servings (about 3 tablespoon each.)
  • Amount of salt used: This is one of those recipes that you want to taste as you go. I listed 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt, but please give it a taste before serving to make sure that it is properly seasoned to your taste.
  • Blender: If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender.
  • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
  • Pesto Vinaigrette Sweetgreen Recipe: For a version similar to Sweetgreen’s pesto vinaigrette recipe, use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard.
  • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
  • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

Nutrition

Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 336mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/feed/ 2
Red Wine Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 14:48:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77071 If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with…]]>

If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with basic pantry staples, you have come to the right place. This red wine vinegar dressing recipe is super versatile and exceptionally delicious. It is the dressing you would find at your favorite Italian restaurant or even bigger chain restaurants like Quiznos or Sweetgreen.

If you love making homemade dressings as much as we do, be sure to check out our Lemon Vinaigrette and Maple Dijon Dressing.

Salad dressing with red wine vinegar and olive oil in a jar with a spoon.

Ingredients

The secret to a good vinaigrette is to use good-quality ingredients. Most store-bought dressings fall short because they use canola oil and artificial flavors. Conversely, our classic red wine vinaigrette recipe requires six simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store if you don’t already have them in your kitchen. Here’s a look at the ingredient list:

Ingredients for olive oil red wine vinegar dressing.
  • Red wine vinegar: I have found the best red wine vinegar for salad dressing is one that is not too acidic (with an acidity level of 6-7%), made with natural ingredients without any artificial flavors, and offers a rich and complex flavor with slightly tangy and sweet notes. My favorite red wine vinegar brand is Napa Valley (affiliate link). It is made from organic oak-aged red wines. With that being said, any red wine vinegar that you enjoy using in your cooking would work in this recipe. Feel free to use your favorite brand based on your taste preference and price point.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Fresh minced garlic provides the best flavor, but you can use ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder instead.
  • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the secret ingredient that helps emulsify the olive oil red wine vinegar dressing. Dijon mustard is a classic, but you can also use regular, country-style, or whole-grain mustard.
  • Honey: Honey adds a touch of natural sweetness, which helps to balance the acidity. Real maple syrup or agave nectar are great vegan options.
  • Oregano: This red wine vinegar vinaigrette recipe can be made with fresh or dried oregano. Some people consider fresh oregano quite potent and sometimes hard to come by. If you feel that way, ¼ teaspoons of dried oregano is a delicious alternative.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the red wine vinegar to shine.
  • Extra-virgin olive oil: For the best flavor in this homemade dressing, use good-quality extra virgin olive oil. 

Optional Add-In’s & Variations

While this red wine vinegar salad dressing recipe is delicious as written, you can swap out one or two ingredients or amp up the flavor based on your taste preferences. You could try:

  • Other kinds of vinegar: For a tangy flavor, you can swap a portion of red wine vinegar (perhaps half and half) for some balsamic vinegar. If you prefer the crisp flavors of white wine vinegar, you can substitute it for red wine vinegar. For a lighter (no alcohol) version, you can also use apple cider vinegar.
  • Parmesan cheese: If you like the classic Italian flavors, add ¼ cup of finely grated Parmesan cheese for a delicious, cheesy addition.
  • Fresh herbs: While I think fresh oregano complements this red vinegar salad dressing best, use any fresh herbs in your fridge, including fresh basil, fresh parsley, or fresh chives.
  • Citrus: Add even more tang with fresh lemon juice or orange juice for a bright, citrusy flavor.
  • Additional seasonings: To make it even more Italian, replace the oregano with ¼ – ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning blend.
  • Mayo / Greek yogurt: Add 1-2 tablespoons of mayo or Greek yogurt to make it creamy.

How to Make Red Wine Vinaigrette?

Homemade red wine vinaigrette can be made in one of two ways. Either using a bowl and a whisk or shaking it up in a mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions for each method:

Steps showing how to make salad dressing with red wine vinegar.
  1. Whisk ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, Kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
  2. Add olive oil: While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil in a steady stream. Continue whisking until slightly thickened, silky, and smooth. Alternatively, you can place all the ingredients in a mason jar, seal it with a tight-fitting lid, and shake vigorously until it is silky smooth.
  3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning, adding more salt or vinegar as needed.

Ways to Use This Red Wine Vinegar Dressing

I must admit that a salad dressing made with red wine vinegar and olive oil compliments nearly any kind of salad. Whip up a recipe, and this dressing will make it shine. But because it is so versatile, there are so many different ways you can use this red wine dressing, including:

  • Fresh Greens: Toss it over simple green salads like Spring Mix Salad or a sweet and salty salad combo of baby arugula, sliced red onion, dried cherries, walnuts or pecans, and feta cheese.
  • Vegetable Salads: Use it as the dressing component for Turkish Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad for extra zing and tang.
  • Pasta Salad / Grain Salads: Go for a heartier side dish by tossing this red vinaigrette dressing over pasta salads and grain salads, such as my Quinoa Feta Chickpea Salad or Avocado Quinoa Salad.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: Drizzle over any cooked veggies to brighten and season them with tangy flavors. Try it on my Grilled Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, or Air Fryer Green Beans.
  • Marinade for Meat or Tofu: Use it for your favorite protein, such as beef, pork, lamb, chicken, or tofu. Allow it to sit for a few hours in the refrigerator to allow the zippy, tangy flavors to sink in.
  • Brush onto Seafood or Fish: Use it as a fast and flavorful sauce by brushing onto fish filets, grilled shrimp skewers, or scallops before (or after) cooking.
  • Sandwiches and Wraps: Drizzle it on top of any sandwich or wrap for a tangy kick. It’s especially delicious when served on Chicken Caprese Sandwiches or Chicken Pita Wraps (instead of tzatziki).

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Here are some of my expert tips for the best red wine vinaigrette recipe:

  • Emulsifying: While shaking all the ingredients in a mason jar is a simple approach, achieving a perfectly creamy red wine vinaigrette requires a bit more technique. When using Dijon mustard, it’s best to whisk the vinegar and mustard together first. Then, gradually drizzle in the oil while continuing to whisk constantly. This method allows the natural compounds in the mustard to effectively bind with both the water and oil, stabilizing the emulsion and preventing the dressing from separating.
  • Shake well before using: With that being said, the vinegar and oil will naturally separate as it sits over time, so it is best to give it a good shake or whisk before serving.
  • Serve at room temperature: The flavors and viscosity of the olive oil are best enjoyed at room temperature. If the salad dressing has been in the refrigerator for a while, take it out 5-10 minutes before using it in your recipe.
  • Olive oil red wine vinegar dressing ratio: After testing this recipe multiple times, we found the best ratio of oil to vinegar was 2:1 (½ cup olive oil to ¼ cup vinegar).
Red wine vinegar oil salad dressing in a jar with a spoon on the side.

FAQs

Does red wine vinaigrette have alcohol?

Yes, it does, but it contains a very tiny amount of alcohol. According to American Vinegar Works, during the production of red wine vinegar, bacteria eat away at the wine to convert it to vinegar, consuming most of the alcohol in the process. However, in the end, a small amount of alcohol might still remain.

What is the difference between red wine vinaigrette and vinegar?

Red wine vinaigrette is an emulsified dressing with olive oil, mustard, and additional seasonings like garlic and herbs. On the other hand, red wine vinegar is plain vinegar on its own.

How long does red wine vinaigrette last in the fridge?

Our homemade red wine vinegar salad dressing will keep for 1 week in the fridge when stored in an airtight container or mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.

If you make this red wine vinegar oil salad dressing recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Red wine vinaigrette recipe with a spoon.
Print

Red Wine Vinaigrette Recipe

This is an all-purpose red wine vinaigrette recipe that you can use as a salad dressing, drizzle for roasted or grilled veggies, marinade for meat (or tofu), and more. All you need is 5 minutes and 6 basic ingredients.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 167kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – I used ¼ teaspoon dried
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper

Instructions

  • In a small bowl (or a mason jar), whisk the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
  • While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated*.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed before using it in your recipe.

Notes

  • Yields: This red wine vinaigrette dressing recipe makes ¾ cups and is ideal for six servings, each serving around two tablespoons.
  • Make it in a jar: While I think whisking oil into the red vinegar and mustard mixture produces the most creamy dressing, you can also put everything in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid and shake vigorously.
  • Storage: You can store your vinaigrette in a mason jar (or an airtight container) for up to one week. The olive oil will naturally solidify in the refrigerator, so give it a good stir or whisk before serving.
  • Freeze: Freeze the dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. Thaw to room temperature on the kitchen counter.

Nutrition

Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 398mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/feed/ 7
Harissa Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:40:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76547 If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other…]]>

If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other harissa recipes. My Homemade Harissa Recipe is an essential condiment for any spice lover, while my Harissa Vinaigrette will transform any weekday salad into a flavor-packed meal.

Person holding a jar of homemade harissa spice blend in her hand.

What is Harissa Spice?

Harissa spice—also referred to as a “harissa spice blend,” “harissa seasoning,” or “harissa powder”—is a spicy, aromatic seasoning made from a mixture of dried chili peppers and other spices, such as cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds.

This hot seasoning is native to Tunisia, though it’s since spread to other areas in North Africa and the Middle East, including Algeria, Morocco, and Egypt. Because of its vast popularity, harissa powder has developed many uses, including in condiments, dry rubs, and other food seasonings.

What is in Harissa Powder?

This authentic spice recipe is easy for anyone with a simple mix of natural spices. I’ve listed my favorite harissa powder ingredients below, including the best chilis to use, classic spices, and tasty add-ins.

Harissa powder ingredients on a marble backdrop from the top view.
  • Dried chilies: This harissa seasoning recipe works with virtually any dried chili pepper, making it incredibly customizable in taste and heat. My favorite combination includes ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chilies. I usually buy this trio of chile peppers online (affiliate link), but you can also find them in the “Mexican” or “Latin” section of your local grocery store. Additionally, even though my mix primarily uses Mexican dried chilies, you can also cut back on spiciness by adding more New Mexican dried chilies, which tend to have a milder flavor.
    No matter which chilies you use, during our recipe testing, we found that 7-8 chilies of various kinds work best in this recipe.
  • Spices: Cumin seeds, coriander seeds, caraway seeds, and peppercorns are the best warm spices to give this mix added fragrance and earthiness. If you can, I highly recommend buying organic spices.
  • Seasonings: I recommend adding smoked paprika and garlic powder to this harissa blend for greater depth and complexity.
  • Optional add-ins: Nowadays, many commercial harissa spice blends include additional flavorings like rose petals and lemon peel. To achieve a similar floral flavor profile in your homemade blend, add ½ teaspoon of crushed, food-grade rose petals and lemon peel. For extra heat, include a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes.

How to Make Harissa Powder

This authentic, restaurant-worthy harissa powder recipe takes less than 15 minutes to make. Plus, you only need a handful of ingredients, a skillet, and a good food processor (affiliate link).

Steps showing how to prepare chiles and toast the spices to make the recipe.
  1. Prepare the chilies: Remove the stems and seeds of the ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chili peppers. Then, chop them roughly.
  2. Toast the peppers: Heat the cast iron skillet over medium heat and add the chopped chilies. Stirring constantly to avoid burning, toast them until thoroughly dried (4-6 minutes). To test whether the chilies are ready, see whether they “crack” or “snap” under pressure. When they do, you can remove them from the pan.
  3. Cool: Transfer the toasted chili peppers to a plate to cool, and set them aside.
  4. Toast the seeds: Add the cumin, coriander, coriander seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet. Cook them for 1-2 minutes, stirring frequently, then remove them from the pan. Set them aside to cool.
A collage of images showing how to make harissa spice mix in a food processor.
  1. Process the peppers: Transfer the cooled chili peppers to your food processor bowl fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times until the chilies break down.
  2. Add the toasted seeds: Then, add the toasted seeds and peppercorns to the bowl. Continue processing—being sure to scrape down the processor bowl every so often—until the ingredients reach a powder-like consistency and are fully incorporated. This step should take 1-2 minutes, depending on the brand of your food processor. Once you get your desired consistency, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse it for another 2-3 times.
  3. Store: Scrape the powder into an airtight jar or container and store it at room temperature for up to six months.

Ways to Use Harissa Spice Blend

Because of its bold flavor and broad versatility, harissa spice provides an indispensable taste to dozens of recipes. Below are just a few of my favorite dishes harissa seasoning can be used for.

  • Salad dressing: You can use this harissa powder recipe to make my harissa vinaigrette dressing (famously used when making CAVA Bowls). It is a wonderful way to season and elevate any salad recipe. Or, if you’re in the mood for lighter, zestier options, add a teaspoon to my Yogurt Salad Dressing and Lemon Salad Dressing to introduce the earthy flavors of harissa to your salad dressings.
  • Roasted vegetables: If you’re into roasting vegetables—like carrots, bell peppers, and potatoes—this easy recipe perfectly complements their smoky, tender notes. Simply sprinkle a few teaspoons of harissa powder over veggies before roasting them in the oven.
  • Seasoning for meat and seafood: Harissa spice makes an excellent dry rub for all your favorite recipes, from chicken to beef, fish, and lamb. In particular, you can use this seasoning for classic Middle Eastern dishes, like my Baked Chicken Kabobs, Roasted Turkey Tenderloin, and Grilled Rack of Lamb.
  • Dips: You can quickly transform this seasoning into a crowd-ready dip by adding it to a creamy Mediterranean Hummus or making Harissa Aioli—a delectable accompaniment for burgers, sandwiches, French fries, and more. You can even add harissa powder to ketchup to give it spicy, complex dimensions!
  • Marinades: Besides being a great seasoning, this harissa spice blend recipe makes a deliciously hot, full-bodied marinade when combined with extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice, and other flavorings. Try it in my citrusy Shrimp Marinade, creamy Yogurt Chicken Marinade, or bold Mahi Mahi Marinade to infuse your meat with rich, flavorful notes.
  • Grains and rice: You can give any grain bowl or side dish a kick of heat by sprinkling it with harissa seasoning. I love adding this spice blend to dishes like couscous, rice, and rich pilafs (especially my Wild Rice Pilaf and Chicken Herb Pilaf!).
  • Eggs: If you love to start your mornings with a spicy wake-up call, I highly recommend using harissa powder to season savory breakfast recipes like scrambled eggs and shakshuka.
  • Soups and stews: A teaspoon of harissa powder infuses any soup or stew recipe with deep, aromatic spice. For the tastiest combination, I recommend pairing this recipe with equally hearty, chili-friendly dishes, like Eggplant Beef Stew, Chicken Chili, or—for a lighter variation try it in my Vegan Chili instead of chili powder.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Easy to make and unbelievably versatile, homemade harissa powder is vital to any chef’s spice rack. These tips ensure you make the freshest, most flavorful seasoning with zero hassle.

  • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are notorious for their spiciness due to their high levels of the compound capsaicin. Though capsaicin is vital to giving chilis their flavor, it may cause a burning sensation after direct contact. Therefore, wearing gloves when working with them is a good idea. If you don’t have any gloves on hand, however, be sure to thoroughly wash your hands after handling your chili peppers.
  • Adjust heat: You can easily adjust your seasoning’s heat levels by changing a few simple factors. For a hotter blend, use a spicier mix of dried chilies, leave the seeds in your chili peppers, or add ½ teaspoon of cayenne pepper. For a milder mix, remove as many seeds from your chilies as possible and try to select chili peppers that land lower on the Scoville Scale—in particular, New Mexico chiles.
  • Adding salt: I did not add salt to my harissa spice blend recipe, as I prefer to adjust the amount of salt according to the recipe I plan to use. This way, I can easily control the amount of salt in my food without the risk of making it overly salty.
  • Spice grinder: I prefer to blend my harissa spices using a food processor. The bowl of a food processor is large enough to pulverize everything in one take, and its strong blades are ideal for turning all spices and dried chilies into powder. However, you can also make this recipe using a spice grinder (affiliate link.)To do so, blend the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, until powdered. Then, add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns, and grind the mixture until it reaches your preferred consistency (about five seconds). Remember, too, that you might need to grind your ingredients in small batches to ensure they fit in your grinder.

FAQs

What is the closest spice to harissa?

Suppose you don’t have harissa spice but still want the same aromatic, spicy taste. In that case, I recommend blending chili powder, smoked paprika, ground cumin, ground coriander, and garlic powder. Though not identical, this mix strikes a similar balance between fragrant heat and the earthiness of harissa powder. Or, if you need a condiment-like consistency, you can even try sriracha sauce for a store-bought, chili-based substitute.

Is harissa a spice?

Not a single spice, “harissa” refers to a hot, fragrant mix of multiple spices and dried chili peppers. You can find this traditional blend in several forms, including a dry seasoning, a paste form, and a creamy sauce.

Is harissa powder spicy hot?

In general, yes, harissa powder contains a fair amount of spiciness. However, if desired, you can adjust this heat level by using different combinations of chili peppers and spices to make a milder mix.

What is the difference between harissa powder and harissa paste?

Since they both come from a similar mixture of dried chili peppers and spices, harissa powder and harissa paste boast a hot, earthy flavor. However, they have very different consistencies. Powdered harissa is a dry, powdered version of the mix, while harissa paste has a thicker, wetter consistency due to additional ingredients like tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil.

Where to buy harissa powder?

After trying several store-bought brands, I recommend purchasing either New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (which is a little milder). These premade harissa blends will work in a pinch, though I find my homemade recipe more flavorful and customizable.

If you make your own Harissa Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Harissa powder in a jar with a spoonfull.
Print

Harissa Powder Recipe

With deep spice and complex flavors, Harissa Powder packs all the hot, bold taste you could want from a seasoning. You can make this simple spice mix in less than 15 minutes using a simple set of natural ingredients.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Total Time 21 minutes
Servings 5 tablespoons
Calories 12kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 8 dried chili peppers we used a combination of Ancho, Guajillo, and De Arbol chili peppers
  • 1 ½ teaspoons cumin seeds
  • 1 ½ teaspoon coriander seeds
  • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
  • ½ teaspoon peppercorns
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt optional*

Instructions

  • Remove the stems and deseed the chili peppers. Give them a rough chop.
  • Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat. Add the peppers and toast for 4-6 minutes or until thoroughly dried. Stir frequently to avoid burning. To test for doneness, you should feel the chili pepper “crack” or “snap.”
  • Place the toasted peppers on a plate to cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Add the cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet and toast, stirring frequently, for 1-2 minutes. Remove from the pan and set aside to cool.
  • Place the cooled chili peppers into the bowl of a food processor (*instructions for making it in a spice grinder are below in the notes section) fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times to break down the dried chilies. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, peppercorns, and salt if using. Continue to process until they are pulverized and reach a powder consistency, scraping down the processor bowl to incorporate all the ingredients. Depending on your food processor, this takes about 1-2 minutes of processing. Finally, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse 2-3 times to ensure all spices are fully incorporated.
  • Place the powder in an airtight container and store it in a cool and dark place for six months.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅓ to ½ cup harissa seasoning, depending on the size of your peppers. The nutritional values below are for the full recipe.
  • If using a spice grinder: Add the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, to the grinder and pulse to create a powder. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns. Continue to grind until it reaches powder consistency. Add the smoked paprika and garlic powder if using. Grind for 5 seconds.
  • Mortar and Pestle: If you do not have a food processor or a spice grinder, the good old mortar and pestle would also work.
  • Adding salt: When I make homemade spice blends, I usually use very little or no salt. This way, I can salt my food separately and easily gauge the amount of salt used in my dish. Feel free to omit it or use more as needed.
  • Storage: To store this harissa spice mix recipe, first transfer it to an airtight container. Then, store it in a cool, dry place—such as a pantry or kitchen cabinet—for up to six months.
  • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are usually very hot, even when dry. I would recommend wearing gloves if you have them.
  • Fumes: Proper ventilation is essential when cooking chili peppers. The fumes from these chilies may irritate your eyes, nose, and mouth, so I highly recommend opening windows, turning on your kitchen’s range hood, and/or using portable fans to increase your kitchen’s air circulation.

Nutrition

Calories: 12kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 468mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 420IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/feed/ 2
Harissa Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:26:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76802 In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses,…]]>

In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses, and storage guides.

Cava copycat hot harissa vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

What is Harissa Dressing Made Of?

The best way to capture the bright flavors of CAVA’s hot harissa vinaigrette is by using the right ingredients—fresh, flavorful, and already in your pantry!

Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
  • Olive oil: Though a little more expensive, high-quality extra virgin olive oil is excellent for vinaigrettes due to its richness and depth. (Remember: Olive oil plays a big part in vinaigrette recipes!) Still, any olive oil will work as long as you like its flavor.
  • Lemon juice or vinegar: I recommend using fresh lemon juice due to its bright, citrusy overtones. However, if you want sharper, more acidic notes in your harissa vinaigrette, you can use red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar instead.
  • Harissa: This recipe works with both harissa sauce (or paste) and harissa powder. You can also make harissa paste from powder. Regardless of your choice, I suggest making them from scratch due to their more vibrant, fresh, and customizable flavors. However, you can also purchase store-bought versions for simpler meal prep. In particular, I love brands like NY Shuk, Mina, and Whole Foods, though you should be able to find more harissa products in the “international” or “ethnic” sections of local grocery stores.
  • Honey: Honey is the key to giving harissa salad dressing a beautiful balance of “heat and sweet,” though you may also use maple syrup or agave syrup for a vegan version.
  • Garlic: Be sure to grate or press your fresh garlic before adding it to your recipe. Otherwise, the garlic won’t properly infuse the dressing with its flavors.
  • Seasoning: Kosher salt and ground black pepper are all that’s necessary to bring out the savory tones of this all-natural harissa vinaigrette recipe.

Optional Add-Ins

How you customize your harissa salad dressing depends on your brand of harissa. Some store-bought brands—like Trader Joe’s—tend to have a hotter flavor profile, while others—like Whole Foods—are a little milder. 

In short, taste your harissa sauce and consider your final dish before adjusting your recipe!

  • Spicier: Want to kick up the heat of this CAVA copycat recipe? Try adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to your mix. Depending on the brand of harissa you are using, you can also add cumin for an added layer of warmth. If you are making it from scratch following our recipe, I do not recommend adding more, but of course, you can give your harissa a taste and decide for yourself.
  • Herbal flavors: If you prefer an earthier, lighter taste in your harissa dressing, try adding a shake of dried oregano or dried mint to your recipe.
  • Greek yogurt: Though not traditional, you can make a creamy harissa dressing by adding Greek yogurt to your recipe. Not only does this ingredient lend the mixture a nice tang, but it’s also a great way to lighten up its flavor profile for those who want a not-too-spicy harissa vinaigrette.

How to Make Harissa Vinaigrette?

You can make hot harissa vinaigrette in three simple steps, bringing spicy, Middle Eastern flavors to any meal. And the best part, you ask? It takes less than 5 minutes to make.

A collage of images showing how to make harissa vinaigrette.
  1. Add the ingredients: Place the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper to a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.
  2. Mix: Cover the jar and shake it for 30 seconds or until emulsified. Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary.
  3. Serve or store: Refrigerate the vinaigrette or use it immediately in your desired recipe. Be sure to shake the mixture after storage to ensure a well-integrated mixture.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

  • Store: You can store your harissa vinaigrette in an airtight container or glass jar in the refrigerator for up to one week. Remember to shake the mixture well before using it to help reintegrate any separated ingredients.
  • Freeze: For extra-long storage, freeze this recipe in a freezer-safe, airtight container for up to one month. Leave enough room in your chosen container for the vinaigrette to expand.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa dressing, put it in the refrigerator overnight.

How to Use Harissa Vinaigrette?

Lighter and tangier than traditional harissa, this delicious condiment works pretty much anywhere you want that hot harissa taste. Below are a few of my favorite ways to add a bold flavor to any weekday menu.

  • Salad dressing: No one can resist a classic. Using harissa dressing for salad is a no-brainer, especially since it strikes such a tasty balance with the crispness of leafy green salads. This vinaigrette pairs impeccably with the refreshing cucumber and tomatoes in my Spring Mix Salad. Or, you can balance this spicy condiment with the rich creaminess of my Butter Lettuce Salad or Massaged Kale Salad with Avocado—especially when topped with a crumble of feta cheese.
  • Grain bowls: Want to learn how to make CAVA at home? Grain bowls are a staple of this Mediterranean restaurant chain—a clear reason why I love using this copycat vinaigrette for dishes like my vegan Quinoa Power Bowl and gluten-free Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl.
  • Sandwiches and wraps: This harissa vinaigrette doesn’t just work in bowls. It’s also a mouthwatering blend for sandwiches and wraps—whether you drizzle it over the spread or use it as a dipping sauce.
  • Roasted vegetables: Equal parts nutritious and flavorful, this easy vinaigrette makes the perfect addition to roasted veggies. Drizzle it over tender dishes like Baked Eggplant Slices, sweet Roasted Maple Carrots, and hearty Air Fried Red Potatoes, and you’ll never have a bland side dish again.
  • Roasted and grilled meats & seafood: You can lend any protein a delicious spice by serving this vinaigrette with dishes, such as my succulent Grilled Salmon, Steak Kabobs in Oven, and Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Use this dressing like your other go-to dips and serve it on the side, or use it as a drizzle for a well-infused smokiness.
  • Use it as a marinade: Out of all the CAVA dressing recipes, this is one of my favorites for meat marinades. Simply add ¼ cup of harissa vinaigrette to your favorite marinade recipe (especially my tangy Chicken Marinade with Yogurt, zesty Shrimp Marinade, and savory Turkey Tenderloin Marinade!) and add more as necessary.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

If you want the flavors of the authentic hot harissa vinaigrette, below are a few helpful tips for getting the best flavor, consistency, and use from this five-star dressing.

  • Powder vs. sauce: Though both will work, during our recipe testing, we thought the harissa sauce performed better when making this vinaigrette. Powder tends to sink at the bottom as it sits, while sauce blends better (depending on the brand you use, of course). If your only option is harissa powder, be sure to shake it vigorously before using it in your recipe.
  • Adjust seasoning and sweetness: Because this dressing recipe can be customized in many ways, you must taste it for seasoning. Consider, too, what kind of dish you plan to make, and adjust your dressing’s ingredient ratios to make the best match. For instance, you can make a sweet honey harissa vinaigrette by increasing the amount of honey you use.
  • Shake well before use: Letting your harissa dressing rest for 20 minutes is an easy way to help its flavors infuse and develop. However, as with any vinaigrette, this recipe’s ingredients tend to separate as it sits. Therefore, you must whisk or shake it well before using it.

FAQs

What is harissa dressing?

Harissa dressing is a spicy, light vinaigrette popularized by the Mediterranean restaurant chain CAVA. This dressing gets its primary flavors from harissa—a chili-based condiment that originated in Tunisia. However, it also contains rich, citrusy notes from other ingredients like lemon juice and garlic.

What is the difference between harissa sauce and harissa vinaigrette?

Of course, both recipes boast a hot, smoky taste due to their use of chili peppers, spices, and herbs. However, harissa sauce is an ingredient in harissa vinaigrette, with a more concentrated flavor and thicker consistency. The vinaigrette version is a thinner, lighter, and less intense mixture, as it has an olive oil base and other ingredients like lemon juice, vinegar, and honey.

Other CAVA-Inspired Dressing Recipes

If you make this hot harissa vinaigrette recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Harissa vinaigrette in a jar with a spoon.
Print

Harissa Vinaigrette Recipe

Hot harissa vinaigrette is the ultimate condiment for anyone craving the spicy and smoky flavors of harissa. In just five minutes and with a handful of ingredients, you can take any dish—grain bowls, veggies, salads, and beyond—to the next level.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 146kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons harissa sauce or 1 tablespoon harissa powder
  • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup or agave nectar for a vegan option
  • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

Instructions

  • Combine the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a mason jar.
  • Cover and shake until emulsified, about 30 seconds. Adjust seasoning to your desired taste.
  • Use right away or store in the fridge until ready to use. Be sure to shake before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1/2 cup harissa vinaigrette. I listed 4 servings because you can use it in a salad or grain bowl recipe that serves 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in a mason jar (or any other airtight container) and keep them in the fridge for up to a week.
  • Freeze: You can freeze this dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to a month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 392mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/feed/ 4
Crazy Feta https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/ https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/#comments Sat, 06 Jul 2024 14:45:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76598 I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular…]]>

I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular Cava restaurant chain. When I first had it, I knew I had to create a homemade crazy feta I could enjoy anytime I wanted. And I have to admit, I think this version is better than the original.

If you are into Cava and the taste of their delicious dips and spreads, you might also like other Mediterranean staples, including Tzatziki Sauce, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Harissa Sauce.

Cava feta dip served in a bowl with veggies and  pita chips from the top view.

What is Crazy Feta at Cava?

Cava is a popular Mediterranean fast-casual chain that opened in the DC area. It is known for its quick pick-up mezze bowls. Crazy feta is one of the featured dips, along with tzatziki, hummus, harissa, and roasted eggplant dip.

Cava’s crazy feta is made with feta, jalapenos, onions, and olive oil. The vegetables are roasted, and all the ingredients are whipped together until smooth.

Crazy Feta Ingredients

Cava feta dip requires just a handful of simple ingredients, which are easy to find at the grocery store. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image on each ingredient.
  • Jalapeno peppers: Look for two large jalapenos for the best flavor.
  • Onion: One yellow onion is all we need, but red onions could also work.
  • Garlic bulb: The roasted garlic head adds an incredible depth of flavor and a natural sweetness. I like to break the garlic bulb into garlic cloves for faster roasting or use already-made Roasted Garlic or Air Fryer Roasted Garlic.
  • Olive oil: Extra virgin olive oil provides a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the roasted veggies and feta cheese shine.
  • Feta cheese: Look for two 8-ounce feta cheese blocks (or feta bricks) in the cheese section of your grocery store, either made from cow’s milk, sheep’s milk, or a mix of the two.
  • Lemon: We need both the lemon zest and lemon juice, so zest the whole lemon before juicing.

How to Make Crazy Feta?

This crazy feta recipe is ready in 25-30 minutes, thanks to the quick roasting time. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
A collage of images showing how to make Cava feta dip recipe.
  1. Prepare vegetables: Place the sliced jalapenos, chopped onion, and peeled garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil, then season with Kosher salt and black pepper.
  2. Roast vegetables: Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through for even cooking. When pierced with a knife, the vegetables should be soft. Set aside to cool.
  3. Whip feta: In the bowl of a food processor (or blender) with the S-blade, add the feta cheese (broken into small pieces), olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated, scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed.
A food processor filled with feta, jalapeno, garlic and onion, before and after it is whipped.
  1. Make feta dip: Add the roasted vegetables to the feta mixture. Pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the bowl as needed. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  2. Serve: Transfer to your favorite serving bowl and drizzle it with a teaspoon of olive oil, if desired. Serve as an appetizer with pita chips, crackers, or veggies on the side (see more Serving Suggestions below).

How to Serve Crazy Feta?

Crazy feta is one of those recipes that is extremely versatile. The Mediterranean flavors take front and center served as a dip or spread in any of the following ways:

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Here are some of my expert tips for the best Cava crazy feta dip recipe:

  • Adjust the heat level: If you prefer a spicy dip, leave the seeds and ribs intact on the jalapenos.
  • Cut the vegetables roughly the same size: Chopping the vegetables about the same size (jalapenos sliced in half, onion cut into large chunks) and slicing the garlic cloves in half ensures they cook quickly and evenly.
  • Control the texture with the food processor: I love a smooth and creamy texture, but you can make this jalapeno feta dip as chunky or smooth as you like.
  • Make it your own: Customize it in any way you like, such as adding sun-dried tomatoes in oil, a sprinkling of fresh herbs, or some roasted red pepper.

FAQs

Is Cava feta pasteurized?

Yes, according to its packaging (sold at Whole Foods), the feta cheese is made with pasteurized cow’s milk and sheep’s milk.

How many carbs are in crazy feta cheese?

This recipe serves eight people as an appetizer, with each serving offering 4 grams of carbs.

Other Cava-Inspired Dips and Spreads

If you try this Cava Feta Dip recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cava Copycat Crazy feta in a bowl served with pita chips and vegetables.
Print

Crazy Feta Recipe

If you are a fan of the Mediterranean food restaurant chain Cava, you are likely a fan of their Crazy Feta as well. If you have ever wanted to make it in your home kitchen, you have found the best copycat recipe. This quick and easy creamy feta dip is ideal for serving with pita chips and veggies or topping your favorite grain bowls and salads.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 serving
Calories 249kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 large jalapenos cut in half and deseeded
  • 1 medium sized yellow onion peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 1 bulb garlic peeled and sliced in half (10-12 cloves)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Feta Dip:

  • 16 ounces feta cheese 2-8 ounce blocks, crumbled
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the jalapenos, onion, and garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle with the kosher salt and pepper.
  • Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through the process to ensure even cooking. Vegetables should be soft when pierced with a knife. Remove from the oven and set them aside to cool.
  • Place the feta cheese, olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest in the food processor. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated. Scrape down the sides of the bowl as needed.
  • Add the roasted vegetables and pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the sides of the food processor bowl to incorporate all ingredients. Taste and adjust seasoning as necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and if preferred, drizzle with olive oil. Serve with pita chips, crackers or veggies on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2 cups of Crazy feta dip, ideal for serving eight people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Adding salt: Feta can be salty, so it’s best to taste the feta before adding any additional salt to the recipe.
  • Best when served at room temperature: While the dip should be chilled, the flavors are most prominent at cool to room temperature. If you have stored the dip for later, remove it from the fridge 20 minutes before enjoying it.
  • Storage & Make-Ahead Instructions: This Cava crazy feta recipe tastes better the longer all the ingredients have a chance to mingle in the fridge, making it a great make-ahead recipe. To make ahead and store, simply:
    • Make Ahead: Prepare the dip at least 1 hour before serving. Keep covered in the fridge.
    • Storage: Store leftover dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freeze: The leftovers of this feta jalapeno dip can be frozen. Simply place them in a freezer-safe container, cover them with a lid, and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 249kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 793mg | Potassium: 73mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 278IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 285mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/feed/ 3
Elote Dip https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/#comments Mon, 01 Jul 2024 20:45:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76149 Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad…]]>

Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad strikes an irresistible balance between heat and tanginess, while Corn Black Bean Salad has all the garden-fresh, zingy undertones you could want in a side dish.

Elote corn dip in a bowl garnished with lime with chips on the side.

What is Elote Dip?

Elote dip is a creamy, corn-based appetizer that gets its flavors from traditional Mexican street corn. This recipe’s original “street food version” starts by grilling corn on the cob and slathering it with a rich mixture of mayonnaise, sour cream, and lime juice. People then sprinkle it with ingredients like cilantro and chili powder to enhance its fresher, spicier notes.

The “dip form” of this recipe takes all of the same ingredients and flavors, transforming it into a scoopable appetizer—often served with a side of tortilla chips, as a condiment for tacos, or on top of other savory mains.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Wondering why this recipe for elote dip is so irresistible? With only a few simple ingredients, this dish packs all the creamy, fresh, and spicy flavors you love in Mexican street food.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Corn: Nearly any type of corn will work in this elote dip recipe. When fresh sweet corn is in season in the summer, I prefer buying it fresh. However, you can also make this dish with canned or frozen corn if it is out-of-season (like when serving it as a part of your Cinco de Mayo spread) or if you want to simplify your meal prep. 
  • Olive oil: We used extra virgin olive oil because of its milder flavor, but you can also use an equal amount of unsalted butter.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: To ensure an even infusion of flavor, finely mince or press your garlic before adding it to your recipe.
  • Mayonnaise: Most recipes for this sweet corn dip use mayo as the base when making the creamy elote dressing. However, if you want a more decadent option, you can also make this Mexican corn dip with cream cheese instead, though your recipe will likely have a thicker consistency.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream is vital to this recipe’s cool tanginess. However, you can make a more authentic elote dip recipe with Mexican crema or use plain Greek yogurt for a lighter version.
  • Fresh lime juice and zest
  • Seasonings: I opted for a basic mix of kosher salt, ground pepper, and chili powder to season my elote dip. However, you can use an authentic Mexican Tajin seasoning or Trader Joe’s Everything But the Elote Seasoning Blend (affiliate link) for a zestier, more robust chili taste. And if you like your dip spicier, a pinch of cayenne pepper would be a welcome addition.
  • Red onion: If you prefer a milder “onion” flavor, use green onions instead of red for this recipe.
  • Jalapeno: One fresh, finely chopped jalapeno is all you need to add fresh heat to this elote cheese dip. Though I prefer removing the seeds from my jalapenos before cutting, you can achieve a spicier blend by leaving some seeds in.
  • Cotija cheese or queso fresco: These two kinds of cheese are classic choices for this dip, but almost any Mexican cheese will work. Though not traditional, you can also use feta cheese, pepper jack cheese, or Parmesan cheese if you’re in a pinch.
  • Cilantro: Fresh, chopped cilantro is an easy way to give your dip a touch of freshness and color, but you can substitute it for parsley or omit it altogether if preferred.

How to Make Street Corn Dip?

This easy elote dip comes together in five simple steps, making it a boon for first-time cooks and expert chefs alike.

A collage of images showing how to make elote dip.
  1. Saute the corn: Pour the olive oil into a large, heavy-bottom skillet and heat over medium-high heat. Add the sweet corn kernels and, stirring frequently, saute until they turn a light golden color (7-10 minutes). Note: You may need to saute your corn in two batches to ensure you don’t overcrowd the skillet. Then, add the garlic to the pan and saute for 30 seconds, stirring constantly. Remove the garlic-corn mixture from the skillet, set it aside, and let it cool for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Make the dressing: Add the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and ground pepper to a large mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  3. Assemble the dip: Add the cooled corn, red onion, jalapeno, and cilantro to the bowl with the dressing. Toss to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.
  4. Serve: Transfer the dip to a serving bowl, garnish with cotija cheese, and serve with a side of your favorite chips.

How to Serve this Mexican Street Corn Dip Recipe?

One of the best parts about this easy Mexican street corn dip is its versatility. It’s good enough to eat with a spoon, but you can also pair it with countless other dishes to make a flavorful, filling meal.

  • Chips on the side: An undeniable crowd-pleaser, this elote chip dip makes the perfect party appetizer when served alongside a bowl of tortilla chips. (Warning: Don’t expect to have any leftovers!)
  • Tacos and burritos: This creamy elote dip tastes amazing with taco recipes, balancing their savory flavor with a bright, smooth tang. In particular, I love serving it with juicy Flank Steak Tacos, smoky Brisket Tacos, and vegan Black Bean Quinoa Tacos. You can even use this easy dip as a burrito topping for an equally delicious Mexican meal.
  • Vegetable platter: Another delectable way to enjoy this roasted street corn dip is one of the healthiest. Serve this creamy dish alongside a platter of fresh veggies—especially bell peppers, carrot sticks, and cherry tomatoes—for an equally delicious and colorful snack platter.
  • Salads and taco bowls: This recipe is more than a tasty dip. When mixed into taco bowls and salads, it also makes a delicious elote salsa.
  • Grilled seafood: In the mood for a light, seaside menu? This easy elote corn makes an incredible topping for dozens of fresh fish mains, whether you’re craving savory-sweet Grilled Mahi Mahi, umami-rich Grilled Sockeye Salmon, or smoky Grilled Shrimp.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to make the best Mexican street corn dip recipe with these tasty tips. Below, you’ll find out how to prepare this dish just as you like—with maximum flavor and zero hassle.

  • Other ways to cook corn: In the recipe below, I sauteed my corn on the cob because it’s an easy way to achieve rich, tender flavors. However, you can also lend your elotes dip bolder, smokier notes by cooking your corn on the grill or in the oven. Alternatively, you can try Air Fryer Corn on the Cob or cook it in the microwave for a quick, indoor option.
  • Can be served warm, room temperature, or cold: You can serve this dish at any temperature you prefer. When served right away while the corn is still warm, hot elote dip is delicious with chips. Equally, after resting in the fridge for a few hours, its cold version makes a great appetizer.
  • It gets better as it sits: If you have time, I highly recommend making this recipe a day in advance and storing it in the fridge until it’s ready to eat. Just be sure to add fresh, delicate ingredients (like cilantro and cheese) right before serving to maintain their texture and taste.
Person serving a chip with Mexican elote dip.

You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of the classic elote recipe and flavors, you might also like:

If you make this Elote Dip recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Corn elote dip in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Elote Dip Recipe

Tangy, creamy, and smoky, this elote street corn dip will immediately add fresh, Mexican flavor to any menu. The best part is that you can make this authentic dish in less than 30 minutes with only a handful of ingredients!
Course Appetizer, Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 196kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 6 ears of corn husks remove and kernels cut from the cob*, about 4-5 cups
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed

For The Creamy Elote Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Greek yogurt or Mexican crema
  • 3 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Dip:

  • ¼ cup red onion or green onions finely chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and finely chopped
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese or queso fresco
  • cup fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • To cook the corn: In a large heavy-bottom skillet (such a cast iron skillet), heat olive oil over medium-high heat. Add the corn kernels and saute for 7-10 minutes, stirring frequently until lightly golden. Do not overcrowd the skillet. Saute in 2 batches if needed. Add the garlic and saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool for 5-10 minutes.
  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (big enough to mix the whole dip) until thoroughly combined.
  • To assemble: Add the now-cooled corn, onion, jalapeno, cotija cheese, and cilantro to the bowl and toss to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and garnish with more cilantro. Serve with your favorite chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 4 cups of dip that is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Corn: During the summer months, I prefer using fresh sweet corn for this recipe. On the other hand, when corn is not in season, I use canned (and drained corn) or frozen corn kernels. If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it. Either way, you will need 4-5 cups of corn kernels to make this recipe.
  • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your cheese before adding it to your Mexican street dip. Some varieties are saltier than others, so you might alter your seasoning depending on your cheese’s flavor profile. 
  • Adjust spiciness: My recipe for street taco dip is relatively mild, as I remove the seeds of my jalapenos before adding them to my mix. However, if you’re looking for an extra kick of heat, leave some seeds in or add a dash of your favorite hot sauce.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store this elote corn dip recipe in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. I don’t recommend freezing your dip, however, as the extreme temperatures will interfere with the dressing’s texture and taste.

Nutrition

Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/feed/ 1
Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
  • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
  • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
  • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
  • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
  • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
  • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
  • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
  • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
  1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
  2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
  3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
  4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
Two images showing the finished dish.
  1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Serving Suggestions

In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

FAQs

What are Turkish green beans?

Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

What type of green beans should I use?

Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

Is this dish vegan?

Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
Print

Turkish Green Beans Recipe

This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 226kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
  • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
  • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

For Serving (Optional)

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
  • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
  • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
  • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
  • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
  • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
    • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
    • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
    • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/#comments Sun, 02 Jun 2024 17:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25252 If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have…]]>

If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have come to the right place! We have already shared Mexican Street Corn On The Cob, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado, Air Fryer Elotes, Mexican Street Corn Soup and Elote Dip. This Mexican street corn pasta recipe is the newest addition to the collection.

A person is drizzling the elote pasta salad with chili lime dressing.

While I usually make this street corn macaroni salad during the summer months when sweet corn is in season, you can also make it using canned or frozen corn during the cooler months (i.e., during the football season and Cinco de Mayo celebrations). In this post, we cover everything you need to know, including ingredient substitutions, variations, making it with grilled (or sauteed) corn, and expert tips to guide you through the process.

Ingredients for Mexican Pasta Salad with Chili Lime Dressing:

The ingredients list for this pasta corn salad consists of a mix of fresh and store-bought ingredients. You will need two sets of ingredients: First, for the salad and second, for the chili lime dressing: 

For The Salad:

  • Sweet corn on the cob: You can make this salad by cooking the corn on the grill (or using a grill pan), sauteeing it in a skillet, or even cooking it in an air fryer. Our recipe below covers both methods of cooking. However, during the cooler months, when corn is not in season, you can use canned or frozen corn as well. 
  • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil, like olive oil or avocado oil, but unsalted butter would also work.
  • Pasta: When making pasta salads, my favorite pasta shapes are fusilli, farfalle(bow-tie pasta), or cellentani. However, any pasta shape that can hold onto the dressing and mix well with other ingredients in the recipe would work here. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can also use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
  • Jalapeno pepper: If you like the heat, keep the seeds on. If not, remove them before chopping the pepper into small pieces. Alternatively, you can use bell peppers if you prefer a milder flavor.
  • Onion: I used red onion, but green onions would also work for a lighter flavor. If you have them on hand, my Mexican pickled onions would also be a great addition.
  • Cilantro: Chopped fresh cilantro is a classic ingredient in any Mexican corn recipe, but if you are not a fan, you can use other fresh herbs like parsley or omit using it.
  • Cheese: The authentic elote recipe uses cotija cheese, so we used that, but you can also use queso fresco, shredded cheddar, or even crumbled feta cheese in a pinch.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For The Dressing:

  • Mayonnaise: Use a brand you like or make it at home
  • Sour cream: If you can find it, you can use Mexican crema (aka Mexican sour cream) instead of sour cream. 
  • Seasonings: I used a small amount of chili powder to complement the smoky and charred flavors of the corn, but it is optional. You will also need salt and pepper to season the recipe. If preferred, a cayenne pepper can also be added for some heat.
  • Lime zest and Lime Juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for the freshest flavors.

Optional Additions:

  • Cherry tomatoes: While it is not traditional, a handful of cherry tomatoes would be a lovely addition and make this grilled corn pasta salad a true summer salad. 
  • Garlic: A clove of minced garlic can be added to the creamy dressing, if preferred. If you prefer a lighter (less pungent) alternative, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder as well.
  • Black Beans: Again, it is not traditional, but adding a can of drained and rinsed black beans would make this even more wholesome and filling.
  • Avocado: If you are an avocado lover, add a cubed ripe avocado to take this  Mexican corn pasta salad to the next level.
  • Grilled chicken: You can turn this sweet corn pasta salad into a delicious summer meal by adding some grilled chicken on top.

How To Make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad?

While I prefer using grilled corn, you can make this street corn macaroni salad by sauteeing corn kernels in a skillet. Below are the steps to making it both ways:

Steps showing how to make elote pasta salad.
  1. Cook corn:
    1. Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    2. In a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  2. Cook the pasta: Meanwhile, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. You can reserve some pasta water just in case, but during our recipe testing, we didn’t think that it was necessary. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl. Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  3. Make the chili lime dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty!
Steps showing how to assemble Mexican pasta salad with corn recipe.
  1. Assemble the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this grilled corn pasta salad by itself for a delicious pasta lunch or as a side dish with many of your vegetarian and meat dishes. Below are a few of my favorite dishes that you can pair it with:

  • Grilled seafood: The light and smokey flavors of Grilled Shrimp complement the creamy, spicy flavors of the salad. However, if you are feeding a crowd, you can also try my Grilled Sockeye Salmon for a well-rounded meal.
  • Tacos: The robust flavors of Grilled Flank Steak Tacos pair beautifully with this Mexican corn side dish, making it a summer feast. But if I am serving this salad during the cooler months, I pair it with my Slow Cooker Brisket Tacos for a meal that is perfect for a crowd.

Other Mexican recipes you might like:

If you make this Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, I would appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Mexican street corn pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is bursting with the flavors of fresh summer corn, jalapenos, red onion, and a creamy chili lime dressing. Ready in just 30 minutes, it's the perfect dish for feeding a crowd!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
  • 6 ears corn – Husks removed – approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups of corn kernels or frozen or canned corn (see notes below)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Pasta:

  • 8 oz. dry uncooked pasta such as fusilli and farfalle (bowtie pasta)

For The Creamy Dressing:

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Mexican crema
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime (optional)
  • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed from 1 ½ to 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 2 medium jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
  • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

  • When it comes to cooking the corn, you have two options:
    Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    Cook it in a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  • Cook the pasta: While the corn is cooling, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl.
  • Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  • Make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, lime zest, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty.
  • Assemble the roasted corn pasta salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 cups of pasta salad (the shape of the pasta you are using will change the volume), which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • What if I don’t have fresh corn? While I am a big fan of any pasta salad with fresh corn, to make this recipe year-round and still get that sweet corn flavor, you can use canned or frozen corn in place of the fresh. If you decide to do so, you can use:
    • Canned corn: For this recipe, you will need 3 (15 oz) cans of drained and rinsed corn.
    • Frozen corn kernels: You will need three (10 oz) bags. I like this option because the corn kernels are already off the cob, which saves you a step. Even better, there is no need to thaw. Simply add 1-2 minutes extra cooking time when sauteing the frozen corn in a skillet.
  • Be sure to salt the pasta water: Salting the cooking water allows the pasta to absorb some salt as it cooks, enhancing its flavor from the inside out so do not skip this step.
  • Toss while it is still warm: I know it’s tempting to add everything to the bowl and simply drizzle with dressing, but we’ve discovered that tossing the dressing with the corn and pasta while they’re still slightly warm allows them to better absorb the tangy, spicy flavors.
  • Serve it cold or warm: Like most pasta salads, this Mexican corn pasta salad can be served at room temperature, warm or cold. 
  • Make-Ahead: You can make this fresh corn pasta salad a day in advance. Simply assemble the pasta salad, but do not garnish with the cotija cheese or cilantro. Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. On the day you are going to serve, give it another gentle toss and let it come to room temperature. Add the cotija cheese and cilantro right before serving.
  • To Store Leftovers: Bring your Mexican pasta salad to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. As long as it is kept in the fridge, it should be good for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/feed/ 26
Yogurt Chia Pudding https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-chia-pudding/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-chia-pudding/#comments Mon, 20 May 2024 12:33:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75466 Making chia seed pudding with yogurt is one of my favorite bedtime rituals. It gives me the satisfaction of having…]]>

Making chia seed pudding with yogurt is one of my favorite bedtime rituals. It gives me the satisfaction of having a healthy breakfast ready in the morning with plenty of protein, fiber, and healthy fats wrapped up in one. It’s the perfect breakfast that does double duty as a healthy snack or healthy dessert.

For more breakfast recipes, make my Yogurt Parfait for additional protein or Chia Seed Oatmeal, a personal favorite. If you are not a fan of the texture of chia seeds, try Steel Cut Overnight Oats instead.

Chia seed yogurt breakfast in a jar garnished with fruit.

Ingredients for Chia Yogurt Pudding

This chia seeds and yogurt pudding recipe is made with simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry and fridge. You will need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Yogurt: I love the consistency of plain full fat yogurt, but you can also use plain Greek yogurt for a thicker consistency. You can also use low-fat yogurt, fat-free yogurt or vegan yogurt such as almond milk or coconut yogurt. If you are a fan of sweetened yogurts, my Homemade Vanilla Yogurt would also be a great option.
  • Milk: Use your favorite plant-based milk like Unsweetened Almond Milk, coconut milk, oat milk, or soy milk. You can also make a chia pudding with yogurt, no milk, by using water. Or, use regular dairy milk if desired.
  • Sweetener: I used pure maple syrup, but you can use your preferred sweetener of choice, such as honey, brown sugar, or coconut sugar. If you choose a sugar-free version, skip the sweetener or use monk fruit maple syrup instead.
  • Chia Seeds: I recommend using organic black chia seeds that you can find in most grocery stores and online (affiliate link). Other national brands include Navitas, Kirkland, Whole Foods 365, and Bob’s Red Mill.
  • Vanilla Extract: Optional, but it adds a lovely, delicious flavor.
  • Toppings: There are plenty of variations when it comes to toppings, so get as creative as you like. Some of my favorite toppings are fresh berries, such as my Blueberry Puree, mango, bananas, nuts and seeds, chocolate chips, granola like my chunky homemade granola, a spoonful of nut butter, such as almond butter or peanut butter, or a pinch of ground cinnamon.

How to Make Chia Seed Pudding with Yogurt?

Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this yogurt chia seed pudding recipe:

A collage of images showing how to make yogurt chia pudding.
  1. Mix yogurt mixture: In a medium bowl, whisk together yogurt, almond milk, maple syrup, and vanilla extract until smooth.
  2. Add chia seeds to yogurt: Stir in chia seeds with a rubber spatula and give it a good stir.
  3. Soak: Cover with plastic wrap. Set in the refrigerator for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  4. Finish with toppings: When ready to serve, scoop into bowls and enjoy with your favorite toppings, such as fresh fruit, nuts, seeds, and granola. Serve cold.
Low calorie high protein chia pudding in a jar topped off with fruit.

FAQs

Can you put chia seeds in yogurt?

Yes, chia seeds and yogurt is a delicious high-protein, high-fiber breakfast or snack. The perfect ratio of chia seeds to yogurt is ¼ cup chia seeds (4 tablespoons of chia seeds) to 1 cup yogurt + 1 cup liquid.

Can you eat dry chia seeds in yogurt?

Yes, you can. However, they are easier to digest (and more enjoyable to eat) when they are soaked as they expand and gain a more gel-like consistency.

How long to soak chia seeds in yogurt?

When adding chia seeds to yogurt, soak for at least 4 hours, or overnight. 

What are the health benefits of eating chia seeds with yogurt?

Chia seeds with yogurt are a nutrient powerhouse, packed with omega-3 fatty acids, protein, fiber, vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and gut-healthy probiotics. This, as a result, can help improve heart health, lower cholesterol, aid in weight loss, and promote gut health. To reap the most benefits from this recipe (especially if you are on a weight loss journey), it is best to keep the amount of sugar to a minimum.

If you make this Chia Yogurt Pudding recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chia seed yogurt recipe garnished with fresh strawberries and blackberries.
Print

Yogurt Chia Pudding Recipe

Yogurt chia pudding is a protein-packed (8 grams of protein per serving), fiber-rich make-ahead breakfast that comes together in minutes. Easy to customize and filling, it’s perfect for busy mornings.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 5 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 255kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain yogurt
  • 1 cup almond milk or any non-dairy milk
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup optional
  • ¼ cup chia seeds
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract optional

Optional Add-ins/Toppings:

  • 1 cup fruit strawberries, blackberries, and bananas
  • 1/2 cup nuts or seeds

Instructions

  • Whisk together yogurt, almond milk, maple syrup, and vanilla extract in a medium-sized bowl.
  • Add chia seeds to yogurt mixture, wait for 5 minutes and give it another mix. We do this because chia seeds tend to stick together when mixed with liquid. Doing so helps break up any lingering clumps of chia seeds.
  • Cover with stretch film, and refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  • When ready to serve, ladle into bowls and top each bowl with fresh berries and nuts. Serve while still cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 3 cups of chia seed yogurt pudding that is ideal for 2 generous servings. The below nutritional values are per serving, but they do not include the optional toppings.
  • Yogurt: While I prefer whole milk yogurt, you can use low-fat yogurt as well. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you might need to add a bit more liquid to thin it out. Finally, vegan yogurt can also be used.
  • Adjust consistency: In my experience, the ratio of 1 cup of yogurt + 1 cup of milk to ¼ cup of chia seed provides the best pudding-like texture. As always, you can adjust the quantities to suit your taste. More seeds will equal a thicker chia pudding.
  • Make it your own: This is a delicious base recipe for chia pudding in which you add your toppings of choice. Have fun with different flavors like almond extract, unsweetened cocoa powder, protein powder, or matcha powder; swirl in your favorite fruit jam like strawberry or raspberry, or add texture and crunch with coconut flakes, hemp seeds, almonds, cashews, and more.
  • Make Ahead / Meal Prep: Make a big batch at the beginning of the week, portion it into individual containers (or mason jars), and your overnight chia pudding with yogurt is ready to enjoy throughout the week.
  • Storage: Store chia pudding covered with plastic wrap or in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Reuse: The mixture will thicken the longer it sits. Add a splash of milk or water to thin it out to your desired consistency.
  • This recipe is adapted from Giada’s Chia Seed Pudding recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 255kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 224mg | Potassium: 324mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 133IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 454mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-chia-pudding/feed/ 70
Ayran – Turkish Salty Yogurt Drink https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/#comments Wed, 15 May 2024 20:46:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75384 What is Ayran? If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the…]]>

What is Ayran?

If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the popular Turkish yoghurt drink, ayran. It is one of the most popular drinks we serve with any spicy meal, whether kabob or vegetables. Made up of only three ingredients: yogurt, water, and salt, a serving of Turkish ayran is considered one of the best ways to treat yourself on a hot summer day.

A glass of froth ayran in a glass from the front view.

While it originated from Turkey, many Balkan, Central Asia, Middle East, and Mediterranean countries, such as Greece, Bulgaria, Armenia, Iran, Lebanon, and Iraq, also serve this salted yogurt drink with minor variations. For example, the Iranian version of ayran, called doogh, is often served with fresh mint, while the Arabs make a similar version and call it laban. The Greek version, ariani, is also very similar to ayran.

If you are familiar with Indian lassi, you might recognize the similarity in the texture of both drinks. However, unlike ayran, lassi is usually served sweet, often flavored with sugar, honey, or fresh fruit. 

Ayran Ingredients

The good news is that this Turkish yogurt drink recipe uses only 3 simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Plain Yogurt: I recommend using plain whole milk yogurt with no added sugars. You can also use low-fat or no-fat yogurt, but low-fat yogurt may not achieve the traditional creamy consistency. On the other hand, you can use plain Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), but since it is thicker, you will need to use more water to adjust its consistency.
  • Cold Water: To keep this Mediterranean yogurt drink super refreshing, using cold water is essential. Some recipes suggest using ice, but I don’t recommend it as it can dilute the drink, affecting its consistency and texture.
  • Salt: You can use kosher, table, or sea salt. 

Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions:

  • Mint: During the summer months, I usually add a few leaves of chopped fresh mint to my ayran recipe. You can, however, also use dried mint if that is all you have.
  • Sparkling water: Growing up, we never added sparkling water to ayran, but with carbonated drinks becoming more popular, I see many people making this yogurt drink with sparkling water instead of regular water. This simple substitution for water can make it more palatable for people who enjoy carbonated beverages and are looking for a unique twist on the classic Ayran Turkish drink recipe.
  • Cucumber: Again, it’s not traditional, but I’ve seen a few slices of cucumber added as a garnish to make it look appetizing and reiterate that it is a salty drink.

How To Make Turkish Ayran?

The best part about making this Turkish yogurt recipe is that it takes no more than 5 minutes. I prefer a whisk, but you can also use an electric blender. Whipping it up in a blender is especially handy if serving it to a crowd or making a large batch. Below are the steps to make it both ways:

A collage of images showing how to make ayran drink.
  1. Ensure a smooth texture: Place yogurt in a large bowl or measuring cup and whisk until it is smooth and free of lumps. 
  2. Whisk: Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Alternatively, you can put all of the ingredients in a blender and blend until fully combined.
  3. Chill: Tightly cover your yogurt milk drink in a glass bottle with a lid (or stretch film). Store in the fridge until ready to serve or for up to 2 days.
  4. Garnish & serve: Give it a good shake before pouring it into glasses, and garnish with fresh mint leaves if desired.

What To Serve with Ayran?

This Middle Eastern yogurt drink pairs wonderfully with several dishes, especially those with bold flavors and spices. Whether you’re having a meaty feast, a vegetarian delight, or a simple snack, ayran enhances the flavors and provides a refreshing balance to any dish it’s served with. Here are some delicious options to serve alongside this refreshing yogurt drink:

  • Kabobs: Whether you serve Shish Taouk, Chicken Shawarma, Doner Kebab, or Oven-Baked Beef Kabobs, ayran is the perfect accompaniment, providing a cooling and balancing effect.
  • Meat dishes: Popular Turkish dishes like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant (aka Karniyarik), Turkish Kofta Meatballs, Roast Rack of Lamb, Turkish Pasta, or lahmacun pair beautifully with this ayran yoghurt drink. The cold and refreshing drink cut through the richness of these hearty meat dishes (and spicy foods in general), enhancing the overall flavors.
  • Vegetarian Dishes: This drinkable yogurt drink pairs well with vegetarian dishes like Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, Spinach Borek, and Turkish Tabbouleh. Its tangy flavors complement the savoriness of these dishes, adding a refreshing touch to your meal.
  • Snack: If you want to transport yourself to Turkey within seconds, you need to do what Turks do: Serve ayran with simit (also known as Turkish bagel) for a simple yet satisfying snack. The chewy, sesame-coated bread and the cool, salty yogurt drink are delightful at any time of the day.
Middle eastern yogurt drink served in glasses and in a glass jar.

FAQs

What does ayran taste like?

Ayran has a refreshing, tangy flavor with a slight saltiness. The yogurt gives it a creamy texture, while the added water makes it light and easy to drink. 

Are ayran and kefir the same thing?

No, ayran and kefir are not the same things. Kefir is a fermented milk drink made using kefir grains, which contain a mix of bacteria and yeast, while ayran is made by mixing yogurt, water, and salt. They both have a tangy taste, but kefir offers a slightly effervescent texture due to the fermentation process.

What are the benefits of drinking ayran?

The traditional Turkish drink offers several health benefits. Since it is yogurt-based beverage, it is high in protein and a great source of essential nutrients, including calcium, potassium, and vitamin B12. Additionally, its salt content can help replenish electrolytes lost through sweat, making it particularly beneficial during hot weather or after physical activity. Lastly, the yogurt in ayran provides probiotics, improving gut health and aiding digestion.

Other Must-Try Turkish Recipes

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

A glass of Ayran Turkish yogurt drink from the front view.
Print

Ayran Recipe – Turkish Yogurt Drink

Enjoy the deliciously refreshing Ayran, a Turkish salted yogurt drink made from yogurt, water, and a pinch of salt. Serve it as an accompaniment to your favorite kabobs and meat dishes, or treat yourself to a healthy midday snack to cool off on a hot day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups whole milk plain yogurt unsweetened
  • 1 cup cold water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add-Ins

  • A few leaves fresh mint chopped or dried mint

Instructions

  • Place yogurt in a bowl and whisk until smooth and no lumps remain.
  • Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined and the texture is creamy and smooth.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • If preferred, add in some chopped mint for flavor. Pour into a glass jar, cover tightly with a lid, and chill until ready to serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of ayran, ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using whole milk yogurt, you can also use low- or nonfat yogurt, though it won’t be as creamy. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you should use more water (about 1/2 to 3/4 cup) to get the right consistency. 
  • Storage: This yogurt drink will keep fresh in the fridge for up to 2-3 days as long as it is kept in an airtight container (such as a glass jar with a tight-fitting lid). Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Foam on top: The ayran served in most kebab restaurants has a layer of foam on top, filled with visible air bubbles. Many Turkish people consider frothy ayran a sign of freshness and consider it the best part of the drink. When making it at home, the way to achieve bubbles on top is to whisk or shake it vigorously.
  • Adjust consistency and taste: The ideal yogurt-to-water ratio is 2 to 1. In other words, to make 4 servings of this yogurt drink, I use 2 cups of yogurt and 1 cup of water. However, you can adjust the consistency to your preference by adding more or less of each ingredient. The same goes for the amount of salt you use.
  • Serve it chilled: This drink is best served cold. For the best results, make a batch and store it in a glass jar in the fridge. You can also put the ingredients in a cocktail shaker with a few ice cubes, shake it vigorously, and strain it into a glass. Be sure to strain out the ice to avoid diluting the drink.
  • Keep it in the fridge: Since ayran is a dairy-based drink, it should be stored in the fridge (At or below 40°F (4°C)) to prevent bacterial growth and spoilage.

Nutrition

Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 205mg | Potassium: 190mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 0.1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/feed/ 1
Shawarma Spice Blend Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/ https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/#comments Fri, 10 May 2024 16:35:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75203 What is Shawarma? Shawarma is among the most popular meat dishes in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisine and is known…]]>

What is Shawarma?

Shawarma is among the most popular meat dishes in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisine and is known for its earthy, warm, and savory flavors. To make traditional shawarma, chefs cook a large cut of marinated meat—usually chicken, lamb, beef, or turkey—on a vertical rotisserie rod (also known as a vertical spit), which slowly rotates to cook the protein incrementally. When the outer layer is ready, the chefs will slice off thin slices of meat, which they then add to the final dish.

Shawarma spice mix in a jar with a spoon.

One of the most iconic ways to serve shawarma is in a kind of Mediterranean “wrap” or “pita pocket.” In other words, people often begin with a piece of pita bread, lavash, or any other flatbread. They then spread the grain with a layer of cool, tangy Yogurt Tahini Sauce and top it with a combination of shawarma meat, tomatoes, cucumber, salad greens, and pickles to ensure it has tons of flavor. People often eat this dish with a side of creamy Hummus, garlic sauce, or another herby grain, like Tabbouleh.

Though “shawarma” usually refers to the meat in this dish, the meat usually carries the complex, sweet-yet-spicy taste of the shawarma seasoning blend used during the seasoning/marination process. Because of the mix’s robust taste, many use this seasoning mixture for other uses, from veggie seasoning to flavoring their grains.

What is in Shawarma Seasoning?

Diverse and flavorful, shawarma seasoning ingredients use all-natural spices to achieve its fresh, complex taste. Better yet, you can probably find all these ingredients in your spice cabinet, making this mixture a must-have in any kitchen.

A photo of spices showing what is in shawarma spice.
  • Ground cumin
  • Ground coriander
  • Paprika: We used mild-tasting paprika, but smoked paprika can also be used.
  • Garlic powder
  • Black pepper
  • Ground turmeric
  • Ground cloves
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Ground nutmeg
  • Ground cardamom

Optional Add-Ins

Though we didn’t use it in our original recipe, these additional shawarma seasoning ingredients are a great way to add deliciously smoky, herbaceous undertones to your final dish. Feel free to use ½ teaspoon of each spice, taste it, and add more if necessary.

  • Dried oregano
  • Cayenne pepper
  • Chili powder
  • Sumac

How to Make Shawarma Spice?

It couldn’t be simpler to make this easy diy shawarma spice blend. In fact, you can whip up this five-star mix in less than five minutes!

A collage of images showing how to make shawarma spice.
  1. Combine the mix of spices: Add the ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom to a small mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients together until thoroughly combined.
  2. Use and store: Use the spice blend in your identified recipe. Or, if you’re planning to use it later, store it in an airtight container or jar in a cool, dry place for up to six months.

How to Use Shawarma Spice Mix?

One of my favorite things about this authentic shawarma seasoning recipe is how many ways you can use it—any day of the week! Use this five-minute rub to make my chicken shawarma seasoning, or add it to your go-to sides for an unforgettable spread.

  • Use it to marinate meat or as a dry rub: You can effortlessly elevate any favorite protein—chicken (like my Chicken Shawarma recipe), beef, lamb, turkey, or fish—by infusing your meat with the warm and savory flavor of this delicious spice blend. If you want a dry rub, sprinkle an even layer of the shawarma mix over every side of your meat. Or, for a marinade, combine the homemade shawarma spice mix with oil and lemon juice and let your meat rest in it for a few hours—or even overnight!
  • Roasting or grilling vegetables: If you can’t get enough of the iconic shawarma flavor but aren’t in the mood for meat, I have great news: This tasty seasoning is also a must-have for dozens of other cooked veggies, including cauliflower, eggplant, potatoes, and mushrooms.
  • Legumes and grains: Another great way to use this shawarma spice mix recipe is to sprinkle it over your favorite grain and legume recipes. I particularly love adding this flavorful addition to roasted chickpeas and using it as a seasoning for my hearty and tender Bulgur Pilaf.

FAQs

It doesn’t matter whether you’re making this authentic shawarma seasoning for the first time or have made it one hundred times before. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions, whether they’re about spice substitutes or general taste profiles.

What is a good shawarma spice blend substitute?

If you’re not in the mood to make this homemade shawarma spice but still want to achieve classic Middle Eastern flavors, you’re in luck! My fresh and herby Mediterranean Spice Mix and earthy Baharat Spice Blend both make excellent substitutes.

What does shawarma taste like?

Generally, a shawarma seasoning mix recipe strikes a complex, savory balance of warm, aromatic, and slightly spicy flavors.

Is shawarma spicy?

Like other Mediterranean homemade spice blends, shawarma spice is only mildly spicy, often stemming from its warmer, more peppery ingredients. However, if you want to reduce the level of spiciness in your mix, you may consider reducing the amount of the “spicier” ingredients, like paprika and cloves.

Recipes To Use Shawarma Seasoning

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own homemade shawarma seasoning following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Shawarma spice mix in a jar with a spoon.
Print

Shawarma Spice Blend Recipe

Make this homemade shawarma spice blend recipe and add it to chicken, beef, lamb, fish, or vegetables to incorporate the aromatic flavors of the Middle East and Mediterranean in your daily cooking.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 tablespoons
Calories 14kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon ground cardamom

Instructions

  • Place ground cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom in a small airtight jar.
  • Mix until thoroughly combined.
  • You can use it immediately or cover it tightly with the lid and store it in a dark, dry, and cool place for up to 6 months.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 3 ½ tablespoons to  4 tablespoons of Shawarma seasoning. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
  • Multiply the recipe: Making large batches of this shawarma mixture is a great way to ensure you always have it on hand whenever your recipe calls for it. Therefore, please feel free to multiply this spice recipe and store the extra mixture for later use.
  • Addition of salt: Though some recipes may include salt among their shawarma spices, I prefer to omit this ingredient. Saltiness is hard to adjust in recipes—especially depending on your base—so I prefer adding salt according to the recipe I use.
  • Use the freshest spices: It’s no secret that fresh spices have a brighter, more potent flavor than old or dried spices. Therefore, I highly encourage you to ensure your pre-ground seasonings are as fresh and flavorful as possible before adding them to your shawarma seasoning mix. Or—if possible—you may also grind your whole spices with a spice grinder for extra flavor.
  • Experiment with the amount used: Depending on your desired recipe and the serving size of your dish, you might want to use more or less of this shawarma spice mix. Our rule of thumb is to use two tablespoons per pound of meat, but you may add more or less if you prefer a stronger or milder flavor. (Keep in mind that if you make this recipe as written, you’ll come out with 3.5-4 tablespoons of seasoning, which is ideal for two pounds of meat.)
  • Toast your spices (if you have the time): While it may sound like an extra step, toasting your spices before grinding will take this spice blend to the next level. To do so, add the whole spices to a dry skillet and toast, stirring often, over medium-low heat for about 4-5 minutes.  Then, you can use your spice grinder to grind them to a fine powder. Remember that following our recipe, you can use an equal amount of any whole spice, but the amount may be slightly less or more than its version made with ground spices.

Nutrition

Calories: 14kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 62mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 257IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/feed/ 3
Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/#comments Thu, 09 May 2024 15:35:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75139 Ingredients You’ll Need While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are…]]>

The Art of Using Greek Yogurt in Savory Recipes

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

When I first moved to the US over 20 years ago, my friends would tease me for adding plain yogurt to almost everything. Growing up in Türkiye, that was just how we ate. 

I still can’t imagine a savory meal without a scoop of yogurt on the side.

While the US has finally embraced yogurt as a breakfast staple, there is a whole world of savory possibilities for this ingredient. And let me tell you, we haven’t even scratched the surface of what it can do.

This Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce is the perfect place to start.

Here is why this recipe works where others fail:

  • Room-temperature ingredients are key: I know it’s tempting to grab the yogurt right out of the fridge when you’re in a hurry, but please take the chill off first! If you drop ice-cold yogurt into a hot pan, it basically “panics” and seizes up, which is how you end up with that grainy, separated mess. Just let all your ingredients sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes while the water boils. Giving it a little head start at room temperature is the easiest way to guarantee your sauce stays nice and silky.
  • Low & controlled heat is key to preventing curdling: Many creamy sauces require a rolling boil to thicken and become creamy. Yogurt, however, is prone to curdling because it has a lower fat-to-protein ratio than heavy cream. The “secret” here is to keep the heat low and only warm the sauce until it’s silky and combined.
  • The Umami Balance: While you can mimic the texture, you often run into a taste issue. Greek yogurt is naturally tangy, and it can be overwhelming on its own. My solution here is Parmesan cheese. I use it not only to tame the tangy flavor of yogurt but also to round out its acidity with its salty umami notes. This is why I can confidently say this sauce is a good alternative to a rich, creamy traditional Alfredo.
  • Starch as the Emulsifier: Instead of using a roux or flour, we use starchy pasta water to bind the yogurt and cheese. This way, the sauce won’t slide off the pasta or separate.
  • A “Lighter” Decadence: You get a similar, satisfying mouthfeel to a traditional cream sauce, with a protein boost and none of the heavy feeling afterward.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to keep in mind as you gather everything.

Flat lay of ingredients for Greek yogurt pasta sauce including fettuccine, a bowl of yogurt, garlic cloves, and fresh parsley on a marble surface.

Pasta: I usually reach for a long pasta (like fettuccine and spaghetti), as it pairs well with creamy sauces, but any pasta you enjoy will work.

However, penne or similar shapes work just as well. If you are following a gluten-free diet, feel free to use your favorite gluten-free pasta. And for a veggie-packed option, my zucchini noodles are also a great alternative.

Greek yogurt: Be sure to use plain, full-fat Greek yogurt and let it come to room temperature before starting. Low-fat or nonfat yogurt is more likely to curdle and doesn’t have the same silky consistency because it doesn’t have enough fat.

Short on time? I get it, if you are making it for a quick weeknight dinner, it is likely that you won’t have the time to take out the yogurt in advance. A good shortcut is to put the yogurt in a jar and soak it in a bowl of warm water for 5 minutes.

Butter: I use unsalted butter so I can control the seasoning more precisely. Olive oil can also be used, but I prefer the depth of flavor you get with butter.

Garlic: Fresh garlic is best for this recipe. Peel and mince it finely so it softens quickly without browning. For a lighter garlic flavor, you can use ¾ to 1 teaspoon garlic powder.

Parmesan cheese: Pick up a block of Parmigiana Reggiano (and grate it yourself) or buy the grated cheese containers near the cheese section. Pecorino Romano can be a great substitute if need be.

Red pepper flakes (optional): A small pinch adds a gentle heat; you can leave them out if you prefer a milder dish.

Nutmeg (optional): If you are making this as an Alfredo sauce alternative, add a pinch of nutmeg to mimic the classic Alfredo sauce.

How to Make Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

Making this pasta sauce with Greek yogurt recipe is simple and takes no more than 20 minutes from start to finish. 

The key is gentle heat and a little patience when warming the yogurt. Here’s how I make it:

Side by side image showing fettuccine boiling in a pot and a hand reserving a cup of starchy pasta water for the sauce.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: Start by bringing a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package directions until al dente, about 12 to 14 minutes. 

Pro Tip: Your pasta should have a slight bite. If you cook it too long, it will likely get mushy when mixed with the sauce.

Step 2 – Reserve the pasta water: Before draining, carefully reserve 1 cup of the pasta cooking water (you won’t need all of it, but it’s good to have extra). 

This starchy water is essential for loosening the sauce later and helping it coat the pasta smoothly. Drain the cooked pasta and set it aside.

Two-panel image showing garlic sautéing in butter and shredded Parmesan cheese being whisked into a creamy Greek yogurt base.

Step 3 – Sauté the garlic: Return the now-empty pot to the stove and melt the butter over medium-low heat. Add the minced garlic and cook for about 1-2 minutes, just until fragrant. Adjust the heat as needed to avoid burning the butter or garlic.

Step 4 – Make the yogurt sauce: Reduce the heat to very low. Add the full-fat, room-temperature Greek yogurt and Parmesan cheese. Stir constantly for 1-2 minutes, just until the yogurt is gently warmed and the cheese has fully melted.

Do not let the sauce simmer, boil, or bubble. The yogurt should warm slowly. Add the reserved pasta water gradually, 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring continuously, until the sauce loosens and reaches your desired consistency. This starchy water is what helps emulsify the yogurt and cheese into a velvety sauce that clings to the noodles.

Pro Tip: This process, adding warm pasta water gradually into cool yogurt, is called tempering, and it is critical to making this recipe work. If you add it in large quantities without whisking, the proteins in the sauce will “panic,” and your yogurt pasta sauce will likely curdle.

This is also a good time to season with salt and black pepper to taste.

A collage of images showing cooked fettuccine being tossed in yogurt sauce and the final garnished pasta in the pot.

Step 5 – Add the pasta to the yogurt sauce: Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss with kitchen tongs until all the noodles are evenly coated with the sauce.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: Transfer the pasta to a serving bowl and finish with chopped fresh parsley, red pepper flakes (if using), and extra Parmesan cheese. Serve while it is still warm.

A large bowl of creamy fettuccine made with a Greek yogurt pasta sauce, topped with fresh parsley and red pepper flakes.

Troubleshooting Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

If you follow this yogurt sauce for pasta recipe as written, you should not run into any issues. That said, if something looks off, here are a few ways to fix things:

How to fix a broken sauce?: Remove the pan from the heat and whisk in a small amount of additional Greek yogurt, about 1 tablespoon, until the sauce comes back together.

Sauce looks grainy: This usually means the heat was too high. Lower the heat and continue stirring gently. The sauce should be warmed through, not cooked for a long time or allowed to bubble.

It’s too thick. How do I thin it out?: Add more reserved pasta water, no more than 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring well between each addition until the sauce loosens to your liking.

Greek yogurt alfredo sauce mixed with cooked noodles in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce Recipe

This creamless Greek yogurt pasta sauce is silky-smooth and ready in just 20 minutes. It's a protein-packed alternative to Alfredo that uses a simple trick; slowly whisking in warm pasta water-to keep the yogurt from curdling at low heat. A budget-friendly, five-ingredient meal that feels fancy but is easy enough for a busy weeknight.
Course Dinner, Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 375kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces fettuccine pasta or other pasta, such as spaghetti
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 cup plain whole milk Greek yogurt at room temperature
  • cup shredded parmesan cheese plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for the pasta cooking water
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped
  • 1/8 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil and cook the pasta according to the package directions to al dente, about 12-14 minutes.
  • Reserve 1 cup pasta water then drain the pasta. We won't need all of it, but it is good to have enough. Set aside.
  • Place the now-empty pot on the stove. Add the butter and melt over medium heat.
  • Whisk in the garlic and cook for 1 minute or until translucent. Lower the heat, if needed, to avoid browning.
  • While still on low heat, add in the Greek yogurt and parmesan cheese. Cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or two just until the yogurt is warmed through and the cheese is melted. Add the reserved pasta water as needed, 1 tablespoon at a time, to thin and smooth out the sauce.
  • Season the sauce with salt and pepper. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  • Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss to ensure all the pasta is coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and top with parsley, parmesan cheese and red pepper flakes, if preferred. Serve!

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of pasta sauce, which, when mixed with cooked pasta, serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Use full-fat yogurt: This recipe requires thick, whole-milk Greek yogurt, so I do not recommend substituting it with regular yogurt. The proper fat-to-protein ratio and warming it over low heat prevent the sauce from curdling.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Gently warm it in a large skillet or pan on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. The sauce will thicken as it sits in the fridge, so add a splash of water to restore it to a smooth consistency.
  • Optional mix-ins: This sauce is a great base for added vegetables. To keep it quick, sauté a handful of baby spinach or sliced mushrooms in a bit of olive oil in the pot before starting Step 3, then set them aside. Once your pasta and sauce are combined, simply fold the veggies back in for an easy veggie-packed pasta dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 909mg | Potassium: 295mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1007IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 2mg

How to Store and Reheat

Here are my best tips for storing and reheating this creamy yogurt-based pasta sauce:

  • Storage: Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: Gently reheat the pasta on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. Add a splash of water as needed to loosen the sauce and restore its smooth consistency. Do your best to avoid letting it simmer for too long or boil.
  • Microwave: I do not recommend reheating this sauce in the microwave on high heat, as it can cause the yogurt to separate. If you do use the microwave, reheat in short 15-20 second intervals at low power, stirring in between.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze Greek yogurt sauces, but I do not recommend it. If you have to, then be sure to store the pasta sauce separately, as cooked pasta loses its texture when thawed.

What to Serve With This Recipe

So you made this Greek yogurt pasta sauce and mixed it with some spaghetti, and now you want to turn it into a whole meal? Well, I am glad you asked because I have a few great suggestions:

Other Savory Yogurt Recipes

If you enjoy cooking with yogurt in savory dishes, there are so many delicious ways to use it beyond pasta sauce.

Below are a few yogurt-based recipes that I think you’ll enjoy:

  • Five-minute Creamy Salad Dressing (or Sauce): This Greek Yogurt Dressing is creamy, easy to make, and comes together in less than 5 minutes. It tastes better than store-bought dressing and is delicious drizzled over salads, grain bowls, or roasted vegetables.
  • The most loved Turkish Breakfast: If there is one dish that instantly takes me back to my childhood, it’s Turkish Eggs. Silky poached eggs are served over garlicky yogurt and finished with a warm chili butter sauce.
  • Tangy Meal Prep Solution: This Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade is bright, tangy, and incredibly versatile. Made with Greek yogurt, lemon, and fresh herbs, it works beautifully whether you grill, bake, or pan-cook the chicken.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/feed/ 9
Baked Ziti With Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti-roasted-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti-roasted-eggplant/#comments Mon, 08 Apr 2024 13:27:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13594 If you have been following me for a while, you know my love for eggplant. Over the years of writing…]]>

If you have been following me for a while, you know my love for eggplant. Over the years of writing recipes for this website, I have shared plenty of delicious and Simple Eggplant Recipes. This easy eggplant-baked ziti is the newest to the collection. It takes cues from my Baked Eggplant Parm, and it is just as comforting.  So, if you are a fan of Italian classics with eggplant, read on.

And if you are in need of more vegetarian eggplant recipes for dinner, also check out my Easy Ratatouille recipe.

Baked ziti with eggplant garnished with basil from the top view.

Ingredients

This pasta recipe is made with simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store but most of which you probably already have on hand. Gather together:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: When selecting eggplants for this recipe, prioritize finding medium-sized ones with a shiny, dark purple exterior. Among the various types of eggplants available, I think globe, Italian, or graffiti eggplants are best suited for this eggplant ziti bake. You’d want to cut them into 1 to 1 ½ inch cubes for best results. If you are new to using eggplant in your cooking, be sure to check out my detailed post on How to Cut Eggplant for more information.
  • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: A simple mix of Kosher salt, black pepper, and red pepper flakes allows the eggplant to shine.
  • Pasta: Stick to tradition with ziti, or try any short-cut tubular pasta like penne or rigatoni. Opt for your favorite gluten-free pasta to keep it gluten-free friendly.
  • Tomato sauce: I used my Homemade Tomato Basil Sauce, which I always have in the freezer, but any jarred tomato sauce or marinara sauce will do.
  • Ricotta cheese: If you are feeling ambitious, you can make Homemade Ricotta Cheese, or simply buy it from the store or your local Italian market. I prefer full-fat, whole-milk ricotta cheese, but low-fat will also work.
  • Fresh basil: I used basil in both the ricotta mixture and for garnish. Fresh parsley would be a nice addition, too.
  • Mozzarella cheese: You can buy pre-shredded mozzarella cheese or shred a block of low-moisture mozzarella at home. If you want even more depth of flavor, experiment with other cheeses like provolone, fontina, or Asiago. A sprinkle of grated Parmigiano-Reggiano cheese would also be a welcome addition.

How to Make Eggplant Ziti Bake?

While this baked ziti with roasted eggplant recipe uses eggplant cubes instead of slices, I used my Baked Eggplant Recipe to make the eggplant portion of this recipe. Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line two large baking sheets with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to roast eggplants and mix cooked pasta with tomato sauce.
  1. Prepare eggplant: Dice the eggplant and divide the eggplant cubes between the baking sheets. Drizzle with olive oil and season with salt, black pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using). Toss well and distribute into a single layer on the baking sheet.
  2. Bake eggplant: Roast the eggplant pieces in the oven for 30-35 minutes, turning the eggplant halfway through for even roasting. Set aside to cool. Do not turn the oven off. 
  3. Cook the pasta: When there are about 10-15 minutes left on the eggplant cooking time, place a large pot of water over high heat and bring to a boil. Generously season the boiling water with salt. Add the pasta to the large pot of boiling water and cook until al dente. Be sure to check the package directions, as the timing might differ depending on the brand. Mine took about 9-10 minutes.
  4. Mix pasta and sauce: When the pasta is ready, reserve 1 cup of the pasta water and drain. Place the hot pasta in a large bowl, add the tomato sauce, and toss, ensuring that the pasta is fully coated with the sauce. If needed, stir in some of the reserved pasta water to prevent it from sticking.
Person showing how to layer pasta with roasted aubergine and ricotta mixture.
  1. Make ricotta basil mix: In a small bowl, mix the ricotta and chopped basil. Season with salt and pepper.
  2. Begin to assemble: Spray a large oven-proof baking dish (9×13 inch) with vegetable oil cooking spray. Place half of the ziti and tomato sauce mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish. Then, spread half of the eggplant cubes evenly on top.
  3. Add cheese: Add half of the ricotta-basil mixture in dollops and sprinkle the whole thing with half of the shredded mozzarella.
  4. Finish the second layer: Repeat the same steps, starting with the remaining pasta mixture, remaining eggplant cubes, and ricotta. Finish it off with a final layer of cheese.
  5. Bake: Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until bubbly and the cheese on top is lightly golden brown.
  6. Serve: Rest for 10 minutes. When ready to serve, sprinkle it with fresh basil leaves, parmesan cheese, and a drizzle of olive oil, if desired. Enjoy!

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Freeze?

Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips to ensure all your efforts don’t go to waste when making this eggplant ziti recipe:

  • Make Ahead: Follow the recipe as written and make ahead up to 2 days in advance. Just make sure to bring it to room temperature, cover it tightly with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator.
  • Storage: Leftover eggplant baked ziti will keep in an airtight container in the fridge, either stored as a whole or cut into individual servings for easy serving, for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: While I don’t necessarily recommend freezing, you can freeze the baked pasta in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. But for best results, I recommend making a batch and freezing before baking. Keep in mind that the pasta will lose some of its texture and become mushy once thawed.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen baked eggplant ziti (either baked or unbaked) overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: If you are reheating leftovers, reheat in a 350-degree F oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen then thawed, follow the recipe instructions as written and bake in a 350-degree F oven for 30-35 minutes.

What to Serve it With?

Roasted eggplant with ziti is delicious all on its own, but there are plenty of ways to serve it that complement the comforting, cheesy Italian flavors. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Here are some of my expert tips on how to make the best-baked ziti with eggplant:

  • Cooking eggplant: While I love roasting eggplant in the oven, you can use other cooking methods. If you have an air fryer, cooking Eggplant in Air Fryer is quicker. If you don’t, try my Pan Fried Eggplant. All you need is a skillet and 15 minutes of your time.
  • Don’t overcook the pasta: Cook the pasta according to the package directions, just until al dente, since the pasta is going to absorb moisture from the sauce and continue to cook in the oven.
  • Mix the pasta with the sauce: A key step in outstanding baked ziti is to mix the pasta with the tomato sauce in a large bowl before layering. You might think of it as an extra step but I promise it makes a difference in the overall taste, texture, and creaminess.
  • Season as you go: As with most layered baked pasta recipes, this recipe has multiple steps and components, so it is important to season the eggplant, sauce, pasta, and ricotta cheese as you go. Feel free to use the recipe below as a starting place and adjust the seasoning based on your taste buds and dietary restrictions.

FAQs

Should you bake ziti covered or uncovered?

I love baking ziti uncovered, as this helps some of the moisture evaporate in the oven, resulting in crispy pasta edges and a golden brown color.

What’s the difference between lasagna and baked pasta?

Lasagna is made with full lasagna sheets and sometimes a bechamel sauce, which is a bit more labor intensive as you have to be deliberate about layering the pasta, sauce, and cheese in equal amounts. Baked ziti, on the other hand, is the easier approach that requires a simple toss of the pasta with the sauce, then a quick addition of ricotta and mozzarella cheese.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Baked Ziti with Eggplant recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Baked Ziti with Eggplant fresh out of the oven from the top view.
Print

Baked Ziti with Eggplant Recipe

This baked ziti with eggplant recipe is a vegetarian weeknight pasta dish layered with roasted eggplant, homemade tomato basil sauce, and ricotta cheese. The definition of comfort food, this pasta dinner is perfect with a green salad on the side or a side dish with any of your meat dishes.
Course Main Dish
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 445kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Eggplant:

  • 2 medium-sized globe eggplants cut into 1-inch cubes – 1 lbs each
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon dried red pepper flakes optional

For the Baked Ziti:

  • 16 ounces ziti pasta or any other tubular pasta
  • vegetable spray
  • 2 cups homemade tomato-basil sauce* divided
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk ricotta
  • ½ cup fresh basil leaves chopped – plus more as garnish
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups shredded mozzarella

Instructions

  • For the Roasted Eggplant: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Divide the eggplant cubes among the baking sheets. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle them with salt, black pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using). Toss them well to ensure that they are distributed evenly and in a single layer.
  • Roast in the oven for 30-35 minutes, turning the eggplant halfway through for even roasting. Set aside to cool. Do not turn the oven off.
  • Meanwhile, cook the pasta. Ten to fifteen minutes before the eggplant is ready, bring a large pot of water to a boil. Season the pasta water generously with salt. Add the pasta and cook until it is al dente. Timing might differ depending on the brand you use, so be sure to check the instructions on the packaging. Mine took about 9-10 minutes.
  • Reserve 1 cup of the pasta water. Then drain the pasta, and place it in a large bowl. Pour the tomato sauce into the bowl and toss to combine, ensuring that the pasta is fully coated with the sauce. If the pasta sticks, feel free to use some of the reserved pasta water to keep it moist.
  • In a separate small bowl, mix together the ricotta and chopped basil. Season with kosher salt and black pepper.
  • To assemble, spray a large oven-proof casserole dish (9X13 is ideal) with vegetable spray and oil on the sides of the dish.
  • Place half of the ziti and tomato sauce mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish. Spread half of the baked eggplant cubes evenly on top.
  • Add half of the ricotta-basil mixture on top in dollops.
  • Sprinkle the whole thing with half of the shredded mozzarella.
  • Repeat the same steps for the second layer, starting with the rest of the ziti, eggplant cubes, and ricotta. Finish it off with an even sprinkling of the remaining mozzarella cheese.
  • Bake for 30-35 minutes or until it is bubbly and the cheese on top is lightly browned.
  • When ready to serve, sprinkle it with fresh basil leaves. Serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a large casserole dish (9X13) baked ziti, which is ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Tomato Sauce: While I used homemade tomato sauce, your favorite store-bought tomato or marinara sauce would perfectly work in this recipe. 
  • Storage: Like any pasta dish, this baked ziti is best served the day it is baked. However, you can store the leftovers in the fridge in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: While I don’t necessarily recommend freezing, you can freeze the baked pasta in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. But for best results, I recommend making a batch and freezing before baking. Thaw the frozen baked eggplant ziti (either baked or unbaked) overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: If you are reheating leftovers, reheat in a 350-degree F oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen then thawed, follow the recipe instructions as written and bake in a 350-degree F oven for 30-35 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 445kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 759mg | Potassium: 643mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 739IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 237mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti-roasted-eggplant/feed/ 17